¥ on LAB DAILY Filmed & Processed by the Library Photographic Service University of California Berkeley 94720 ll Reduction Ratio —110— =z pes == Oo i spa = Bee ag Ce li fle I No On I MICROCOPY RESOLUTION TEST CHART NATIONAL BUREAU OF STANDARDS-1963-A Ja LLL LLL UL LLL m LL mi Th hm mf Tm Tim DOCUMENT SOURCE: Le LA "HE MASTER NEGATIVE (FROM WHICH THIS REPRODUCTION WAS MADE, 'S STORED UNDER THE SUPERVISION OF THE LIBRARY PHOTOGRAPHIC SERVICE, ROOM 20, MAIN LIBRARY, UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, JERKELEY, CALIFORNIA 9 4 7 2 0 FOR ADDITIONAL REPRODUCTION REQUEST MASTER NEGATIVE NUMBER 0 2 HAND-BOOK OF COLLOQUIAL TIBETAN. HAND-BOOK COLLOQUIAL TIBETAN. A PRACTICAL GUIDE TO THE LANGUAGE OF CENTRAL TIBET. IN THREE PARTS. BY GRAHAM SANDBERG, B. A, CHAPLAIN, H. M. BENGAL GOVERNMENT; AUTHOR : ‘“ MANUAL OF SIKKIM-BHUTIA.” @ulentta: THACKER, SPINK AND CO. 1894. Oriental Library pL 26/3 A. w PREFACE. e@on- The present work is designed to afford not only a complete guide to the Vernacular cf Tibet Proper, but also considerable technical information to the travel- ler in that little-explored land. The Tibetan territory is computed to hold a population of six millions, sparsely distributed over some 650,000 square miles ; and the time is said to be approaching when these extraordinary regions will be laid open to the enter- prise of the explorer, the missionary, and the trader. In the days, then, that are to come, a knowledge of the idiom of the inhabitants will be a necessity. Up to the present date, no grammar of the collo- quial language has been placed before the public. Jaschke, indeed, in his learned works, has fully dis- sected the old classical language; but the modern speech differs so materially from the literary vehicle, both in vocabulary and in grammatical structure, that a proficient in the latter might in vain attempt to hold converse with the native of to-day. The famous Moravian linguist, however, has brought to- gether in his Dictionary great store of facts concern- ing the spoken tongue, particularly the Western ; and that store has proved a treasure-hoard to myself in these pages. It is the lingua franca of the Tibetan Empire which has been analysed and codified in this Hand- book ; not the dialectic forms spoken in corners of CALCUTTA : — PRINTED AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS. 1894. A ——————— V1 PREFACE. the country, as in LAdak, Lahul, and Sikkim, but the general Vernacular current in the heart of the land, and which will carry the traveller from west to east and from north-east to south. Besides availing my- self of materials already published, I have had the advantage of close intercourse with two men formerly resident in Lh4sd. Those two I freely consulted. A stay of three months in Darjiling last year, where I made the acquaintance of Tibetans from various dis- tricts, afforded much further help. Three Parts are here attempted. First; the gram- matical circumstances of the colloquial have been minutely set forth, with copious examples on every page. Secondly; a body of useful conversations has been prepared with especial view to the peculiar incidents of Tibetan travel. To these have been added many technical lists, bearing on the Religion, Natural History, and Geography of the land ; and, as much of these collections is new, it is hoped they may prove valuable. Thirdly; the Compendious Vocabulary, in Tibetan and Ladaki, contains an assort- ment of such words and expressions as it was thought would prove most useful and useable. Alternative renderings have been generally avoided as productive of bewilderment. A long illness, let me add, has caused the postponement of the publication of this work, but the result of the delay has been a complete revision of the whole. SUBATHU : Paxsin] GRAHAM SANDBERG. August, 1894. TABLE OF CONTENTS. — PART I. GRAMMAR OF THE COLLOQUIAL. Page CHAPTER I.—SOUNDS AND SYLLABLES 9 VoweLs—CoNsoNANTS—THE TONE PiTcH IN TIBETAN—SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES. CHAPTER II.—THE ARTICLE . 20 CHAPTER III.—NOUN SUBSTANTIVES 22 A.—ForM AND ETYMOLOGY. B.—DECLENSION oF NOUNS. CHAPTER 1IV —ADJECTIVES... ves we 82 CHAPTER V.—CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMBERS 39 43 CHAPTER VI.—THE VERB .. ver aoe SECTION A.—FORMATION—SUBSTANTIVE VERBS. B.—THE VERB ACTIVE. C.—TuE VERB PASSIVE, »” CHAPTER VII.—PRONOUNS ... _ i. CHAPTER VIIIL.—ADVERBS ... oe “er ves CHAPTER IX.—POSTPOSITIONS “ .- CHAPTER X.—CONJUNCTIONS CHAPTER XI.—DERIVATIVES AND FORMATIVES CHAPTER XII.—IDIOMATIC PHRASES CHAPTER XIIL.—COMPOSITION ‘or on PART IIL PHRASES—CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES— TECHNICAL LISTS. NOTES ON CERTAIN LETTERS ve oe vee Brief Orders co Everyday Questions and Answers ... Asking the Way re ror ‘oe "ee ot D.—IpiomMatic AND CoMPOUND VERBS. 81 92 97 103 108 114 120 131 134 136 139 1 i ! i viii TABLE OF CONTENTS. The Weather At an Inn, &c. Mountaineering Paying and Receiving Visits Cooking Utensils Articles of Food in use in Tibet Preparing and Eating Food ” oe ‘es Over the Kanglachhen Pass between Wallung and Tibet ... Time—Age—Seasons ... vs Trees and Plants of Tibet Fauna and Avifauna of Tibet Sporting in Tibet Shopping in Lhasa Visit to Kinkhording The Scavenger Beggars Lakes, Rivers, Boating ... Exclamatory Phrases Medical Terms Monies, Weights, and Measures ... Titles and Personages in Tibet Religious Edifices and Adjuncts thereof Tibetan Mythology I. Buddhist Sects . Etymology of Place Names in Tibe* PART III. VOCABULARY. ENGLISH—LADAKI—COLLOQUIAL OF CENTRAL TIBET—LITERARY TIBETAN ves APPENDIX. MONGOL-TARTAR WORDS AND PHRASES PART I. CRAMMAR OF THE COLLOQUIAL. THE TIBETAN GRAPHIC SYSTEM. —e EAI ET SIMPLE CHARACTERS. Tenues. High-toned Low-toned Nasale. Asprratee. Aspirate. mm Ka Rr Kha all Gha KR’ Nga oD © Cha & Chha E’ Jha 9 Nya 5 Ta q Ta ZI Pa J Pa J Bha N Ma a) Dha § Na 3 Tsa & Tsa E" Dz'a A Wa A Sa 9 Sha § Zha = Za xX’ Ra A" La QR’ Aa AW Ya 5 Ha WW a Each consonant carries with it the vowel a, as indicated above, changed to e, 7, or 0, according as © & or ~~ is marked over the consonant, and into u, if ~» is marked underneath. . . ov - PREFIXES.— In numerous words, if any one of the five letters, = N\ J Nor CW stands first in a syllable, it is termed a Prefix, and is silent, the letter following being sounded as initial. In all syllables comprising three or more characters (reckoning doubles and triplets as one only), should one of these five stand first it may be known to be a Prefix. In all two-character syllables the first letter is never a Prefix, except when the second letter bears - -~ a vowel mark or is a double or triplet (as in NX 5 QQ 7, ar 2m sounded do, de, di, ta.) If the letter following a Prefix is a Low-toned Aspirate, then the latter loses its aspiration and becomes an ordinary Medial. v 1 . —evra v Thus, Sli sounds dhag, but JA day ; AN “ghot, but FIN gor. DUPLEX CHARACTERS. (The actual pronunciation given in bracketted Italics.) 1. Y subjoined ; as J) Kya (kya) RB Khya (khya) ar Ghya (kya) g Pya (chya) yg P’ya (chhya) g Bhya (jhya, or chya) § Mya (nya). R subjoined ; as TI’ Kra (ta) AR Khra (fa) J] Ghra (dha) " Dhra (dha, or ta) q Pra (ta) x Pra (ta) q Bhra (dha, or ta) § Mra (mra, or ma) y Sra (sa, or shra) % Hra (shra). L subjoined; as [| Kla Al" Ghla & Bhla a Za a Rla Qla. All sounded La, except & which makes Da. R superscribed; as J] (ga) (ka) R (nga) E' (ja) 5 (wo) 5 (0) § (do) § (ma) A (ba) & (ma) I (tsa) BE (dza). w J Go) F (ga) F (cha) F (GO) YT (ta) 2 (da) A (pa) 7 (ha). as § (ka) F (90) F (go) § (nya) y (ta) & (da) y (na) N (pa) ¥ (ba) SN (ma) ¥ (tsa). Note.—~The superscribing letter is not sounded (at least in Tibet Proper), but where it surmounts a low-toned aspirate, the latter, as will be seen, loses the aspiration. THE TIBETAN GRAPHIC SYSTEM. em EFT SIMPLE CHARACTERS. Tenues. High-toned Low-toned Nasalce. Asprratee. Aspirate. mT Ka Rr Kha ay Gha KR Nga © Cha ® Chbha BE" Jha 9" Nya 5 Ta g Ta J Dha & Na A Pa J Pa J’ Bha N° Ma I Tsa & Tsa BE" Dz'a A Wa A Sa TJ Sha § Zha = Za Xx’ Ra A" La AQ Aa WwW Ya 5 Ha Wa Each consonant carries with it the vowel a, as indicated above, changed to e, 7, or 0, according as © & or ~~ is marked over the consonant, and into u, if ~o is marked underneath. - + - pv - PREFIXES.— In numerous words, if any one of the five letters, = N A NN or [A stands first in a syllable, it is termed a Prefix, and is silent, the letter following being sounded as initial. In all syllables comprising three or more characters (reckoning doubles and triplets as one only), should one of these five stand first it may be known to be a Prefix. In all two-character syllables the first letter is never a Prefix, except when the second letter bears - -~ a vowel mark or is a double or triplet (as in NEN 5 QAN RY, La ‘ ies | gounded do, de, di, ta.) If the letter following a Prefix is a Low-toned Aspirate, then the latter loses its aspiration and becomes an ordinary Medial. N ee -— re Thus, ST sounds dhag, but JA dag ; AN _ghot, but HN Goi DUPLEX CHARACTERS. (The actual pronunciation given in bracketted Italics.) Y subjoined; as T° Kya (kya) RB Khya (khya) J)" Ghya (kya) g Pya (chya) gy P’ya (chhya) g Bhya (jhya, or chya) &' Mya (nya). R subjoined; as T Kra (fa) AR Khra (fa) H| Ghra (dha) 2 Dhra (dha, or ta) q Pra (ta) a Pra (fa) q Bhra (dha, or ta) y Mra (mra, or ma) y Sra (sa, or shra) 5 Hra (shra). L subjoined; as [| Kla A] Ghla & Bhla a Za & Rla Sla. All sounded La, except a which makes Da. 9. R superscribed; as J (ga) (ka) K (nga) E (ja) 5 (wo 5 (0) § (@) § 0a) J (ba) &' (ma) 8 (tsa) E (dza). as ml (ka) F (nga) TF (cha) 7 (ja) YT (ta) 2 (da) Ff (pa) 3 (ha). as MN (ka) MH (ga) F (nga) & (nya) 5 (ta) & (da) x (na) F (pa) ¥ (ba) £2) (ma) x (tsa). Note.—The superscribing letter is not sounded (at least in Tibet Proper), but where it surmounts a low-toned aspirate, the latter, as will be seen, loses the aspiration. TRIPLICATE CHARACTERS. M Riya (kya) T° Rghya (952) E' Rmya (nya) J Skya (kya) Ff Sghya (gya) F Spya (chya) F (ya) 3 Smya (nya) a Skra (ta) A (da) N' Sdhra (da) 3 Spra (ta) y Sbhra (da) gy Smra (mara). 2 Again must be noted that a surmounting letter deprives the low-toned aspirate of its aspiration. Thus ol sounds dha, but a soun m ds da. FINAL LETTERS; &c. Al" is styled second final after H| E" ° and & and is then silent ; as in HRA kap, ARN dang. XI" as ordinary final either sounds 7, or being dropped modifies preceding vowel ; as GN nai or ne, Ear chhot, SRE ds. 5 final is inaudible, but modifies preceding vowel ; as 55 ne’ & as final is sounded, but, like 5 modifies a into e, o into and » into # H| followed by Al", as second final, is usually dropped prolonging last vowel ; as FAT na, NF §hi ~~ The inherent a of any final is unheard save in one-character syliables. ql or N' as finals sound % or 1v a = r p respectively : ARH lakpa, FR gyop- Where J" prefix is followed by A" as initial, both are silent ; . - , N - as RIAN" 4, ARR" wing. RFR yid. Tq’ as particle sounds wa ; Q" A’ a as initials wa, wi y) mitials wa, wu, wo. a, Fo A SAS NSONN NE Sel ir TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER L. ‘SOUNDS AND sYLLABLES. — 8 2 — The pronunciation of Tibetan words differs greatly from the orthography, and in the chief colloquial idioms there are many letters and combinations of letters which have lost their primitive sounds. That in earlier times the words were generally sounded as they still continue to be spelt seems plain, from the fact that at the present day, in the remotest fastnesses of Tibet, and, curiously, where the po- ad, the spoken language adheres more Or pulace cannot re This is the case in less closely to the original spelling. Skardo, north of Kashmir, as well as in the wild mountainous tracts of Amdo on the Chinese border, provinces 3,000 miles apart. The decay or change of pronunciation is to be found g as initials or finals, as well principally in letters occurrin eo Sanskrit characters, out of ag in letters compounded, as ar two or three others. Our present treatise deals solely with the speech in general use. Accordingly, in these pages all words shall be spelt as sounded ; and therefore, also, there can be no they are now the pronunciation of words heed here to explain the rules for written in Tibetan characters. 2 1 0 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CONSONANTS, 11 The sounds occurring i i 1 following :— urring in the main colloquial are the i + another half-tone, occurring immediately before the letters m or d, the latter consonant as a final being VOWELS. then often hardly audible. May be popularly des- , the short a. b cribed as the letter “u” pronounced in an affected, * honk a, beard usually as the English » in sun,” mincing manner ; but it 18, of course, a regular be gh nm some words approaching to the a im vowel sound in several continental languages : heard man,” “sand,” &e. in Miller in German, and in few in French. : the longer a, which shall al nounced ate in ¢ father.” ways be marked, pro- 3 CONSONANTS. . agin‘ kettle.” : the prolonged a, sounded almost 3 J as a double or iterat } ’ a, both with the Ttalian sound; perhaps ho go | . as the aspirated I in Hindustani ; and in many parts second a in our ¢ papa.” of Tibet it is sounded as the ch in © loch,” or J generally carries the short sound of an TR . . : as the Russian X. : - nglish e in : . . such words a gen,” i mend ;”’ but when the final 4 g: always hard in pond, as in “« gone.” As a final etter 0 8 yi er 3s Both, nat Js our English sh 08 Lg we gr in Jiese pages we ) ° 1e Italian e in ‘ ché,” 1 ave printed g as inal, it sound k. ’ as J in ordinary talk, and will be understood answering to our ai in such a word as praise.” 1 . nearly : frequently as the English short ¢ in the word ¢ pin.” always if so sounded. But we shall discriminate Thus we hear in Tibetan rin price,” min is PD i its occurrence; defining it as gh in the English But as a final, it takes the orthodox sound of the i « ghastly.” As initial only. Ex: ghd-pa “where letter © as heard in most European languages (mostly heard as kd-pa). or nasal n. Is a single letter in Tibetan and is namely, that of English e in “he,” “me,” &c common as the initial letter of words. To attain : usually as our 0 in “tone,” polo,” &c.; and rarel | ’ 2? : : . “ge ] the pronunciation of mg, when used as initial, as our o in ¢¢ pond » ot.” & . ending in ng, ’ eo Wy Ces except in words d the B lish +d “1 oer”? d th ’ ng went,” tsong onion,” first sound the Kinglis wor junger,” and then ’ try to say the mger without the hu, eliminating sounded as in our word ¢ song.” much of the g sound. As final, ng is very short : long o occurs only as an initial in Ti : as a ibetan. Its sound pe the long “a,” is somewhat peculiar, and us if apd aint bw separate pronunciations of the single vowel ; asin” church.” followed one another, and were almost slided the one in 0 ie other. Perhaps 0-6h might represent i : s the English j in ¢ sound, but often heard as wo. 1 Fo t ne em 3 7. aspirated asin ansl, 5: when o is immediately followed by eithe i ! original spelling, it assumes (his figsad hy os i . uttered like the initial sound in our words ¢ neuter,” mon Sonn in German and Danish, and heard in “newt.” oo Dera words as pew. As the d of the original . the dental t, a8 in ¢ tumble.” the in ox origraphy fat b 4 of oy liable, . aspirated f, not as our th, but as thana, thora, in . e frequen ound i 1 I g ! : y Hindustani. Be wyop~ehTiung, olloquin’ betan words. ] . dental d, a8 in « dunce.” As?a final, is in pronuncia- ’ * . : always ° tion nearly always dropped. However, in these a mand as the English “00.” As an initial cases, we shall indicate its place by an apostrophe : ] thus to’pa for todpa, yo’ for yod “is.” « peach hither.” an aspirated form of ch, as in ¢ judge.” » but often sounded as ch. 12 dh : bh : lh: sh: TIBETAN GRAMMAR, aspirated d. In practice we advise the sound of an ordinary unaspirated ¢, which is sufficiently correct. as in ““ nut.”” Both n and d, when either occurs as final in any syllable, modify the preceding vowel; changing «a into e, o into 0, w into i. Thus piin “brother,” nyen yong (for nyan yong) will hear.” as in ‘“ port.” As final often for b; while on the contrary, as initial, in Eastern Tibet is changed into b occasionally. not heard as English ph (f), but with distinct aspirate sound. as in bone. As final letter generally sounds p. had best be pronounced as our p ; but really slightly different and different in Tibetan orthography. Thus bhe-uw “a calf’ sounds pe-u, and bhu-mo “girl” sounds pu-mo. We shall generally print bh where it occurs, while advising the sound of p. as in “mat; where it occurs before p it really represents n in the original spelling. only an initial, and heard as the fes in our words, “ plates,” “rates.” the same letter aspirated ; as in our ¢ cats’ heads.” a rough z, sounded with d as in the English ¢ adze.” as in “yell,” w: asin “wander.” as in ‘“ rather,” but is never rolled. as in “lamb.” Where we have placed it as a final, it is often inaudible, and always changes a preced- ing a to e¢ and w to ii. In the capital of Tibet, the l as final is said to be always heard. heard really as kl, or as the Welsh initial LI. Thus Lhdsa sounds Hlisa. However, we print lh in these pages in order to coincide with the Tibetan spelling. these letters take the ordinary pronunciation ; but the depth of tone with which they are sounded differs in different words and affects the whole word. See pp. 15, 16. the ordinary aspirate ; never a silent letter. 13 THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN. and as this is theoretically, and the correct pronunciation, we s ky; but frequently it 1s ky : sounded as written, often in practice, shall always print it a heard as if ty. khy : to be printed thus, but often sounded ty. to be printed thus, but often sounded dy. cur as initial sounds i he ich i age begin wi e p hich in the written language io i” p’y, and by, Zesectively, ny Hprasen ie ? . 3 po a . lern pronunciation of the latter combin " sound Ls generally distinctly heard after he 5 iy and jh in all such words; e. g.» hye’pa o make, ¢¢ do,” chhyir-tu © for,” because of. i In some parts of Tibet the p, ph, and b sunaymers in these words, and not {he Anomsiouy ih & : 8 A . the only change being the omissi e . Ribot vino is as commonly heard as chhyvmo, plila as chhyi-la ; whilst P’i-ling *¢ an Englishman is in much more frequent use than Chhyi-ling. CEREBRAL LETTERS. d. and dh occurring as cerebrals, and pro- y ¢© ; i the teeth as the ordinary forms, but with ainst the roof of the mouth. our Enclish words torn and talks is really a cerebra ; a 11ff from the t in ten, &c. As is customary, these and differs tr 3 sounds in the following pages will be pn yg 5! , g, aud 0) r in | 1 vri - ur se words which 1n the w ; They only occur 1n tho 3 alti as on Ts initials bearing a supscibed : e. 8 bras 3 ~ y » v 1 . sounds dai. However, according 0 A Pe Mg dn Rockhill’s ¢ Land of the Lamas,” 1t would Ss { Pr are in use in Lhasa. Of this use I am partly satisfied. 9Y : chy, chhy, and jhy : these oc We find t, 5 nounced, not against their sound thrown up ag THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN. : 2 Chinese, &c., certain ¢ tones, As in Burmese, Annamese, have become recognised as that is, a certain pitch of voice, attached to the pronunciation of words. instances the different pitch, or tone, serves to ich otherwise would be sounded alike. In many discriminate words wl 14 TIBETAN GRAMMAR, In Tibetan the tone depends altogether upon the particular letters which happen to occur in the original spelling as the two or three initial letters of any word. Though the letters particularly the first consonant, may be silent Ta iy tion, their presence or absence in the Tibetan spellin regulates the fone and is thus really felt. Pe In our transliteration we cannot exhibit the spelling or note the unpronounced initial consonant or consonants but we shall, where requisite, mark the fone of a word vonaliin from such spelling. : In Tibetan there are properly three Tones. These are the High-pitched, the Medial, and the Low Resonant. As the majority of words are uttered in a fairly high key, we shall not as a rule distinguish the High-pitched from the Medial or ordinary tone ; but where useful for dis- crimination in words commencing with certain letters, we shall make use of the sign \” above the first letter of the word to mark the higher pitch. The Low Resonant fone will be identified by the superscribed sign ~ on the initial The High-pitched tone is rendered by an elevated treble or feminine style of voice, continuously sustained at one pitch; and the Medial being scarcely lower, that must be the key in which the ordinary flow of words ought to run merely subduing the voice to the Low Resonant tone which is guttural in character, whenever a word or words proper to that tone are introduced. If one is on the alert to otice the variation of tone while listening to two natives in con- verse, the exact distinction of voice will be at once distin- guished and can be readily applied and reproduced. The initial invariably gives the tone for the whole word Taking three different words, each according to our collo- quial mode of representing sounds spelt precisely alike, we may note that, being shewn with the same initial, the onl way of indicating the tone in print will be by the use of a THE TONE-PITCH IN TIBETAN. 15 above-given signs. Thus, we have ser says,” ser “a nail,” and ser gold.” Inthe original spelling there is the follow- ing distinction in these words: zer says,” gzer < g nail,” and gser « gold;” and that spelling determines in truth the present tone in use for each. Ser, “says” 18 pronounced in Low Resonant tone er, . » yangts'e clay cup, yang-li hi Anh lung wind, marpo red, sha flesh. » yang-tu bide or skin, All words beginning wi : g with the letters kh, chh, p’ , are high-toned in a pronounced dagres, ’ > Po and t ’ SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES. 1. Primarily the language of Tibet is a monosyllabic tongue, every syllable being ordinarily a word of definite meaning. However, in later times, a decided tendency to polysyllabism has been steadily developing itself Be sides new coinages for the purpose of expressing new and complex ideas, which have been formed by linking two or more monosyllabic words so as to make an artificial pol syllable, the tendency has been exhibited in another v : For all things in common use there existed and do exist ine ple names, each a word of one syllable. Nevertheless | th colloquial has by degrees grown (so to speak) dissatish 1 with these primitive designations, and has succeeded expanding a large number of them into words of two sylla bles. Moze curious is this predilection, because apparently the original names were in most cases amply sufficient o discriminate the various objects indicated. .And the pheno- menon of the modern tongue preferring the longer words Seems still more incongruous, when we fiad even in modern writings, the old plain monosyllables generally adhered to Doubtless the change in the pronunciation of the sim ler forms has had something to do with these accretions Pe the written language, words which are now sounded alike are spelled differently. At the beginning and end of word are still written certain letters which formerly were ‘o- nounced but now are silent. These additional letters. (in the case of initials, now styled ¢ prefixes >’) imparted a ay tinction in sound to words which from the second or third SYLLABLES AND PARTICLES. 17 letter onwards were identically spelled. The process of atirition which has been going on in the pronunciation of the language, whereby time has gradually worn away the sound of the letters beginning and terminating words, has approximated to one another the sound of innumerable words, which in spelling and in former pronunciation were sufficiently discriminated. Another element of confusion arises from the fact that certain collocations of letters have lost their original sounds and are row pronounced as if they were spelled with letters totally different. Thus the letters by, py, p’y, are now heard as if they were jhy, chy, chhy. We cannot in this place enter further into the subject; nor need we illustrate our remarks by examples. Nevertheless enough has been said to make plain that two processes, directly opposed to one another, have been long operat- ing in this remarkable language. By wear and tear and carelessness, and for the saving of trouble which would result from the avoidance of sounding difficult combina- tions of consonants, words originally sufficiently distinctive have been reduced to such shadows and skeletons of their former selves as to be in many cases indistinguishable the one from the other. On the other hand, in order to coun- teract this process of denudation, and to escape from the inconvenient consequences of it, further syllables have been tacked on bodily to the older and half-wasted forms. Thus, while the syllables have been attenuated down to a minimum, rendering sufficient variety impossible, compensation has been sought, and confusion to some extent eluded, by con- joining syllables and producing by this combination the variety which the denuded monosyllables no longer afforded. So it comes to pass, through the foregoing or other causes, that the Tibetan colloquial is no longer monosyllabic Lut MOSTLY MADE UP OF WORDS OF TWO SYLLABLES. One ex- 3 Ea « aan — ERENT TRI 18 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ample : In written Tibetan Sud is ¢ the nose,” Rud is < tl ear;” but, as initials, S. and R. are no Toler sounded ; w thus Nd becomes the word for each of two very different f w 1 features. To prevent confusion in speech, N¢ « ear,” ike the particle wa. But Nd-wa means also to be sick,” Accordingly, at length, in the modern colloquial, N# « ve ip has developed into Ndmchhok. Nevertheless in rit yo word ‘“ ear’ we should still use the older forms py o Rna-wa ; while for such compounds as ¢“ear-ring”’ wo © ah hear nd-kor, not ndmchhok-kor. Analogously Na “n : has at length been developed into Nifu, and even md In words of two syllables the accent or stress is laid. pon the second syllable, except when such second s lab] s ono of the servile particles pa, wa, po, or wo, or whom os 2 no minative affix ghw or bhu is appended, or even ie 0 wo In these latter cases, the first syllable carries ti acoent, Thus we hear ddwa ‘the moon,” not dawd. 10 aecent 2. In Tibetan we find a large number of primitive m syllabic words to which have been affixed certain | hort syllables, each consisting of no more than two letters ; . short syllables seem removable often at pleasure thot altering the meaning of the word affected. To noun I verbs one of two of these short syllables ma Wry Gither pa or wa. When affixed to the root of 4 n Bs particle does not usually change the meaning of tl od but when an adjective is conjoined with the nor go, frequently find the particle dropped. In the collo iy ” guage the prs is not so often dropped as it is in the on anguage. owever, when a compound word is created b iy ys au, the particles (if any), are savariably ; ma a removable, When either pa or we I a a root, it may indicate either the Infinitive mood of the rord or a verbal noun, or else the participle. Thus the oy py p—— 19 SYLLABLES AND PA RTICLES. takes the particle pa; and jhye'pa can mean “to do,” or «the making,” or “doing,” according to circumstances. The employment of these servile particles, on the other hand, with ordinary nouns and adjectives, has come to be governed by pure custom and to be subjected to no general rule. With certain nouns and adjectives they are always heard; whilst with others they have come to be either optional or else neglected entirely. Finally, many substan- tives are pure monosyllables to which no particle or other syllable is, or has ever been, annexed. Nore ox Pronuxciarion.—In Tibetan a final letter usually undergoes some modification. Where a syllable ends with the letter «“g,” it mostly takes the sound of “Kk,” though in the following pages Wwe have printed this final sometimes “g”’ and sometimes “k.” So also with the letter «b,” which as final sounds as our “p.” Where “d” is the last latter it is nearly always in- audible and thus we have invariably omitted it, but at the same time this elision has been every where indi- cated by the use of an apostrophe. Thus jhyed-pa «to do is invariably heard as jhye’pa, and so in these pages do we print it.” Both “Lk” (g) and “p” (b) as finals are also often elided ; thus pik-lep “bread” is usually heard as if pa’le’. Final “s” is never heard in Tibet Proper, where it is either bluntly dropped or (and generally) assumes the sound of a quick « i.” Thus the name of the chief province of Tibet is written pus. The «“d” and “b” are held to annihilate one another, leaving the word as us only. Now, in Central Tibet the name of the pro- vince is heard as ur, in Southern Tibet as U, and in Ladak only is the final letter sounded and the name pronounced Us. It should be noted, however, that if the letter preceding the final “8” is a consonant, the cg” is simply dropped and no i’ sound heard. When the first syllable of a dissyllable ends in *“n » and the second syllable begins with p” or “b,” the «pn * gounds as ‘‘ m.” Lastly, all vowels, save those marked long, are sound- ed very short: men as our “men .” rin as our “pin.” TIBETAN GRAMMAR, CHAPTER II, THE ARTICLE. —E ET — 1. In the Tibetan colloquial, both of the so-called Articles are to be heard in constant use. The Indefinite Article, in : brother. Jha : tea. Hlam : boot ik : aye. L om : box. Gang : hill. Khyim : hou ; a fire Jung : wind. Ming: name. Luk : sl or, Ch : v er. Do: stone. Dul: journey. Ti: ’ knife wg: tree. Jhyd: bird, Lak, hand © Dies Lote . / : oat. The above are naturally some of the simplest and most commonly occurring words in the language. . ot the particles found conjoined with the roots of nouns ie first variety are pa, wa, and a. These may hardly be FORM AND ETYMOLOGY. 23 «aid to be used or not used at pleasure; but when any adjective 18 employed with the noun, the particle belonging to the noun is sometimes dropped, though its retention is always permissable :— Sam-pa: bridge. Kang-pa: leg. GQom-pa : monastery. Mia-pa : mist. Dé-wa : the moon. Ngur-wa: red duck. P’or-pa: cup. Kyd-wa : oar. To-wa : victuals. Pik-pa: pig. Chhar-pa : rain. Ti'-pa : belly. Ti-pa : smoke. Rau-a: 8 fence. Chhu-pa : over-coat, Khau-a: snow. Ko-a: hide-boat. T’o-a: hammer. Another series of substantives assume a second syllable in po, wo, and bo—affixes which in composition are occasionally dropped :— Le-po : a basket. Dhé-wo : buck wheat. Te-po : an axe. No-wo: younger brother. Tok-po: a friend. Chhu-wo : a river. Gyal-po : a king. Re-wo : yak-skin canvas. Ting-po: a pipe. T’¢h-bo : the thumb. Tang-po : @ beggar. Da-o : comrade. Provincially the affix po is frequently heard as bo; e. g-, Puai-bo for Palpo: a Nipal man; pombo or even bombo for pompo : any official or head man—used also as form of address: Pombo ¢ Officer,” Sir!” Again, wo often seems to lose the w sound, as 10-0 for mo-wo, and pd-o for Ppd-wo « dare-devil.” Many nouns in po denote distinctly the male sex. Added to the participle, po expresses the doer of an action : lab-pa-po, «the speaker.” Certain substantives take ma Or mo—3a non-removable affix :— Nyi-ma : the sun. Jhye-ma : sand. Tdb-mo: a fight. Lo-ma : a leaf. Chi-ma : a tear. Long-mo : alms. Wo-ma : milk. Zi-ma : eyelashes. Rol-mo: music. chief monk. Dhe-mo : the elbow. GQong-mo : evening. La-ma : Chong-mo : thimble. Ping-kyu-ma : a Kite. Yor-mo: a sail. In general, be it noted, mo indicates a feminine noun; but the above examples are not of that class—a class to be illustrated hereafter. | i ib | t | { 24 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Other sets of particles, similar } bso, chia +— p 8, similarly attached, are kd, Lhd, ghd, Chhi-ka or . i 1: pi Clhila fothing. Jogi: piste (on cloth) Jed. . : © Le ka : work, a task. ~~ Chem-tse: scissors a vd: Smo. Ya-tse : a duck Giin-kd : winter. Dzé-tse : smok 1 C Log-d : lightning. Ken-za : nirense, Lm ines pathway. Pé-chhd : book or Long td : guts. Lap-chha : talk, a chat. ang-serkiui : crevasse. Toss ood particutars. Fal)-ghd bough. La-chha : sealing Wax. : yo-ghd : usband. Lo-chhd : woman's chatelaine. 0 these may be added examples of words taking ap- pen ices regarded as diminutive affixes, though the effect in question is not always apparent :— ’ ” Pu qu: a child. Tong-bhu : a hole Lu-gu ‘ lamb. Sham-bhu : cap. 4 g-gu : pigeon. Sing-bhw : mare’s milk yu-gr: pen. Dhung-bhu : love Ung-gu : lamp. Ts'ul-lu : fat. A finger. Kyal-lu : cloth bag os gu : kernel. Ts al-lu : a cock “ A : uncle. Twr-ru : a foal. A mg-hi : cradle. Khye-u : infant Sku : the nose. Le-u : cha ster ok the chin. Pe-u : calf, i. Dhil-bhu : bell. A-yu (or a-yo) : puppy. S— Originally a monosyllabic language, the modern style would seem to prize compound forms. Thus the second or compound class of nouns, including dissyllables and tri syllables, is being continually augmented. Such words a yllables, . ‘ds are either ik ect compounds of two or more distinct words crude y conjoined to express some complex thing or derived idea : 0 else they are mere paraphrases and euphemisms, signify. ing simple things, which have at length crept into ordinar use, superceding the ancient and more direct monosyllables, In the subjoined examples we shall not discriminate between the regular ¢ ; e regular compounds and the paraphrases, merely adding FORM AND ETYMOLOGY. 25 that some of the latter are of ancient lineage, and that no simpler word for the thing indicated in such cases has been ever apparently in use :— Ndm-chhol or) ty ooo. Mé-tok : flower. Am-chhok : ’ Shom-dap : leaf (large). Ndm-tsul : the nose, muzzle. Jha-tsi : rat. Menda : gun. Tsi-tsv : mouse. She-dang : anger. Kéng-Sak : a pipe. Sha-nye : lead. Dang-rok : neighbour, Sha-kar : tin. Men-shar : girl. Gle-long : monk. Shiim-mar-pa : lamp. Am-chhu : physician. Lek-bham : a volume. Lolk-nyo : spoon. Shing-ta : cart. O-mo-su : stocking. Sa-lep : brick. Vang-mik : ~~ room. Pdk-lep : loaf of bread. Dhong-khyer : town. Gye-kar : window. Yul-ts'o : village. Mik-yang : generosity. Pur-nyi : trap. T’q-md-khd : ~~ tobacco. The derivation of some of these, and other compound words Such are me-tok © fire-button ” (Hower), (room), mik-yang broad ts’o-lak is very quaint. khang-mik < eye of the house ”’ eye” (gemerosity), si-lep flat earth” (brick), « lake’s hand” (a creek), nyi-Ser nail of the sun’ (sun- beam), sem-chen possessed of mind” (an animal), p’dk-suk « gecret push” (bribery). Deliberate compounds are of course very numerous, and no instances need be specified ; however, as a general rule, it may be accepted that every syllable of a compound word in Tibetan has a distinct meaning. This rule may be even extended to proper names and the names of places. Thus Pemiong-chi monastery in Sikkim is really Pema Yangtse « the offering-bowl of lotos-flowers.” 4.—GENDER. A large number of nouns possess both a masculine and a feminine form. The discrimination of gender is generally indicated by the variation in the servile particle ; although at the same time it must not be forgotten that the mere presence of an affix, significant usually of 4 26 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. male or female sex respectively, does not in Tibetan invariably convey the notion of any particular gender. Many substan- tives terminate with the feminine particle mo which have none save a common gender :— My : Khyo-po : a man. husband. (or Khyo-ghd.) Pu-tsa : J hd-pa : Lang-to : A-p'd : Yab : Na-wo : Gii’po : Po-yak : Gyal-po : Yi-pa : Réi-po : Gur-po 3 Ta-po : Chyil-pa : boy. cock. bull. father. father. host. father-in-law. male yak, king. male lad, offspring. an old man. a crooked man. horse. thatched hut. Mo : Khyo-mo : Pu-mo : Jhd-mo : Bhd-mo : A-ma : Yum : Na-mo : Gii’mo : Dimo : Gyal-mo : Mo-vyi : Réi-mo : Gur-mo : Ti go’ma : woman (general term bhii’me’). wife (usual term kyer-mén ). girl. hen. COW. mother. mother (honorific terms). hostess. mother-in-law. female yak. queen. female child, girl. an old woman. a crooked woman. mare (also gi’-ma alone). DECLENSION OF NOUNS. Kyermén chi’ : A wife. Nom : Kyermén chi’ : Avoe - Gen : Kyermén kyu: > wis Dat: Kyermén la ts ol by ay . 8: Kyermén or Kyermen (a: . Boa her na (or tsame) : On or at a wife. : ( ife. Ablat : Kyermén ne (Or le) : Pow au n ky : a wife. Agentive : Kyermen ky : y — This common word is often heard sounded as if 1b (N. B. were Kimmen.) A slight variation is made in the affixes attached x ie Genitive and Agentive cases when the di decline 2 in the letter k or ng. Thus ghyok hit a OR ht comes ghyok-ghi: © of a cannon, Jog 7: ih cannon.” So also chhdng : “beer; ch a beer;” chhing-g/a : <« hy beer.” Where the ” wi terminates with a vowel, the same two cases are also : 2 as in the subjoined example :— male dweller in a } Chyil-ma : female ditto. Bhe-to : bull-calf. Bhe-mo : cow-calf. Pal-po-pa : man of Nipal. Pdl-po-ma : woman of Nipal. Bhi’pa or Bhi’mi : Tibetan man. Bhi'mo : Tibetan woman. Ming-po : brother of a girl. Sing-mo : sister of a man, Shar-pa : young men. Shar-ma : young women. Poré : male kid. Mo-re : female kid. Pape ®E) father and his Mdm’ FHT) mother and her offspring. offspring. B.—DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 1. In the Tibetan tongue the relationship of the noun to other words or, in grammatical phraseology, the different cases of the noun, must be expressed by means of short syllables styled Postpositions, placed immediately after the word to be declined. A Noun Substantive may be thus arranged in the form of a Declension :— Méabjhd 8h’: A peacock. k. : Mdbjhd Sha: A peacock. hy Ml hi yi or Mabjht : Of a pasnock, Dat : Mabjha la bi i. de : Mdbihd or Mabjha ta : k. Locat Mit jh na (or tsdna) : On or At a peacock. rs ] From a peacock. Ablat : Mdbjhd ne : 2 Agentive : Mabjhd yi : By a peacoc ove, Jaeschke adds what he made use of ab To erm « into,” “unto; ” but terms the Terminative case, implying y ith it 1 lloquial idiom. have not met with 1t 1 CO a those words In which the final vowel is 0, we have ts Genitive oi, as jo-mo: “2 milch-yak,” jo-mot : « of a mile - ak.’ If the word end in i, the Genitive usually takes yi, bat in words of two syllables ending in 4, we often hear ys : y 3 . 2? AA : a 2 » khyi-yi: of a dog; gya-! e. a., khyi : “a dog, | 8 cha 2 yi fickyi « of a chair.” With a final e¢ the Geni y v 28 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. tive requires yi, while the vowel u takes i alone, as fe : “the fire,” 7mé-yi: «of the fire; p’u-gu: “a child,” Pp u- gu-i: “of a child.” The Article di when it follows the noun makes a Genitive in either yi or kyi. We frequently hear di-kyi : of the.” The Vocative case differs from the other cases, in that it is preceded by an exclamatory syllable and requires no post- position—Kye limd : “ O lama!” Ho-kye kyapgin: <0 pro- tector | We tok-po : ¢O friend ;” “ Well, friend!” Accent or stress is usually laid on the last syllable of the noun in the Vocative. Often the prefixed syllable is dropped in quiet address : Lhachdm, t'wje chhe : « Thank-you, lady!” 2. Tue Pruran Numser is not always formally expressed in Tibetan. Whenever the substantive is accompanied by any numeral or by such adjectives as ¢sgome,” < all,” “many,” the use of which naturally implies a plural signi- fication, then the singular is invariably heard. Otherwise the Plural affix may be added to the word either as #s’o or as chd (chdk) and sometimes as nam :— Pi-ling-ts’o : “* Englishmen.” > Gen: P’i-ling-t'soi : Dat: P’i-ling-ts’o la : Accus: P’i-ling-ts’o la : Locat : P’i-ling-ts’o na : Vocat: Wé Pi-ling-ts'o : Ablat : P’i-ling-ts’o nai or ne: Agentive : P’i-ling-ts'o : Of the Englishmen. To the Englishmen, The Englishmen. In the Englishmen. O Englishmen ! From the Englishmen. By the Englishmen. As to the alternative affix chd, it is added mostly to inanimate nouns—tokise: table,” toktse-chd: tables.” 3. Usk or THE CasEs.—a. The Genitive is employed to signify both possession and quality, and when it is in any way a part of the subject of a sentence the word in the Genitive stands first in the order of words in the sentence. As expressive of Possession we find the usual construction, 29 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. i. e., the boy’s dog” is the dog of the boy,” ors Job fs Tibetan rendering is in form closely like the Par ish order; Putsd-yi (or Putsé) khyi di: © of boy the dog. tian B. Where the Genitive is a Genitive of quality § asst the character of an adjective. This Genitive fe PE precedes the noun which 1b describes. Ex: ngul- i u nr « o silver image 3°’ shing-ght khyvm : “a wooden ouse , Bh’kyi Tha : ser-dok for ser-kyi dog: © g . ‘ ene phrases can also be expressed by means ° [is formed from the respective substantives (Chap. AX, ) to y. The Genitive seems, furthermore, to be resortel > in order to indicate a less obvious relationship than : a ° mere possession. Thus ¢« an ear-ring >’ is nad-kor, eon ee from nd-yi kor; a‘ water-tub”’ or tub for ater is ch w Som; a‘ day’s wage,” 18 iyin-la from ry nn kong from num kyi rong = ¢ an oil basin ; nak- Lum . n Adk-ght bhumpa (“fla sk of ink ’’)=‘“inkstand;” an ° forth. In this manner in fact a large number of compoun ; ucted. Te Dative with la is found after verbs of giving, shewing, and speaking. Thus we hear :— Give the dog water. Mi-la lam di teng-nang : Shew the man the way. 4 : Speak to him gently. ho- po lap : I pie Bo virang-ghi ming lap : Tell the Sahib your name. Khyi-la chhu ter : In the foregoing examples we must note khyi-la “to the dog,” mi-la (or mi-po-la) to the man,” kko-la to him, og, > Jusho-la to the Sahib.” g f | i | 30 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Motion towards is seldom expressed colloquially by the Dative. The ordinary style is with some compound post- position (the Tibetan preposition) such as #ukpa unto,” “up to,” or fsd-ne meaning ‘near ;’’ the use of the latter being precisely analogous to the use of pas in Hindustani and being linked like pas to the noun by the Genitive affix. (See Chap. VIII, 3. Examples). However in such phrases as these la is frequently heard :— Gompa-la song : Go to the temple. Khyim-la song : Go home, (vuly., “ Nang-la song.”) Further remarks upon the use of la, as a Locative rather than a Dative affix, will be found in Chapter VIII, 2. e. The Accusative requires no affix in sentences having a remote as well as a proximate object; e. g.— Ngdrang-la woma nang : Give me the milk. (Woma is here the proximate object placed in the Accusative. ngarang-la = to me.) Again where the remoter object is unexpressed :— shing khur shok : Fetch the wood. td-po du t'1 : Lead the horse. However the Accusative, when it is the object of any direct action, takes the affix la: e. g.— (1) Kho-yi ta-la dung-ki-duw’ : He is beating the horse. (Lit: Kho-yi by him, td-la the horse, dung-ki-du’ is beating). (2) Dhe-la likpa ma t'uk : Don’t touch it, (Dhe-la = “it,”) Or where it is the object of any passive feeling :— (3) The mother loves the son: Amd-yi pu-la tse-dung jhe. (tse-dung jhe’pa = ‘“ to love”). (4) Remember me: Ngd-la sem-la ngei! (Lit: Nget be sure, sem-la in mind, ngd-la, as to me). But we hear (5) Go di gyak : Shut the door. DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 31 to be used instead of the bs whether the verb be in This important rule les above) is fully ». The Agentive case ought Nominative with all transitive ver the Present, Past or Future tense. (see (1) and (3) of the last four examp explained in a later chapter. Em TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER IV. ADJECTIVES, err ENE LT eens 1. The adjective almost invariably follows its noun In the common speech of the people. Very frequently in literary Tibetan, however, we find it placed before the noun it qualifies and, when in that position, instead of agreeing with the noun as to Case, it invariably takes the Genitive Case. To place the adjective immediately pre- ceding the noun is also pefectly allowable in collo Pl Tibetan, but such order of the words is only occasionally resorted to, though when ut vs practi ot practised the adject then be heard in the Genitive. Joctive must 2. When the adjective—as indeed it nearly always does—follows the substantive, it receives the inflexions which would, otherwise, belong to the substantive. In other words, the case-signs are then attached to the ad- jective instead of to the noun-substanti ich it i ee antive which i- ne Thies oe ich it is quali Nam miin-po ch’ : A dark nigh os ° ‘ht. Putsa tsok-pa-i vak dz : The hand of a dirty boy. (Note : The order of the words in these sentences is exactly the reverse of tl i rg . : the.) of the English orders: e. g. “ Boy dirty of hand Dhe’-mé chhempo di-yi mik serpo di : The yellow eye of the large bear. (Here the adjectives used are chhe the ad; : > »mpo and serpo. The definite article di being used with the adjective hemo Te na ADJECTIVES, 33 article and not the adjective receives the Genitive affix. As in Tibetan composition the Genitive-words generally stand first in the sentence, we have here also in the Tibetan an exact reversal of the English order of the words :— Bear great the of eye yellow the.” This reverse order does not obtain in all or even many instances.) Di lo-ma lenchen-kyi sd-la shd’-dhu du : The leaf down on the wet ground. (Here lenchen * wet,” the adjective qualifying sd * the ground,” is placed before its noun and therefore stands with the Genitive affix. Note, also, the article belonging to lo-ma is repeated so as to lock in with it all direct enlargement or expansion of the subject.) 3. When it is necessary that the plural number should be expressed otherwise than by implication, the plural particle is attached to the substantive and not to the adjective : Mik- cha serpo “ yellow eyes .? Mi-ts’o hampachen : greedy men ;”’ ta-po-ts’o Rakpo karpo black-and-white horses; td-po fak td-po kar : « black horses and white horses.” 4. Nearly all adjectives in the colloquial which are not derived from substantives are found with the particle po attached. Sometimes this termination may be dropped as in the last-quoted example; but this elision is more frequent in the written than in the spoken language. In certain particular adjectives the affix po is varied to mo when used with a feminine noun ; but frequently no notice of the gender is taken and the adjective in po is coupled with a feminine substantive. On the other hand, a number of adjectives used indiscriminately with either masculine or feminine nouns carry the affix mo which then bears no sexual signification. The following adjectives are known to vary the affix ac- cording to the gender of the noun to be qualified :— Marpo—mo : red. Chhorpo-mo : handsome. Ndkpo-mo : black. T'0-0 Tomo : angry. Karpo-mo : white. Ringpo-mo : tall, long. S 34 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Ohhyukpo-mo : rich. Dhungpo—mo : cautious, retiring. Sarpo-mo : young, fresh, Chholpo-mo : licentious. un-polluted. Sharwa—mo : blind. Rilpo—mo : round. Ulpo—-mo : poor. Shdwo-mo : lame. But these adjectives, terminating in mo, are common in gender :— G4-mo : ~~ middling. Sem-kyo-po : disappointed. Le-mo : good. Ship-mo : thorough, minute. She'mo: strong. Ngo-yangmo : gay, sportive. Yangmo : light (not heavy). Sab-mo : smart, spruce. Démo : well, happy. Den-mo : naked (also jem-pa). Ts’emmo : hot. Dhak-mo : clean (also dhakwa). Dhimmo : Warm. Stlmo : cool. Dhongmé : cold (also dhongwa). Kyurmo : sour. Dhalmo: calm, quiet, still. Ngarmo : sweet. fluids). Ldamo : easy (of a task, &c.) Gharmo : thick, dense (of Bolmo : soft, yielding. Tamo : thin (also “pow- Sra-mo: hard, solid. dery,” “finely divided.”) 5. There are many adjectives which do not take the affixes po or mo. All derivative adjectives are simple roots with such paraphrastic syllables as chen: possessed of,” chhok, «fit for,” annexed. (See Chap. XI, 4 « and B.) Those formed from substantives by annexing chen make a lengthy list; and if the opposite qualification has need to be expressed the syllable chen is replaced by me’, which signifies without,” ¢ free from” :— Shengchen : broad. Khoi-chen : important. Shengme’ : Narrow. Khoi-me’ : unimportant. Si-chen: brilliant. Si-me’ : dull, obscured. Gydkme : thin, meagre. Nyd’chen : durable, well-made. Ts ulchen : just. Nyome' : fragile, flimsy. Ts'ulme’ : unjust. Rin-chen : precious. T§erchen : uneasy, anxious. Rin-me’ : worthless. Ts'erme’ : mot anxious, easy. Gydlechen or gydkshd: fat, stout. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 35 6. Amother series of adjectives, colloquially much favour- ed, are re-duplicated forms, which generally express continu- ous or flowing action, or qualities of that easy or undulating nature :— Lhap-lhup : loose, unconfined. Seng-seng : weak (of tea, &c.) Ril-ril : oval. Leb-leb: flat. Kor-kor : round. Ts'im-ts'im : dazzled. Hrab-lrip: dim, glimmering. Yor-yor : aslant. Jam-jam : smooth. Gop-gop : stiff, powerless. Sam-sum : low (in sound). Wiale-wdle : clear, distinct. Shong-8hong : hollow, excavated. Gur-gur: crooked. 7. When the adjective is used as an attribute, the affix po is occasionally omitted :— The pomegranates are fresh: Sendu di sar yin (sar, not sarpa). The flower is red and yellow: Me-tok di mar dhang ser yin. Khyi di chhe yin or khyt di chhempo yin. Gong di chhung yin (“price ”” is also rin). The dog is large: The price is small : 8. The adjective can be rendered more intense by various words or syllables placed before it: hdchang, much, very, too; rab-tu very, especially ; tsa-wa-ne, quite :— The path is very narrow : Lamkhi di hdchang t d-po re’. The horse is too fat : Té-po di rab-tu gyakpd yin. The bridge is very slanting: Sampa di hdchang yorpo yin. The knife is perfectly blunt: Ti di tsa-wa-ne no-me’ du’. Sometimes the word hd-chang like fsa-wa assumes the ablative affix nai or né:—Khorang hé-chang-ne chhor yin :— He is very handsome. Other intensives to the adjective are vil (meaning “round”’) and chhe (meaning much,” great”). These, however, follow the adjective :— A horse quite white: Td-po kar ril. Very muddy water : Chhu nyokpo chhe. The pass-top is very indistinct : Laptse dhe hrab-hrep chhe dw’. A perfectly flat plain: 1" ang leb-leb ril ch’. 36 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. I am quite lame and very tired: Ngdrang la khong ril dhérung hdchang-ne t’ ang-chhe-po jhung. Note.—The last sentence runs literally: “to me has arisen (jhung) to be quite lame and very tired.” 9.—COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. a. The expedient for making comparison of the quality of things is akin to the method of the Hindi language to the south of Tibet, and to that of the Mongolian language to the north of Tibet. It is brought about by means of a certain arrangement of the words of the sentence and by the introduction of the postposition le, meaning ¢ than.” To give an example :— Tibet is larger than Sikkim : Ddi-jong le Pi’yul chhem-po du’. Examining the Tibetan we find it runs: Ddi-jong le « than Sikkim,” P#’yul Tibet,” chhempo “large,” dw’ “is.” This order of words must be strictly observed, otherwise the comparative intention will not be evident. Another example :— The sun is more brilliant Dd-wa le nyima di §i-chen du’. than the moon : Again, the order runs: Than moon, the sun, brilliant is. This stirrup-strap is longer Zhem-ma le yop-t'ak di ring (or than the other: He is honester than you : ring-po) du’. Khyirang le kho shama du’. To-day is finer than yesterday : Dang-le dhering le’-pa du’. When the comparative degree occurs apart from any compared object, the words Dhe-la, ¢ than that,” may be introduced for the sake of perspicuity :— A firmer ice-ridge : Khyak-sam dhe-le tempo chik. A more honest priest: Lama shd-ma lhak chi’. SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. 87 B. The superlative degree is usually paraphrased into an universal comparative. So in the sentence: * He is the tallest,” we should hear, Than all he tall is.” But « than’ would be now rendered by nang-ne instead of by le. This peak is high; that peak is higher; that other peak is the highest: Di zoktse di o-a dw; dhe-le di wip da to-wa du’ ; ts’angma nang-mne voktse Shem-ma di t0-sho dw’. N. B.—Di means “this,” or “that” according to Tibetan phraseology, if it represents the present object of reference. Any past object of reference is denoted by dhe, whether we 1n our English colloquial style it “this” or “that.” ts'angma nang-ne means ‘ than all.” Another popular mode of indicating the superlative degree is compassed by adding the syllable shot or sho to the adjective. And thie is often used without introducing «than all.” Thus :— That temple is the most Di gompa di Po'-kyi-yul kyi rak- famous in Tibet : chen-shot du’. This animal is the smallest : Dhiid-do di chhung-sho dw’. Lhésa is the greatest city : Lhdsd dhong-khyer chhe-shot dw’. That sheep is the whitest : Luk dhe kdr-shé du’. Note.— When shot is appended, the affix po of the adjective is always omitted. Also, the arrangement of the words in the sentence is not of importance when shoi is employed. Akin to shot is the word chhok, often confounded with it, which means «the best.” Chhok is also added to adjectives to form an empha- tic superlative. In comparing, however, yakpo = *‘ good ” and ydk-sho or tdk-sho = “best.” y. For such comparisons as involve the connexion ‘so— » as,” e. g., “so great as,” “so good as,” ‘ as far as,” see post, Chap. VII, 4, iv. v. 38 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ADJECTIVES WITH SUBSTANTIVES. Chhu-pa lonpa : Shuten bolpo : Pu-mo ya'po : Na-ku marpo : Pugu nying-jhémo : Chi’ pe’ kyurmo : Shim-shim dhi’chen : Ldma chhempo : Go chhung-ngu : Mo-yi chhung : Menshar khe’pa : Chhu dhang-mo : Chhu dhang-po : Lam ton-khen yerpo : Solwa nyukchen : Khydalpa bimpo : Sokma kampo : Kyermen t’o-mo : Mz-po t'o-0 : Lamkhd §hengme’ : Me-tok kar-po : Khau-d ling-po : Pe-chhda numtsi : Shei-hor rinchen : Putsa hurpo : Nyd-ra dukchen : Jol-t’a dzepo : Jha karbo : Tukpa chutchen : Woma rul : Ta yipchen : Tu shimpo : Gyd-o ringpo : a wet coat. a soft seat. a good daughter. red nose. darling child. sour lemon. delicious sweetmeats. great lama. small head. little girl. clever maiden. cold water. clear water. cautious guide. ceaseless prayers. thick ice. dry straw. angry woman. angry man. narrow path. white flower, firm snow. greasy book. costly hookah, sharp boy. poisonous air. pretty jolmo (a bird). strong tea. strong soup. putrid milk. fine (shapely) horse. a sweet smell. a long beard. CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMERALS. 39 CHAPTER V. CARDINAL AND ORDINAL NUMERALS. —ee ENE BY 1. In Tibetan the numbers, both cardinal and ordinal can be used either as adjectives or as substantives. Used in the adjectival sense, the numeral invariably follows the noun which it qualifies; and, if there happens to be any ordinary adjective likewise attached to the noun, then the numeral is placed after such adjective :— A-yu kyong-po sum : Three expensive puppies. Wé-pdk-kyi §hdamo ngd : Five fox-skin hats. [Here wd pdk is a substantive placed in the genitive; the literal meaning being * five hats of fox-skin.”,] -§hip-chu lep jhung : 440 lamas are present. Lama §hi-gyd ; dhang re-sum Yo : Ang-ki di té-ts'o-sum dhang tong-t'a gye The number is 38, 063. ans the number; while 38, 063 is thus [Here ang:ki di me and eight thousand and sixty- expressed : Three ten thousands three. Yi is the auxiliary.] « the four,” the two,” “or both,” . Such forms as : ° the number: &c., may be expressed by adding ka or po to u : §hi-ka, myi-ka. Fractions by annexing chhd, as diin-chhd «the seventh.” Multiplies by prefixing len, as len-nyv « twice,” len-ngd * five times.” 3. The ordinals annex pa to the cardinal, except “ the first’ which is dhang-po, as sum-pa third.” However, <¢ thirty-first” is sum-chu chikpa, &ec., not sum-chu dhangpo. 40 t TIBETAN GRAMMAR. In conversation it is usual not to employ the bare ordinal alone, but to prefix the word ang-ki to each. Thus * the eighth >’ is expressed as ang-ki gye-pa :— Mi dhe khang-pa ang-ki dhang-po la do’ gi-yo’ : That man lives in the first house. Su ang-ki dhang-po lep t'up yong ; toi-dhang : See! who can get first. It is even prefixed to juk-shi’ or 8huk-ma ‘the last >’ :— Mi §hem-ma dhe khangpa ang-ki juk-sho’la di’-gi-yo’ : That other man lives in the last house. 4. GENERAL Remarks. — a. When two, three or more persons or things have been mentioned, it is a common custom to add the exact number of individuals or things thus enumerated. For example we might have such a sentence as: ¢ The father, mother, with two sons and a daughter arrived at the town; » and, most probably if such were spoken in Tibetan, after the last person mentioned the numeral « five” would be introduced as indicating the total number of persons referréd to: Pu nyi pumo dhang yab yum ngd dhong-kyer la pep jhung (lit: © Father, mother, with two sons daughter five arrived at the town >’), Again, when the number would be otherwise obscure: “The woman and her husbands (four) were turned out.” This, the exact rendering of the Tibetan would indicate, not that the woman had four husbands, but that she and her three husbands, making together four, were ejected. So, also, if a woman and her two children were to be mentioned : in Tibetan, we should say kyermen dhang p’ugw sum = « Woman and her children three,” meaning that together the whole numbered three. This habit of speech causes Tibetan enumerations to be not always obvious. Another instance: 8ang-bhu chhem- po chhung nyi: ¢ large small degchies, two,” 1. e., « two deg- chies, a large and a small.” CARDINAL NUMERALS. 41 B. When alternative estimates of numbers are made, the conjunctions are omitted: e.g. Sum §hi khur shok Bring three or four.” y. Itisa frequent practice to add the numeral chik “ one ”’ to any specified statement of numbers. Thus we wight hear: Dhu-khd Chak-5am-la Tang-tong Gye-por chherten gyd-tsi-gye chik tsik-pa re’ meaning « At the Chaksam ferry Tang-tong Gyalpo built one hundred and eight chhortens,” but literally “ built one (or “a ’) one hundred and eight chhortens.” Again: Lima sok-nyi chik pep Jhung One (or “a”) thirty-two lamas have come.” The conclusion is that the best rendering of this superfluous chik is by our indefinite pronoun some.” However chik indicates a definite and not an indefinite number ; accordingly when any doubt as to the exact number exists, the word tsam follows the numeral with the meaning of ¢ about” or “almost; e.g. luk sumchw tsam ¢ about thirty sheep.” 5 -CARDINAL NUMERALS. Chik 3A] 9. Gu Sli Nyi TRE 10. Chu-témba ISIN oy 11. Chuchik. Sum alNE 12. Chunyi. ~ 13. Chusum, Shi Aq 14. Chupshi. 15. Chonga. Loar 16. Chudhuk. Nga 2 17. Chudiin. 18. Chopgye’. ’ 19. Chupgu. Dhule XT 20. Nyi-sh, .. am 21 . Nyer-chik, Diin 9 22, Nyer-nyl. ~ 30. Sum-chu-t’amba. Gye’ QAR 31. So-chik. A 32. Sok-nyl. 0 —_ mre a A eee eA — A ————— tt tere ee 42 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. FORMATION. 33. Sok-sum. 300. Sum-gya 33. Sok-s : gya. 34. So-shi. i 340. Sum-gya-ship-chu. 40. Ship-chu-t'dmba. 1000, Tong-t’a chik. 41. She-chik. 1001. Tong-t'a chik dhang 42. She-nyi. chik, ’ 50. Ngé-chu-t’4mba. 2000. Tong-t'4 nyi 5. Ned-chik. 2161. Tongt'a my i. CHAPTER VI. 3 Tong-t’a nyi dhang 60. RE wn amba; or chik-gya-dhang-re- e-sum. chik. VERB. 61. Re-chik. 2780. Tong-t’4 nyi dhang a THE 62. Re-nyi. diin-gya-tsa-gye’- a 70. Dito ain Himba. chu-tamba. 3 — ESS 1. on-chik. 5500. Tong-nea dh 4- 1 80. Gye’-chu-t’amba. bog chang ned : , zy A SECTION A.—FORMATION. 8l. Gya-chik, 10,000. T’i-ts’o chik. i 82. Gyd-nyl. 20,000. T’i-t’so nyi. j semgert= iy Gu-chnt amba. 86,000. Ti-ts'o Jum dhang a 1. In the language of the books we find the different tong-t'a dhuk. ; modifications or tenses of the Verb expressed in two ways. : , =_.. 100,000. Bum-chik. iu 100. Chik-gya-t'amba SA) 300,000. Bumts’o sum, E Sometimes the structure of the verbal root itself is altered 1,000,000. Sa-ya. i in order to produce these modifications, the spelling being QF ANY” A Score : Khe-chik. 3 oo ) IA A Hundred: Gya-t'4k. x changed according to the tense exhibited. At other times 101. Gyé-dhang-chik. By Threes: Sum sum. i the required shade of meaning is brought out by means of 102. Gyé-dhang-nyi or Gyé- By Fours: Shi shi. 4 ye . : i additional syllables—one or more—appended to the simple tsa-nyi. Two each: Nyi-re-nyi-re. 200. Nyi-gya. ox each: Dhuk-re dhuk-re. | 1 root. Such affixes are either mere particles or else the 201. Nyi-gya-tsa-chik. wice : Len-nyi. 3 . ‘lin i . 210. Nyi-gyi-dhang-chu- Thrice : Len som. 1 various parts of some auxiliary verb, In the colloquial, a this treatment with syllables affixed to the root seems to be t’amba. 100 times: Len-gya. 220. Nyi-gyd nyi-shu. almost the sole way of dealing with the various phases of the verb. The practice in the literary language of forming the tenses by changing the spelling of the simple root is in a few instances, however, resorted to in the colloquial. The simplest form of the verb is, naturally, the bare root unattended by any affix. However if we are to resort to the ordinary European practice of presenting the Infinitive as the primary shape, we must in Tibetan set forth each root with a particle already adjusted. The particle thus added to the verbal root for the pro- duction of the Present Infinitive is invariably either pa or wa, the former being affixed where the final letter of the yoot is any consonant save r orl, while wa is used aiter 44 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. those consonants and after a final vowel. So many of the final letters being dropped in the colloquial, the application of this rule will therefore be not always observable in these pages, our present scheme being the representation of the words not as written but only as they are sounded. Thus we have :-— Jhye'pa : to do; Li-pa: to be left, to remain. These are words which in the written forms have d and s respectively as final letter of the root, and not as here a vowel, and which therefore take pa instead of wa. The specified rule, nevertheless, is easily traceable in the examples subjoined :— Yong-wa : to come. Lok-pa : to read. Do-wa: to go. Lap-pa : to speak. Nyo-wa : to buy. Pab-pa : to take down. Sher-wa : to measure, Nyen-pa : to hear. appraise. Chhin-pa : to arrive. Jal-wa : to measure zing-pa : to fight. (length, &c). P’ep-pa : honorific term for either Sd-wa: to eat. “to come” or ‘‘ to go.” Pul-wa : to give (hon.) 9. To view the elements of the formation of the verb in the regular course of its development and elaboration we shall properly deal next with the SUBSTANTIVE VERBS. Of these there are several forms in use, namely :— Yixrea (sounded Yimpa): “to be »__the mere auxiliary. Re'pa: to be ’—another auxiliary. Yo'pa: “to be,” “to exist,” “to be present” (in a place.) Du’ea (really Dukpa): ‘to be,” “to exist,”—most common in ‘Western Tibet. SN Cumi-ra: (NBA) “to be,” “to exist "—polite form. Liias-rA (generally sounded Ld-pa) “to be” auxiliary employ- ed instead of Yinpa addressing superiors. SUBSTANTIVE VERBS. MEe’pa : “to be not ’—negative form of Yi'pa. Mé'pa: to be indeed ”—intensive variety of Yi'pa. Mix-pA : “not to be ’—the negative copula. «. The Present tense, Indicative, of all these verbs is the respective root of each standing alone; and this root is employed for all persons and both numbers :— Thus: yin = am, art, 1s, are. And so with Y&, Re’, Dv’, La. Yin, however, is restricted in use to the connection of the noun with an attribute whether adjective, noun or pro- noun, and to its duties as auxiliary affix to ordinary transi- tive and intransitive verbs :— Khyak-pa dhe tempo yin : That (or The) ice is firm. Ming di Dondup yin : The name is Dondub. Ngdrang P6'kyi mu yin: 1am a Tibetan. However, when yin is conjoined, as it often is, with Dw’pa, we frequently hear such combination used to express existence in a place, but chiefly in negative and interroga- tive sentences :— Pe-chha di dhe-pa min-du’: The book is not there. The auxiliary Re’ is very popular and heard commonly, but not exclusively, in negative sentences. Its general use is as a copulative, like yin :— Khyi di ngarchen ma re’: The dog is not fierce. Di ngat ma r€’ : This is not mine. Di-ni Pd'kyi pe-chha re’ : This is a Tibetan book. Nevertheless we have Ghande ré’ : How are you ? N. B.— Yin is more commonly used with the lst person, re’ with the 2nd and 3rd persons. In positive sentences we find re as a pleonastic addition to the verb yo’pa :— Khorana md-gi-la yo'pa re’ : He is down there. Y TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Su yi'pa re’ : who is here ? Kho-pa ghdru yo'pa re’? Where are they ? We can employ Yd’pa more frequently than any other of this series, and both Y&’pa and Dw’pa (though primarily verbs of existence) may always take the place of Yin-pa in attributive sentences, though Yin-pa cannot be substituted for them : — Khopa Gyang-tse-la yo’ : They are at Gyangtse. Ngd-la dhe-pa tokpo §hi’ yo’ : I have a friend there (7. e. To me there a friend 1s). Di §himpo du’ : This is nice. Ha-lai-pa yo’ : Tt is astonishing. Yam-ts'empo dv’ : kho ge’po min-dw’ : It is wonderful : he is not an old man. Dzd-ra di-la shu-gu mi yo’ : The shrew has no tail. N. B—Y# is more commonly used with the lst person, du’ with the 2nd and 3rd persons. B. INTERROGATIVELY, the use of the Substantive Verbs is as follows :— Yimpe or Yinnd : Duw'kd or Yinduw or E du’: Is it, is he, are you ? Yi'pe or Yo'dhd or E yi’: Di-la ghande é yo’ : Why are you here ? Mi-ts’o su yimpe : Who are the men ? Di-pa khyi da du’ka : Nyi'la lukts'o khdshe yi'dhd : Have you some sheep ? Are there any dogs here ? If re’ is the verb chosen (as it is often), then the inter- rogative tone of voice is sufficiently significant :— Khyi di §ang-khyi re’ : Is the dog a real mastiff ? Torma-yi kargyen di ghd re’ : Where are the torma butter-orna- ments 7 Khyo' la hd-lai-pa re’ : Are you surprised ? The negative question forms are mindw’, ma re’, me’pe. Alternative interrogatives are frequent; and the most SUBSTANTIVE VERBS. 47 common of these are the phrases du’ka mindw’ and yin-dw’ mindw’ (usually ’indw’ mindw’) meaning “is it or not?” Also yinnam mannam and re’tang ma re’, the latter attribu- tively :— Pe-chha di choktse wokla dw'ka Ts the book under the table maindu’ ? or not ? Khyi da dw'kd mindw’ ; tot shok : Are there any dogs ornot; see! Is (he) here or not ? Is it deep or not ? Di-pa indw’ mindw’ : Sap-sap re’tang ma re’ : Di-ni ngdi re’tang ma re’ : Is this mine or not ? Emphatically re’ is annexed to yo’pa, as in :— Di li di tengla khau-a yi'pa re’, me’pa re’: Is there snow on the pass or not ? Khyirang-la di-ka yi'pa re’, me’'pa re’: ‘Have you it or not ? Also re’ ma re’ and yi’pe me’ are other forms, the former being only used with attributes :— Dhenda re’ ma re’: Is it so or not ? Gimpe nangla pechha-ts’o yo'pe me’ : Are there any books in the gompa or not ? y. The Past tense of all these auxiliary forms can be represented by either yi’pa yin or chhi dw’ i— Khyi-yi dok di ndk-po yi’ pa yin: The colour of the dog was black. Ngdrang mi ngempo §hik song : IT have been a bad man. Kho dhe-tii §hon-§hon yi'pa yin : He was young then. Pé-chha §hik dirw chhi dw’ : Ngd-la khd-tsang d-lich yo'pa yin: 1 had a little yesterday. There was a book here. ’ Na-ning Dok-ghur dd sd-chha le Were there any nomads’ yi'pa yimpe : tents in this place last year? Naturally for our ‘has been,” “have been,” the past tense of “to go” is employed, which is either chhinpa yin or song :— Khyirang ghdru song : Where have you been ? 48 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. But of events yi’pa yin is rightly employed, and “was” in the assertive sense is rendered by that or by chhi du’ or chhi yi’ ; as in di chhi yi’ kyang, tanda ma yo’: “though it was, now it is not,” &e. Again, yin ld is another perfect auxiliary as in Ddk-la kap yin la “1 have had the oppor- tunity.” (Lit. ‘To self opportunity was.”) However the Tibetan idiom seems to avoid as much as possible the resort to preterite tenses in the substantive verb when the latter would stand alone. Nevertheless, although the past tense of the verb “to be” when unsup- ported is very infrequent ; yet, in combination with other verbs, as auxiliaries such forms are common and indispens- able. 5. Where the Future tense of the verb “to be” is called for, do-wa “to go” and yong-wa «to come” are used as bearing the additional meaning ¢ to become; ” also jhung- wa ‘to arise” i— Dharing ts’ da-po yong : Tt will be hot to-day. Khyirang yakpo yong-gyu-yin : You will be good. Nydrang dher jlung-yonyg : I shall be there. «Will be” is also rendered by yong la (lags). Such constructions can often be put as the ordinary future of an impersonal verb. Thus in the sentence ¢ I shall be sick? we resort to the future of the verb «to suffer by sick- ness” (ne’kyi $irwa) using the dative of the personal pronoun. So also “I shall be hot” can be transformed into ¢ Heat will come to me” : ngdrang-la ts’d-wa yong-gyn-yun. THE VERB ACTIVE. 49 SECTION B.—THE VERB ACTIVE. I. Present Texse.—a. This tense is expressed in its simplest form by just the root of the verb deprived of all particles, saving of course in compound or connected sen- tences when there is annexed—as explained hereafter—some continuative particle (Infra. XIII, § 3.) Ex: Gyuk-pa: to run: PRES. TENSE: gyuk : runs. The modern colloquial has in most cases adopted for use, both as infinitive and as indicative present, the perfect root of the verb as it occurs in the written language. Thus sdod-pa and sdod are the literary forms of the verb ‘to stay, to remain,” in the infinitive and present; but the colloquial has taken the past tense bsdad for these purposes, and has dadpa and dad for «to stay » and ¢ he stays,” pronouncing them however in accordance with the modern rule de’pa and de’. (See: Chap. I, Note.) B. But when we come to place before the present tense (or other tenses) of a transitive verb some pronoun or any other noun, we find there is in Tibetan no such thing as a nominative case governing a verb and no such construction as a nominative being used with a transitive verb. In fact our conception of an ordinary simple sentence with subject, predicate, and object, has properly no place in the Tibetan mode of speech. That which in European languages would be regarded as the subject and which would be placed in the nominative case is regarded in Tibetan as the agent by which a certain action or condition is brought about and is placed in the Agentive or Instrumental case, whilst the verb assumes almost the signification of a participle or a verbal noun to which, in the tenses other than the simple present, some auxiliary verb is added. The object is put as with us in the accusative. Thus the sentence: He wears a cap would in Tibetan be turned in this way : By him a cap a wearing ts. 7 Bo i dR == 1 " + if: i | hs x n x Fh eS SS as wa = re tre I. Cobian. 50 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. However, as Tibetan grammarians regard “a wearing is” as the present tense of the verb ¢ to wear >’ and would not render the verbal noun “a wearing” always in this same manner, our theory of construction may be a mere speculative nicety, nevertheless we should translate our sentence into Tibetan Khorang-gi Shdmbhu ghon ; and from thence merely deduce the practical rule that with a Tibetan transitive verb the nominative must be rendered by the agentive case. Moreover—as if to render our remarks still less important— it must be admitted that in loose easy speech the agentive affix is frequently dropped and the noun or pronoun appears as though it were the ordinary nominative. Where the pronoun is not important to be expressed, it is altogether omitted : Shdmbu ghon : “he wears a cap.” Furthermore, with verbs of coming going or thinking the agentive case is not used. y. Another form of the Present tense and one perhaps in more common employment than the mere verbal root is produced by the addition of the syllables ghi y& or ghi dw’ to the root. This is a sort of narrative present which, with a view to distinguish it from the simple indefinite present, we term Definite Present tense. It is as common with us as with Tibetans, under the form: “I am—ing.” Ex: Sd-wa : to eat: §d-ghi-du’ : he is eating. The similar forms ghi yin’ or ght re’ are nearly as frequent ; and in Bastern Tibet the use with re’ supersedes that of dw’ completely. Framing sentences with these appendices, we say :— Ngdrang Norbhu-gang mdru do~ 1 am going down to Norbhu- ghi-yin : gang. A-dhung-ghi dhe-po tol-ghi-dw’ : The sa’is (horse boy) is un- fastening the mule. mp EE El UI THE VERB ACTIVE. 51 Of this tense we may subjoin a specimen in orthodox form, using the pronouns in the Agentive, as the verb * to beat” is a transitive one. InpicaTive Moob. Definite Present Tense. Singular. Plural. Nydrang-ghi dung-ghi-ys® (or yin) : Nydts'o-ghi dung-ghi-yi’ (or I am beating. yin): We are beating. Khyorang-ghi dung-ghi-dw’ (or re’) : Khyits'o-ghi dung -ghi-du’ : Thou art beating. You are beating. Khorang-ghi dung-ghi-dw’ : (or re’) : Khopdi dung-ghi-du’ : He is beating. They are beating. 8. A third kind of Present Tense is likewise in vogue. It appears to be resorted to in order to indicate that an action is just on the very point of being carried into opera- tion. It seems appropriate to class this notion as a Present rather than as a Future action ; the idea being that it is too imminent to be considered in any sense as what is ‘ about to be ”’—the motion and its announcement, as it were, starting simultaneously. We style the expression of this idea the Present Imminent Tense. Perhaps it signifies «1 am just doing so-and-so,” quite as frequently as it means: “I am on the point of doing so-and-so.” The Tibetan equivalent is expressed in two ways :— (1) By the addition of the word kap to the root of the verb and annexing thereafter yin or yi’ for the first person and re’ or du for the other persons. (2) By affixing the syllable ging (really IHX’) to the genitive of the Infinitive of the verb, annexing also auxiliaries similarly as in (1). In Lhésa (2) has superseded in the colloquial the first method which, however, continues to be followed in epistolary composition. Kap (really skabs) = ¢ chance,” “ means,” ‘ opportunity.” TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Present IMMINENT TENSE. Singular. Ngé do-wai ging yin: Iam just going. Khyi' do-wai ging re’ : Thou art just going. Kho do-wai ging re’ : He is just going. Plural. Ngé-ts'o do-wai ging yin : We are just going. Khyi'ts'o do-wai gang re’ : Ye are just going. Kho-pa do-wai ging re’ : They are just going. The precise meaning of Ngi do-wai gang yin or Nga do kap yin would therefore be «I am starting’ :— Bring the horse up to the door: Ti di gya-go t'uk t's shok ! I am just bringing it: Di t's kap yo. } The sun is setting : Nyima gai-pai gang re. The milk is on the point of Woma lii’pat ging re’. boiling over : Make tea : The water is about Soljha 85 chik : Chhu di khol to boil : fap id Co I am just doing some work : Ngd le-ka jhye’ par ging yin. Are they starting now or not : Khopa tanda do-war gang re’ ma re’. (N. B.—The at in do-wai, gat-pat, &c., is sounded nearly like ay in our ‘ way.”) PAST TENSES. (1) There appear to be several ways of expressing the more or less perfected form of any action and the exact shade of meaning indicated by the different methods em- ployed is not ascertainable from native informants. The more frequent shape which the past tense assumes is the root of the verb with either jhung (sounded chung) or song annexed as an affix. Certain verbs prefer jhung ; others PAST TENSES. 53 song ; and no rule seems to determine the affix chosen, custom deciding the usage with each particular verb :— Shi-wa : to die; shi song : died. Tsar-wa: to finish ; ts'ar song : finished. T’ong-wa : to see; t'ong jhung : saw, T’ob-pa : to receive, obtain ; t’ob jhung : received, got. (2) The more emphatic sense, or perhaps what the French would style the Past Indefinite, is best rendered by another form, namely, the participle with yin annexed for the first person, and du’ or re’ for the second and third : e.g., chhyin- pa~yin : Idid go; chhyin-pa-re’ : he has departed ; dzang-pa- re’; has sent; t’ob-pa-dw’: did get. Choice of past forms often depends on the person involved. Thus neither jhung nor song seem used with a 1st person; so, “I arrived ”’ is Nga lep-pa-yin and never Ngd lep jhung ; but he arrived ” might be Kho lep jhung. (3) Other forms seem to indicate rather a Passive meaning, though often used for more emphatic expression of the per= fect tense active :— a. The root with yi’ or dw’ added : dzang dw’: was sent, Nf = PTY I + has been sent ; to Sai yi’ (F FNNJ') has been eaten. B. Sometimes du’ is annexed in addition to song : shi song dw’ : has died, is dead :— Loma t'amché shing-ne bok song The leaves have all dropped du’ : from the tree. y. To the gerund in nas (ne), yo’ is added. This appears to require a rendering approaching our Imperfect Tense : Dul-ne-yi’ : 1 was walking, have been walking. 8. Final completion of any operation is expressed where necessary by the addition of #s’ar dw’ or zin du’ to the root of any verb :— Pumo di le-zhw khor kyap zin du’ : The girl has done spinning. 54 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Khopa to sdi tsar du’ : They have finished eating. Dhd-rung kho to sdi t'sar mi dw : He has not yet finished eating. Tsar pa-yin (1st person) ; ts’ar-pa-re’ (2nd and 3rd) are occasionally heard here instead of ts’ar dw’ ; also, negatively, ts’ar-pa-me’. (4) There exists in Tibetan a regular form of Imperfect Tense, but which is not resorted to on all occasions when we should use that tense. It is a curious circumlocution, but is, 1 am assured, in common use in Lhasa. Itis formed by add- ing to the verbal root the expression go-sdm-jhung Or go-sam gong meaning literally «did think must.” Ex: Khorang shing la dzak go-sam song-te mar Sak song : As he was climb- ing the tree, he fell down. | A lengthier form is go-sam-nat chhyin-pa : e. g. Tumling la do go-sam-nai chhyin-pai nge pui-mo dap jhung : In going to Tumlong, my knee was hurt. (5) Sometimes a perfect inflection of the verbal root is current; it is then generally conjoined to pa yin: e.g. §ai-pa-yin has eaten; fyoi-pa-yin has bought. FUTURE TENSE. There are two particular forms for this tense both in common use; either yong or gyu yo (yin or du’) 25Y be added to the root of the verb: Ayo yong ¢ will buy; »? flang-la do-gyu yin : “1 will go home ;” khyo di-la ts’ong-gyu-dw fea mindy’ : «will you sell it or not? kho tanda gyel-gyu-yo-: «pow he will slip.” Sometimes the Infinitive alone is employed, as In :— Ngé-ts'o la chhd-ghang nyo-wa : What shall we buy ? Khyi'la ghang jhye’-pa : What will you do? But. it will be seen, the nominative changes to the dative > case. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 55 Very commonly we notice the Present Narrative taking the place of the Future, e. g. Do-ghi-dw’ used for Do-gyu-du, as is the English practice also. The negative form takes me’ as the final syllable; occa- sionally we have min :— Mé-gi-la to ma dhang ; dhenda Don’t look down; then you khyo'rang gyel-gyu-me’ : will not fall. With the affix yong the negative particle is me :— Kyapgin di dhdrang ge-long-ts'o la jalkhd nang mi yong : The Protector (i. e., Grand Lama) will not give audience to the ge-longs this morning. N. B.—The rule, generally so rigid in Oriental speech, that if the dependent clause of a conditional sentence have the future construction so also shall the antecedent clause, is not commonly observed in Tibetan colloquial. Take such a sentence as this: “Tf you always read at night, you will certainly injure your eyes,” In Hindustani every native would turn the first part of the sentence “If you always shall read, &c.” Contrariwise, the Tibetan would express the future only in the second clause as we do in English, thus :— Ke-si khyi’ ts'en-la takpa-reshi jige dok na, nenten mik-la Suk gyak-gyu-re’. IMPERATIVE MOOD. a. The simplest form is the mere root, which in some cases bas the central vowel altered. Occasionally we find a special word is in vogue. To the root, whether altered or not, may be always appended chik or shik, sounded quickly. This is the more imperative style of demand. However the traveller will do well to remember that Tibetans are not so amenable to cart commands as are the natives of India. A real order, nevertheless, requires chik. B. Several politer forms are used among equals and these are by aggregation rendered still more precative when ad- 56 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. dressing superiors. Thus the following alternative appen- “dices may be added to the root in lieu of chik : — (1) Ro; (2) Ro chik—often contracted into Roch; (3) Ro nang ; (4) Ro dzv’ ; (5) Nang chi’; (6) Ro jhyi-shik ! These all imply the sense of our word ¢ please.” In Western districts, instead of chik, the word tong is used, and instead of the polite forms a second word zhu 1s appended, Ro z Central Tibet. Examples :— Wash the horse: Lay the child down on the cushion : Give me two rupees for the dog : When your work is done, come to me: Please shew me the way : Please send three rupees with- out delay : Come with me the whole way : hw is also heard in lieu of the Ro nang of Td-po di tu Shik. P’ugu ch’w'ten-la nya’ne 8hok ! Ngd-la khyi-i chhyirtu gyd-tam nyt nang ro nang! Rang-ght le-ka ts’ar-ne nge tsar pep ro chi’! Lam di ten ro dz! Gyd-tam sum tanda lamsang tang roch. Ngd dhang nyampo lam kang-gd la p'ep nang chi’! Ro alone added to the verbal root is generally enough; or zhu in the West and in Ladak. The causative verb Jhye’'pa is frequently added to the Imperative to give emphasis: Shing luk jhy?’ : put on wood. Y- annexing tang or dhang (really “and e. g. Di to §o dhang : Eat this; or the Imperative word ; T tang : See! Look! With certain verbs we find the Imperative formed by ») to the verbal root With other verbs, shok (¢come ”) makes the Imperative. 5. As already stated, a number of verbs retain in the col- IMPERATIVE MOOD. 57 loquial the special inflected forms which are to be found in the literary language. The principal are these :— Do-wa : to go imperative : Song ! Yong-wa : to come ” Shok ! Shakpa : to place » Sho! (guttural)! Kkyakpa : to carry "” Khyok ! Ti-wa : po ws : to see ” To dhang or Té shok ! Sry : to do, to make » Jhyi (pr. chyi)! yelwa : to convey " Kyal! (or kyo shik) ! Khur yong-wa : to bring ’ Khur shok ! Khur do-wa : to take away ’ Khur song ! Twa : to lead y Tv shok ! ! $d-wa : to eat ’ To $0 or §o dhang ! ze’pa : todo, make (khonorific),, Dzo’ ! Ohhik-pa : to break " Chhok chak ! Tang-wa : to let go, send ’ Tong ! Dzek-pa : to climb ’ Ziok ! Tab-wa : to strike ’ Top! Tak-pa : to tie ’ Tok ! Plap-pa : to put down, adjust ,, Pop! Yi -wa : i ar lang-wa : to rise up ' Yarlong! (“Get up”) It will be observed that in the majority of the above, the PARTICIPLES. . a. There are two forms used to represent the participial mood ; but there seems to be no distinction made Ym the present and past participle, either form being employed Whatever the time of action. The more correct form is identical with the Infinitive, being expressed by the root of the verb with the affix pa annexed, or after vowels and final » or! the kindred affix wa :— Ngdrang gyel-wa la d-nye- i yo'pa yin : nye-po 1 was nearly falling (lit: was 8 near to falling). 58 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. More often, however, the colloquial adopts the affix khen instead of pa or wa. B. These participles are employed in composition LI cisely after the fashion of adjectives; being used in the e case when placed after the noun to which they r in the genitive when preceding the noun :— : The dog barking all night. I observed the ox dying. The man who struck me ran over the bridge. I fell down and braised the knee which was formerly struck. nominativ are related, o Ndm kang-gd hab-khen ky khyt du Shi-wai lang-to tong jhung : Mi-po ngd-la dung-khen dhe sam- pai t'e’-lam la gyulk song : Ngdrang gyel-ne di pwi-mo ngon- tse dung-khen dhe-la dap song: “ The di is introduced in order to to mark off the partici- pial clause more clearly ; but this usage is optional. Where the conjunction that” would be resorted to in Enolish, a participial construction is often found in oO Tibetan :— | I did not see that the water Chhu di khyak-pa t'ong-pa-me. was frozen : — Lk - > jhung. I knew that he was coming: Nga-i kho yong-pa she jing i it wi ident that From the foregoing examples it will now be ev fig the whole participial clause can be handled and moved abou bodily as if it were a single adjective qualitying the sub- stantive.. Thence we are brought to the most important “ " - . . . r Ne function of the participial construction in Tibetan. y. All relative clauses are expressed without the #20 of relative pronouns by the substitution of the participial for the relative construction. In these cases the verb is made to take the form of a participle and the whole clause be- comes one gigantic adjective qualifying the antecedent of the relative clause. As before the whole clause being ter- minated by the participle it may be handled and shifted as foot : artici ino inflected according any other adjective, the participle being ace 3 PARTICIPIES. 59 to its position with respect to the antecedent and the sense to be conveyed. Thus such a sentence as— “The butcher who brought the sheep to the door of this house stole my boots.” Must be rendered somewhat in the style of— “ The bringing-the-sheep-to-the-door-of-this-house butcher stole my boots.” “ Bringing-the-sheep-to-the-door-of-this-house > is, as it were, the gigantic adjective qualifying the noun “ butcher; ”’ and the whole sentence in Tibetan stands thus : — Khyim di-yi go tuk luk khyer-wdi shempa di ngdrang-ght Tham kwi-ne khur song. As the verb in every clause or sentence invariably occurs as the final word, the participle in these cases alone receives inflection. In the foregoing example, the relative clause might just as readily be placed after the antecedent shempa, the participle taking the nominative in lieu of the genitive case. The article in this arrangement often occurs twice, standing both before the noun and after the gigantic adjec- tive or relative clause, thus: — Di shempa khyim di-yv go tuk luk khyer-wa di, &c. Let another example be taken :— “The boy to whom I gave the dog was clad in a yellow coat.” Before attempting to translate this sentence, it may be conveniently transposed as follows— ““ The boy who by me was given a dog was cladin a yellow coat.” We can now shape our gigantic adjective as The by-me-given-a-dog ”’ and place it before or after the antece- dent noun “boy,” rendering the sentence thus :— Nydrang-ghi khyt §hik ter-khen kyi potso dhe-yi ko-lok serpo ghyin-pda-di’. Analysing our example, we have the relative clause with its terminative word the participle fer-khen appearing in 60 the genitive case becaus the qualified noun potso. in the agentive case as the subje (Ch. VL, § B. L. B,) and the verb ghyon-pa- proach TIBETAN GRAMMAR. e of the position of the clause before Then we have potso di appearing ot of the main clause dw’ the nearest ap- hich would seem the most to an imperfect tense Ww Ko-lok neral meaning of the sentence. appropriate to the ge might be also dukpo ser. serpo “yellow coat” Another example :— who did this : Ngdrang-ght menshar di-nt jhye’- I praise the girl khen dhe-la ti'-ra tang-ght yo’. 'Lhen is the quasi adjective following its N. B.—Here di-ni jhye d interposed between the noun and its noun menshar a girl, an article dhe. But such a sentence as the following is correlative rather than relative and requires the relative pronoun :— 1 did this: Ngdrang-ght su yang di- khen-kyi menshar ld to'-rd nang. alternative form— I praise whichever gir la jhye’- less cumbrous would be the Or perhaps hen la, &c. Ngdrang-ghl menshar su yang jhye'k pial forms will fall more conveniently 5. Other partici f gerundial construction. under subsequent illugtratious o § AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. ow. Gerunds of Occurrence.—Short dependent clauses indi- cating the time or occasion of some general or particular statement in a principal sentence are ruled by a subordinate verb which in English takes the form of a gerund, or else is erb introduced by the pronoun “when.” In Tibetan such dependent clauses are terminated by the simplest form of the verb to which the affix la or na is ometimes the Infinitive with the same affix is 6.—GERUND a simple Vv annexed. S resorted to in these cases. GERUNDS AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 61 Several exampl i ibi ae ples will exhibit the usage with gerunds of On approachin i g the horse, it Tdpo dhang ¢d-nyé , ’ g t'd-nyépo do la ha violently: dhdakpo dok-t’o p’ul jhung. : . ning the voice, he looked Drd di nyen-pa la, kho chhi-lok ack : § , tai jhung ; or kho drd dv nyen- pa la, chhi-lok, &c. When be stepped on the bridge, Sampa-i tangla dok bor-la 1 : hw roke : chhak jhung. (dok bor-wa = to place foot) When you fire the rifle, I wi , I will Mendd gyak 1 or run towards you : t'ekya pn ay Mtn (N. B—The i . Bo-The Jeno are frequently omitted, as ngarang “1” ii. A less obvious use witl is i 1 la is in short copulati ativ sontenecs where in Hindustani we should employ ot ly participle; e. g. Go and pick it up: oy la oe ! Go and fetch the girl: Song la menshar di a shok | Wake up and light the fire : ny?’ si’la mé bl . oot é bhar nang , a is evidently only a derived use, as the la is annexed o the verb in its imperative form, and therefore is hardl analogous to the Hindustani idiom: Jakar dekh , uthake jao, &c. Shas sen ) i Frequently in accessory clauses commencing with when,” instead of the gerund in la, we hear used th verbal root with the adverb {tii or tu: ‘at the time of » : . - a - nexed. Bomgtimes also in those cases the participle in ho in the genitive with #s’e-na added serves the same ee ” ¢ ose : e. g. Leb-khen-kyv ts’ena, ke tang jhung < When he eta ’ he shouted out; ” or kho leb tui, ke tang jhung. B. Gerunds of Mode or the verbal use in accesso i cipial clauses. Properly the Gerund is mainly an YY part. adverb explaining the accessory circumstances a Ea ing any action; and thus we do right to lis a 62 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. wd all those clauses which are an enlargement or explanation of the principal predicate. These clauses are in English interposed in sentences with the aid of the participles in « ing” or « having—ed.” Such clauses in colloquial Tibetan are rendered by using a gerund consisting of the verbal root and the particle ndi (sounded almost as ne). Examples: — Kho, du yur-le jhe’ ne, nyin-kang gor song. Ohé jung-ne (or ton-ne), Pi- kyi ge-nyen du nga-la chham- biil $hu jhung. Having abandoned father, mo- Mi-po di yab yum no-o pang-ne, ther, and his younger bro- chik-pu tak-p'uk nangla dé. ther, this man dwells alone He remained all day thrash- ing the corn: Putting out his tongue, the Tibetan ge-nyen saluted me : in the cave: ii. Many sentences be reduced into forms akin to the foregoing gerundial con- are usually rendered by the aid of the gerund sentence as I will climb up the tree > being adapted for translation into is composed of co-ordinate clauses may struction and in ne. Thus such a and fasten the rope,’ the form ¢ Climbing up the tree I will fasten the rope,” easily rendered: Shing-la dzag-ne, tdk-pa di dam-gyw yun. In fact it should be borne in mind that THIS IS THE ONLY CORRECT WAY OF RENDERING ALL SUCH SENTENCES — He took up the gun, over the bridge, and has not yet returned : ma jhung. then you can easily pass over: khyirang le-ld-po-la gal chok. to be translated by the gerund in ne, e. g. :— Having been found stealing, I dismiss you : kehyd rang-la tol ter. crossed Khorang mendd len-ne, Sampa la galne, tanda par lokne leb I will hold the bridge and Ngdrang-ghi $ampa-la zin-ne, iii. The passive form of these gerundial clauses is equally Ngé khy’rang ku-ma ku-khen la nye-ne, gong-pa ter-ghi-yin ; or Ngdrang khyi'rang kew-ma ku-pa dhang te’ jhung-ne, GERUNDS AND SUBORDINATE CLAUSES. 63 iv. 1 i i iv In copulative sentences, akin to those in ii is likewise employed :— dl a no k q e mannam ; to’ shok ! . Minor i iti i ; : ; " Interpositions in gerundial clauses often take a gerund of another form. This i | 118 18 com posed of th ne : e root, to which the particle ching or shing is annexed, e. go. :— S . Th 9 * . Ee © Chinaman having depart- Gyd-mi di lap-she dhin-me’ la ed uttering vain abuse, the gyak-ching song-ne, Pi ets laughed loudly : ts'ot ha-chha gyak sing we . a as it ran away Nyen dv {dk wirtgding (or eeding, fell down into the tak tar-ching) shor-ne dokpo-i oree : ’ A gorge t'engla dil jhung. o. » i winds of Sequence. The clauses governed by gerunds us class imply some result di 3 irectly proceeding f dependent upon thei Soy r statements, and we of ” 8 ! y ve often find such Sioa introduced in English by the preposition ¢ by.” : © particle par or pe annexed to the verbal root is in Tibeta " iv 3 3 : the on for this kind of gerund, and it may be employed in a «ww » h iy ces which allege a reason for something hich : Asser ed immediately as a result therefrom. Thus «b pons so-and-so,” ‘because he did this,” &ec., all re ire ons ( . uire gerund in pe. As before, the usage may be best indi t ed by examples :— or By leaving the mi aving milk on the Woma di # al d 7 _ 9 fire, it has boiled over : Haale 025 01 oe You left this stick 1 s stick, so I have Khyirang-qhi di t di left th ° g-ght dv yuk-pa di bor- ght it now : pe, tanda mge di-la khyok Jhung. Se . : . end the oxen first, they will Ngdma lang-ts’o dzang-pé, dk trample down the snow: ts’ol khau-a dz yo (ot - 2 yong (or a a. dok dung yong). an away to Dongtse, be- Khorang §he’-pé otse, be §he’-pe, D se uk cause he was afraid : la des Seg 64 TIBETAN GRAMMAR, -ght in Chhu-wo gal-ching, rang-g Having lost my baggage 1m wd - » ro the river, I have chha-lak ghv’-la ive ng ndithier tent nor bedding: rang-la ghur malchhd me. ii. As will have been noted in the foregoing Sons the use of the ordinary copulative and’ 1s 2 | 1 Po ally avoided. Where in English two sen ences, eessarily subordinate to one another, are linked together cess gee i” in transfering them into the Tibetan J :uneti lauses with disjunctive c A few more examples are added :— conjunctions 1n general. The father pursued them and A-p'd di kho-ts’o-la etre ecained his daughter : rang-ght bhumo yang res ; nye jhung. Meeting the Chinaman in the Hrak-la Gyd-mi dhang t’e’-pe, ine. the brave Tibetan Pi’pa pd-o gt menda gyap- fed bis gun and the China- pe, Gyd-mu dov song. 1 Rt he doe for biting the Ngdrang-ghi kchyi-la, bhé’pa di so N : 0 t'ap-pai lén-la, dung song. I tr man because he Dhdngpoyimped-Suk mi-po dhang h t dzin hak jhung. is honest: Being intent on reading, the Dck-pa mang-po-la Song Hh earance of the bear fright- mo jhung-ne, nyd-la dhepa po jhye’ dw’. ened me : te i i ading, the bear appear- . . « By being held in much rea 2, : i y Lo being A qypenring by the bear’) to me a frighten in ”» SUPINES. 65 7. Surines.—This part of the verb, properly speaking, is always an appendix to some other verb, being in truth nothing else than an “extension of the predicate.” Tt is chiefly annexed to verbs of seeing, coming, going, and wishing. In Tibetan colloquial we find various methods of expressing a supine. a. Sometimes in offhand speech the mere Infinitive or even the bare root : — The rain has ceased to fall : Chharpa di bap chhé song. I want to go: Nygarang-la do goi-pa-yo’. Literally : “To me there is a w anting to go,”’—do tallying with the supine “to go.” B. More frequently we meet with la annexed to the root or infinitive, especially after verbs of motion :— I go to make ready the victu- Nga to-chha tal-dik jhe’pa-la als : do. I came to see the monastery: Di gompa t'ong-la yong jhung. Supines here are fal-dik jhe’pa-la and t'ong-la. The beggar is coming to beg : Pang-go di long-la yong-ghi-du’. v- Most correctly with gyu or else by means of dhindhu and the genitive participle :— Marpa-yi Dolma yong-ghi-du’ Ser-gyu t'oi-nai, dong t'uk-pai dhin-dhu song. that Dolma was coming, Marpa, having heard it ne] went to meet her : N. B.—Here we have two supines “said” or “to be said” expressed by Ser-gyu, and dong t'ukpai dhindhu meaning to meet,” dong t'ukpai being the genitive of the participle. Literally we may translate the Tibetan: *“ Marpa (in agentive case) having heard to be said ‘ Dolma is coming,” went in order for meeting (her).” Pronouns where obvious are omitted. He gave it me to eat : Khé ngd-la di §d-gyu ter-pa-re’. Nyi-ma nup nup la, khys-kyi ngd-la ri-kyi teng-nai jon-gyu ta-gyu yin. see me approaching from As the sun is sinking, you on] over the mountain : N. B—“As” “while” verbal root. 9 are expressed by la with the repeated 66 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. In place of dhondiu, we frequently hear dhinla (ton-la) and dhon dhdk-la (ton-tdk-la) :— 1 shall stay at home to read Ngd pechhd do books: la nang-la gor-gyu-yin. 8. Frequently, to gyu ; and in fact that is the commoner usag 1 am longing to eat these puffs: Ngdrang mo-mo di-ts’o 8a-gyu la 8hem-ki-yin. mised to thresh the corn Ngdrang sang-nyin du-la ge’ gyap-gyu la khe lempa yo’. k-pai dhon-dhdk- in expressing the supine, la is attached e with gyu:— I pro to-morrow : But, equally, we hear 1 wish to go home: Have you learned to write : Ngd nang-la do-gyu di’ -ghi-yo’. Khys yi-ge di-gyu shet jhung- nga ? e. The practice with the Inchoative Verb is to place gyw in the genitive :— He began to bui wall yesterday : I am beginning to speak Tibe- tan a little : Always begin to work at once : Dhii-gyiin le-ka jhye’gyu-v go- dzuk t'el-t’el-la. 1d the new Kho khd-sang tsik-pa sarpa du gyap-gyu-t go-dzuk song. Ngdrang Po'-ke’ tik-tse chi’ lap- qyu-1 go-tsuk-ghi-yo'. » is sometimes for convenience placed after N. B.—* At once’ ther cases where two the verb; see also this construction in 0 adverbs might occasion confusion. Sometimes, however, the usage with gyu- with an inchoative ; e. g.:— He began to eat an hour ago: la is observed Kho to Sa-gyu-la go-tsuk-ne chhu-ts'6’ chik song. (Literally : “ From he beginning to eat, one hour has gone.”) ’ are both in use. ¢« Order N. B.—Go-dzuk-pa and go-tsuk-pa “ to begin ’ z. In such expressions as ‘Tell him to go,” him to send it,” &c., the supine would never be employed; but instead two Imperatives—< Tell him-go !”’ &c. NEGATIVES. 67 8. NecATIVE rorMs.—i. There are two negative auxiliary Fore correspondent to yi’pa and yim-pa, namely me’pa to be without,” ¢ not to exist,” and min-pa “ to be not,” the simple connective of the attribute. The former , also be used as the negative connective, ! Ngd-la to-chhd me’ (‘‘ To me there is not food.”) Khye di ngarpo min. I am without food : The dog is not savage : Sometimes du’ is annexed in the latter case :— The girl is not pretty : Menshar di chhormo min dw’. Here is an exam ive i ple of the negative in a participi relative clause :— : ini Chinese are men without pity Gydmi-ts'o di nying-je me’pa-yi (lit: Chinese are men who mi-ts’o yd’. are without pity :”) i, Two negative particles are in use with ordinary verbs either in the case of the simple root of a verb or with the compound forms :— Mi is employed with the Present Tense and Future Tense. Ma with the Past Tenses and the Imperative Mood. oe negative particles in the case of compound verbs should be introduced just next preceding the last syllable of the compound :— I shall not eat meat to-day : Dhe-ring sha §@ mi yong. The men have not perished : ~~ Mi-ts’o lik ma jhung. I do not see him : Nga kho-la mk mi td. Where one member of the compound is yin or yo’, we may substitute in negative forms mén or me’ :— It will not be necessary : Got-gyu-men. He will not do the work well: Le-ka §dkpo jhyd-gyu-me’. Dha-de kho gyuk-ki-mén. . iii, Important. In the negative Imperative, the Present ndicative form of a verb, and not the ordinary Imperative He is not running now : 68 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. is used. Thus, “ Don’t come . is Hy yong, not ma shok ; ¢ ’ ? ma §d, not to ma §o! | 0 ’ oar . The simple interrogative form of the verb is the same as that in literary use; 1. e., the final letter is re-duplicated and the syllable am affixed thereto: but the final m is usually silent :— Has he arrived ? 0 1h -nqd : Lep jhung-ng Will he come ? Yong-gyu-yinnd : : 5 Dhdrung khys' to Sai ts'ar-rd : Have you finished eating yet ! B Where an interrogative pronoun is introduced, the additional syllable is unnecessary (though sometimes used), and the pronoun is then generally placed immediately before the verb :— _ Khyo'kyt singmo ghd-ru do-ghi- Where is your sister gomg Yo: Di su yin: Di-pa su yi’ : | | In a sentence of past signification, in which an in- | 7 | . . . terrogative pronoun occurs, the verb is always used as in iti : Tense :— he Infinitive Mood Present | oH a di su-la ter-pa? To whom did you give the cup Ks nam leb-pa yim-pa ? When 41d you come (arrive) fi A curious construction is resorted to in sentences of presen and future signification the gerundial affix pas panned gas ) being appended to the auxiliary terminants of those Who is this ? Who is here ? or pe tenses :(— _ Khyv'-kyt singmo ghd-na do-ghi Where 18 your sister going! yo'par ? Co | © Khyo i-ge ti-gyu shin-ghi-yd’pe : Are you le ming to ) ) : Shall we go to-day Dhering do-gyu-yrmpe : aE Khyo' la ghang jhung-wa : What is the matter wih you Khorang-ghi khdshe go-yi’ pe: Does he want some . ; Kho-la so Suk gyak-ghi-yd’-pai: Has he got toot vaehe | S$. Quite a different method of expressing the interroga- ive is also to be met with. No syllable is appended to the arning to write ? t J INTERROGATIVES AND NEGATIVES. 69 verb; but, instead, a short abrupt interjectional particle sounded eh or ¢, is interposed before the utterance of the final verb :— Yul-ngen é jhung ? Is a tempest arising ? Di dong-pa la nd-ts'ang é yi’ : Are there lodgings in this village ? Ddk-la Tamkhen chi yi'pa é yo’: Am I to have a guide ? Dhi-p’en é ma tsar : Is it not finished by now ? e. A curious expletive, sounded 0-co, is often heard added on to interrogative sentences, chiefly negative ones, evidently intended to impart a persuasive turn to the question. In common talk it may be said to answer to our won’t you,” “ will you,” at the end of any hortative injunction : — Mdndro, o-go : Don’t go, will you ? Yong-gyu-yimpa, o0-go : You will come, won't you ? Khyi-la ma tang, o-go : Don’t let go of the dog, will you? Ling-po jhe’-la chhing, o-go : You'll tie it up securely, won’ you ? Maingu, o-go : Don’t cry, will you ? Remark : The practice of re-iterating the verb in negative imperatives is common. Thus do mdndro is as frequent as mandro. 10. Use or “ Nyona.”—The employment of this verb is peculiar. Nyong-wa means primarily to taste” and hence comes to signify “to experience—undergo: >’ whence it seems to have been gradually utilised as an auxiliary in cases where a sense of perpetuity was to be imparted. Ac- cordingly myong is now used as a suffix when the general meaning of “never” or “ever” is to be indicated ; but its use is confined to sentences employed in the past sense and more commonly in the negative :— Ngérang dhéru song ma nyong : I have never been there. Nygen-la ngd pechha @angpo jige 1 have never read so many dok ma nyong dhendar : books before. Ngédrang-ght yd si ma nyong : I never did eat fish. EE —————— rT — a ” TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Khyo'kyi dzo chhempo dhendai Did you ever see so big a dzo §hik tong é ma nyong : (yak) as that ? Khyi'kyi ts’ wr-la nam-ydng yong Have you ever been here ma nyong-ngd (m) : before ? 11. Porentia. Moon.—The ability or possibility of carry- ing out an action, or of compassing anything, is expressed in literary Tibetan by adding the verb Nus-pa, «to be able,” to the root of the active verb affected. The verb Nus-pa is thus added inflected in any required tense. In the colloquial this verb, sounded nii-pa, is still heard, but other potential auxiliaries are oftener resorted to; e. g. Chok-pa, and T’ub-pa (sounded T u-pa). Anyone of these may be affixed either to the verbal root or (less commonly) to the gerund :— Nga tanda do chok : I can go now. Khyi-kyi Piling ké lap chok : You are able to speak English. Ngd-rang dhii-gyiin jhye’ wii : I can always do it. Khorang khd-sang yo chok ma He could not buy it yesterday. song : Nye tdk-la dzdk t'u-ghi-me’ : Khys' nyin-sang laptse t'ong tw You will be able to see the pass- yong : top to-morrow. B. When the potential assumes an interrogative form, the potential auxiliary nearly always takes the future tense :— Khyi' p'd-ghi-ru gyukshd 16° uw Can you run there ? I cannot climb the rock. yong-nga : (N. B—In Lhasa, gyukshd 15’-pa ‘““to run ” is often said in- stead of gyuk-pa.) Do chok yong-nga : Dhe dzak t'u mi yong-nga : Su ang-ki dhangpo lep tuyong : ~~ Who can get first ? But the future is not used in such as these :— Khyi-rang-ght Pé’-yi(k) lo t'u- Can you read Tibetan or not ? ghi yo'dhang me’ : (lo-pa or lok-pa *‘ to read.” ) Kho khd-sang 8d chok song-nga : Could he eat yesterday ? Can you go? Cannot we climb up it ? THE POSSESSIVE VERB. 71 y. Such expressions as * what you can” and “ag—ag you are able,” can be rendered by the form ghang chok-pa : — Ghang chokpa nang ro dze : Give as much as you can Nygd ghang chokpa gyokpo chhyin- 1 went as quickly as I could pa-yin : : id ghd-ru chokpa dzok §hi’: Climb up as far as you are able Khyo’-rang ts’a-po ghang t'u-pa Drink it as hot as you can tung : : Nga mangpo ghang chokpa top I will get as many as I can yong : Khyo’-rang ghd-dhii chokpa do As soon as you can, it is time ren du’ : to go Another verbal form equi 1 quivalent to chok-pa is found i Ts’vk-Pa, to be able :— 2 21 Can he see us ? Khorang-ghi ngd-chd-la t'ong ts’uk-ka ? As the traveller journeys west of Shigatse, he will find both these potential auxiliaries entirely replaced by 7Tub-pa which word is also often heard at Lhasa. pe 12. THE POSSESSIVE VERB “TO HAVE.”—As in most of the Oriental idioms, this forin requires to be express- ed by a circumlocution. The construction is either th common one of “To me, him, &ec., there is; or that in vogue in Hindustani: ¢ Near me, him, &ec., there is.” With pronouns, the former is the ordinary usage i—I have a horse : Ngdrang-la td chik y3’. With % noun-substantive the latter construction is more general: —The child has a prett face: Di p’ugu-la dong ts’ arp yo’ or Di p’ugu tsinas dony &ce. when tadnas is used, it would be nore correct to place the preceding noun in the genitive : Limd-yv tsdnai ngul ts’angma dw’ : < Near the Lama all the money is’ = « _ Lama has all the money.” vd ° The Past construction requires 45 auxiliary Jhung dw’ e. g. nda-ning ngd-la §hamo sum jhung dw’ : “Last er 7 72 "TIBETAN GRAMMAR. three hats.” Again: ‘Because I had a little business, therefore I could not come: ngd-la le-ka tiktse jhung-pe, dhe- ne yong t’ub ma song. 13. OPTATIVE FORMS.—The sense of ¢ must,” « ought to,” &c., is expressed in a manner akin to the French il faut with the dative of the agent. The verb used is go-pa be necessary *’ which is always employed in the persona, form preceded by the root of the verb affected, the agen being placed in the dative; thus “I must go” 1s Adres la do go; and “I must go home’ would be ngdrang-la khyim-la do go (lit: To me to home to go 1s necessary. ) Go-pa also means “to wish,” “to want; ” and ! I want, &c. must likewise be rendered with the dative as just stated. Thus “I want a guide >> would be ngdrang-la lamkhen chik go ; ’ = khorang-la go-pai ts’ong-zok chu-li yo’ (lit: Merchandise to him which is necessary is apricots” N. B. go-pai ts’ong-zok is partici- pial construction). Another verb, not unlike go-pa in sonnd, namely kho-ws is frequently preferred in the above phrases. Often this word takes the expanded form kho-jhe’ yi’pa ¢ to be in want of”? or “to want,” or ‘to be needful to’’; and still re- quiring the dative :— oo If you want the dog, please Nyi'-la khyv di kho-jhe’ yi na send 13 rupees: gyd-tam chusum tang ro Shu (or tang ro dze’). I don’t want it: Nydrang-la kho-wa me’. | The kinds which you wanted Khyi’la kho-jhe’ yd’pai rik di cannot be bought here : dir nyo ma chok. Sometimes the future is heard : — I shall not want to travel at Ngd-la ting-sang dul kho-gyu me’ present : (or goi-gyu-me’). CONSPECTUS OF PARTS OF ACTIVE VERB. Present Tenses : Nyo : Nyo-ghi-du’ : Nyo-kap-du’ : Past Tenses : Nyo jhung : Nyo-pa yo’ : Nyo-wa: to buy. INpicaTIVE Moon. (I, thou, he, we) buy. am buying, is buying, &c. am, is, just buying. (I, thou, he, they) bought. has, have, bought—did buy. Imperfect Tenses : Nyo-go-sam-jhung : was buying. Nyo-tap-yin : Future Tenses : Nyo yong : Nyo-gyu-yin : Nyo-war dw or Nyo-wa-la du’ Nyoi shik ! Ma nyo! Nyoi ro nang ! Nyo shyt chik : Nyo ro jhyi chik : Nyo chuk : Potential form : Optative form : Participle Present : Participle Past : Gerundial forms : Supine forms : was just buying, nearly buying. (I, he, you) shall buy. shall be buying, will bu y. } shall probably buy, Imperative Mood. Buy! Don’t buy ! Please to buy ! Cause to be bought ! Please cause to be bought ; or Please to buy. Let him buy, Nyo-chok ; or Nyo-ni’ : Can buy. Nyo goi : Ought to buy. Nyo-wa or Nyo-khen : Buying, Nyo-nai : Having bought. Nyo-la : On buying, Nyo-pai : By buying, Nyo-ching : In buying. Nyo-nyo-la : While buying, Nyo-gyu : To buy, to be bought. For buying: in order (or dhindd-la) to buy. Nyo-war dhondhy : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. SECTION C.—THE VERB PASSIVE. 1. In the Tibetan idiom little provision seems to have been made for expressing the verb in a distinctive Passive sense. Such grammatical niceties as occur in European languages whereby, for example, we should be able to say « The corn has been eaten by the horse” as discriminated from The horse has eaten the corn” are not attended to in this Eastern speech. Nevertheless, as we have noticed, the whole Tibetan verbal scheme is moulded on what might be termed the Passive construction, and that even in sentences of most active transitive significance. Accordingly in the sentence just instanced, the form would be literally akin to our Passive phrasing, i. e., ¢ By the horse, as to corn, an eating was.” But, for all practical purposes it is evident that—as already indicated —we should treat these forms as if they were pervaded by Active verbs. 9. In Tibetan, however, when neglect of a special dis- tinguishing form for the Passive would allow the exact meaning to be conveyed to remain ambiguous, even then the Active construction is often resorted to. Thus the sentence, The girl’s heart is unpolluted with sin” is heard rendered kyin-kyi menshar-kyi sem-la ma go ¢¢ Sin does not taint the girl’s heart.” 3. Nevertheless when no agent is introduced into a sen- tence, we cannot avoid making use of a Passive form in English. Thus we must say : The corn has been eaten,” no other turn being possible for such expressions. And so likewise in Tibetan. Whenever assertions of that class are required to be made, we shall find the Tibetan verb frequent- ly assuming a particular shape by the annexation of the auxiliary dw’ both in present and perfect tenses. Ld (really lags), an elegant synonym for dw’, is also employed. For the perfect tenses however dw’ is preceded by the root of PASSIVE FORMS. 75 the verb #s’ar wa «to complete, finish >’ and sometimes th Pout of a synonymous verb zin-pa. Thus Du di 84: ts’ar du’ . the corn has been eaten,” though we pave heard it t : ol loosely Du di §a song. To the use with the above i we may, we think, apply the term Passive Voice. a The Present of this Voice is rarely required ; but such phrases as “I am injured,” “I am beaten.” hon u 1 the sense of “being injured,” ¢ being beaten ” im 5 present time, can be best rendered by the gerund in — Jt du’ or li appended. Thus for te’pa * to believe in,” the compound te’pa jhye’pa is preferred; and instead of gyi’pa “to repent,” the compound gyi’pa jhye’pa “to make re- pentance.” Many instances occur in our Vocabulary. We have seen that to emphasize the imperative form of verbs, Jhye’pa is frequently added as an intensive, though quite pleonastic (ante V. B. 4). Then, also, there is the idiomatic use in certain phrases. Nang-dhik = the inner Ego, the inner self; from which we draw the idiom nang-dhdék jhye’pa to perceive,” to take heed of.” Kham-chhu = the lips; from which we draw the idiom Zham-chhw jhye’pa to bicker,” ‘to quarrel.” Nyd- mo = near; whence is derived the phrase nyémo jhye’pa “to love, be attached to.”” There are many similar forms. COMPOUNDS WITH JHYE PA. A numerous class arises by the help of the ordinary causative verb sEYE’PA to do, make—as is the case in many P’aknyen jhye’'pa : Diim-ma jhye’pa : Kab-kyon jhye’pa : Yur-le jhye’pa : Ziin jhye’pa : Ke-chhd jhye’pa : Na-len jhye’pa : Kurim jhye'pa : Le jhye’pa : Kha-ya jhye’pa : Khékpo jhye’pa : Khok-t'uk jhye’pa : to play the eaves-dropper. to take counsel with. to upbraid. to thrash (corn, &ec.) to tell a lie. to have a talk. to give shelter to, to lodge. to worship, make * pujah.” to work, labour. to co-operate with. to be in difficulties. to be anxious. 78 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. to scatter. to thunder. to cure. to learn by heart. to trick, defraud. to promise. to take pains. to retreat. to state fully. to prepare to start. to supplicate. to oscilate, swing. to beckon, signal to. to knock out of the way. to argue in favour of (object placed in Gen.) Ohhdk-chhdk jhye’pa : Dir-dir jhye’'pa : Sot jhye’pa : Nyam-len jhye’pa : Shdp-shop jhye’pa : Shal-8he jhye’pa : Kaduk jhye’pa : Gydp-lok jhye’pa : Gye-pa jhye’pa : Do-gyu jhye’pa : Shu-long jhye’pa : Yom-yom jhye’pa : Yapmo jhye'pa : Shuk jhye’pa : Mi-pang jhyepa : B. A less extensive series of compounds depend upon another common verb Do-wa to go. Thus in preference to the primitive verb p’ampa to be defeated,” the modern custom makes use of pam do-wa, literally «to go to be defeated.” Again, in lieu of p’ung-wa « to sink under” “to perish,” we hear p’ung do-wa. This auxiliary joined to the gerund of another verb im- plies reason to expect that any action or event will come to pass. Thus in the example: The Pass most likely is blocked,” we add do to the gerund of kdk-pa “to be hin- dered,” saying Ld di kdk-ne do. We even append it to itself in such a sentence as: «I think I shall go ”—Ngdrang do-ne do. y. Another auxiliary of this class is chuk-pa, which, however, partakes more of the nature of a causative. It is likewise heard in the sense of ‘to permit,” to let”: — Boil the potatoes : Sho-ko di khol chuk ! (or: Get the potatoes boiled.) Allow me to walk in front: Ngdrang-la ngen-la dul chuk. COMPOUND VERBS, 79 8. A common appendix occurs in the use of Sir-wa “to undergo,” which is used in a variety of phrases indicating what is felt or passively experienced. Thus, instead| of na-wa “to be ill,” we generally hear ne’kyr Sir-wa lit. «to suffer by sickness ; again, dhang-ghi $ir-wa to be cold.” « Perhaps the most characteristic of these formative verbs, and one of very varied application, is to be met with in the emphatic word Gya’kpa which when standing alone bears the signification “to throw.” In several districts of Tibet the word assumes the form GYaBPA Or Gydp- pa; and west of Tishi-lhiimpo the latter form is the nil most commonly heard. This auxiliary is conjoined to sub- stantives only ; and has so extensive a range that in combi- nation it affords quite a remarkable series of expressive and vigorous compound verbs. In composition the verbal por- tion alone is inflected, the preceding noun to which it i attached remaining unaltered. The following are the combinations more frequently occurring; gyakpa or gyap-pa being interchangeable accord- ing to the custom of any district :— Lu gyakpa : Hdz gyakpa : Hara gyakpa : Du-la ge’ gyap-pa : Hire gyakpa : to sing a song. to exaggerate. to throw dice. to thrash corn. to pile up a corn-stack. to fire a gun. to traffic. to consider one’s plans. to sculpture or emboss on walls. to singe (e. g., a horse). to shout. to jeer at. Mendd gyakpa : Zong gyakpa : Doz gyakpa : Burko gyakpa : Shop gyakpa : Boira gyakpa : O-sho gyakpa : Um gyakpa : to kiss. Wur gyakpa : to make a noise, - a ——— i —— ——— 80 Lo gyakpa : Yikik gyakpa : Par gyakpa : Hlempa gyakpa : Shi-da gyakpa : Arba gyakpa : Sa-bin gyakpa : Dhakha gyakpa : Suk gyakpa : Ts gyakpa : Lap gyakpa : Higka gyakpa : Yukpa gyakpa : Ghur gyakpa : La gyakpa : Nyi-chhol gyakpa : Tak gyakpa : Dhéingka gyakpa : Lé'mo gyakpa : Ding gyakpa : Kha-Fiin gyakpa : Pi-tsuk gyakpa : Monlam gyakpa : Zin gyakpa : Dhong gyda gyappa : Td-shdk gyakpa : Jak gyakpa : Go-la suk gyakpa : Salpo gyakpa : Gomba shik gyakpa : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. to cough. to hiccough. to print. to sew a patch. to whistle. to cast lots. to sow seed, to shoe a horse. to hurt, injure. to paint. to chatter. to sob. to flog. to pitch a tent. to surmount a pass. to walk in one’s sleep. to achieve fame. to count. to imitate. to suspect. to pretend to have lost. to kneel. to pray. to make pretence. to seal. to give a kick. to rob (violently). to have a headache. to make bright. to found a monastery. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 81 CHAPTER VII. PRONOUNS, — NEL — 1.—PERSONAL PRONOUNS. o. We find a variety of personal pronouns of synony- mous meaning in use in Tibet; some of these, however, being current in certain provinces only. TT Genitive or . Nominative. Possessive. Accusative. Agentive. Nya : Nge or Nygdichen | Ngd-la Ngd-yi or Ngé Ngdrang : Ngdrang-ghs Nydrang-la N, Sirangeght Dik : Dik-ki Dik-la Dak-kyi Kho-wo : Kho-wor | / Nyatsok : ceva eee, Ap’o-nga : $ret rrr arsenate | eet ert erent ene ane IL. | of me, mine. me, to me. by me. Khyo' : | Khyo' kyr Khys' 1 5" ky yo, hyo’ yo’ la Khyo' yi Khyo' rang 2 | Khyo rang-ghi Khyorang la Khyirang-ghi Khye' : Khye' kyu Khye' la Khye' kyi Ny?rang : Nyi’-1ang-ghi -rang-ghi Nopohi 9-9 Nyi'-rang-ghi You. of you, your. you. by you. Kho : Khot & Khochen | Kho-la Kho-yi or Kho Khorang : Khorang-qghi Khorang la Khorang-ghi Khong : Khong-ghr Khong-la Khong-ghi He. of him, his. | him, to him. by him. 11 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ie SNS ——— inative Genitive or Accusative. Agentive. Bominative. Possessive. ichd ichak-ki ichdk : ichdk-ki Ngdchik-la Nydchak-k Nn No Ngats'o-la Ngats’o-yi Khowo-chdk : eeerraneae Ngé'-kyi Nyé-ts We . us, to us. by us. -wa Kho-wa-yi ‘ho-wa : Khowachen Kho-wa la Z oe 2 Kho-pachen Kho-pa la Kho-pa-y Khochdk : Khochak-ke Khochdk-la Khochal -ki Khong-ts'o: | Khong-ts'ov Khong-la Khong-ts’'o -dak : Dhe-dag-ght bhe is. of thom. their. | them, to them. by them. B. Genper aNp Numer. In the application of the foregoing pronouns there is not much attention paid to the gender of the persons or things represented. There 1s, nevertheless, a feminine form for kho-wo I,” where the speaker is of the female sex, namely Kho-mo. ere usually no distinction made between “ he gad she ; but the latter pronoun occasionally is differentiated by sub- stituting for the ordinary kho, the feminine monosyllable i he. mo “she.” The neuter “it” can be expressed by dh The diserimination of number, mOTe0Ver, is avoided except where any ambiguity would arise. It will be observed that chdk and ts’o are the plural affixes, either of which may be added to the singular pronouns of the 1st and 3rd persons. Where feasible we find ngé or ngdrang used equally to “we” as well as “I”; and kho, khong, &ec., express ; : However wngachdk, khochdik, oo ’ frequently signify they. ¢ &e.. are in common use also, and must be chosen whenever ’y i stress is laid upon the number of persons indicated. : “I” is y. First Person. The most popular word for —_— — mesma. ee p— I ————————————— PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 83 ngdrang which is used in common converse much more frequently than ngé. The possessive form mine” is generally ngichen ; whilst “my” and « of me” are usually rendered by ngdrang-ghi or ngdv (nge). Jaeschke says that kho-wo is often used by a superior personage in easy con- versation with his subordinates :— That meadow is mine : Ne-ma dhe ngdchen yi. My fox-skin hat is new : Ngdrang-ghi wi-shd di sarpa du’. Let us pitch our tent near the Trdk-ki damdhu rang-ghi ghur rock : gyak-yong. God will give us help : Konchhoa-kyi ngichdk la ram- da nang-gyu du.’ I loved the child when I saw t'ong-l irang-ght kho dzd- him on his birthday feast : orga ngdrang-ght Kho. dz Le ming-tém-mo la pugu wo jha yo’. Give me a receipt : Dik-la £'6-8in chi’ nang ro nang. Dik means really * self ” and is a common word for the first personal pronoun both in speaking and in letter-writing, being mostly employed in the objective case for ¢ me.” Another term for “me” used chiefly in correspondence but also in talk, is one of assumed humility. This is the term fen or {en-rang (X§ p’ran or J&R" p’ran-rang) mean- ing “insignificant one.” Thus in a letter : “I send you my good wishes” would be rendered T"en- rang-ne rang-ghv semkarpo p’ul jhung, i. e. < From your hum- ble one his goodwishes are sent.” T"en-chhung and t’em-bhu are likewise in vogue. 2. As to the use of rang-ghi a word must be here inter - posed. It answers precisely to the apna of Hindustani speech and stands for my” “your” “his” whenever these possessives refer to the nominative or acting subject of the sentence :— I will bring my gun: Ngdrang rang-ghi mendd khyer yong. ——— TE wn Ee ———— —— a er ——— rr cE —— TIBETAN GRAMMAR. He will bring my gun: Khorang ngdr mendd khyer yong. Khorang rang-ghi mendd khyer yong. He will bring the gun with Khorang mendd di rang dhang him : nyampo khyer yong. Begin your work at once: Rang-ght le-ka tanda t'eltu go dzuk : He will bring his gun : 8. Seconxp Person. The common word among equals for “you” is thyi’rang, which frequently sounds to the ear as if it were spelt yo’rang (Chap. I, page 13). In the dative, khyo’-la seems to be more usual than khyd’rang-la ; thus: — Ts'ong-wai dhon-dhu khyo’-la Have you any eggs to sell P gong-qa yo’'pe : Possessively this term is the common word also : — Khyi'rang-ght ming ghang Ser- What is your name ? ghin-re’ : Di pugu di khyd'-kyi yo’ pe: Is this child yours? e. However, in formal conversation with strangers, and in addressing anybody with politeness, the words ny?’ and ny?’ rang are generally employed :— Ny2’ ghdne yong : Whence have you come ? Ny’-la dhon Shik yo'pe : What is your business with me ? (Have you any business ?) Nyi'rang-ghi khyim (or nang) Where is your house ? ghd-re’ : Kusho, nyi'rang ngd-la sem-la Sir, do you remember me ? nge pa’ : Another honorific term is said to be khye’. It is not so often heard as the plural form khye’-ts’o, used in addressing a deputation or company of people. Also khye’chdk. e. Tuirp Person. The usual term is khorang, and both DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, 85 “he” and “she” are expressed by the word. In certain districts we have heard mo employed for ‘“ she,” but never kho-mo. The possessive feminine is sometimes mot, whilst the masculine is rarely khoi, the form ¢ his” being generally kho-rang-ghi. Kho-wa is said by Jaeschke to be a special term for ¢ they ;” though kho tso is the word brought to our notice as the usual plural: but we have also Leard kho-pa : — Kho-pa nyt p’irlok jhung du’ : Both of them were outside. Kho-la song lap : I told him to go. (Lit: “I told him ‘go’ ” The neuter it’ as a nominative is never expressed ; and when occurring in the objective case, resort is made to the demonstrative pronouns, e. g. “He shot it” would be ““ shot this” or ¢ shot that.” All the personal pronouns are frequently unexpressed when the sense is apparent, the verb alone being spoken. 2—DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. a. The simplest forms are di this, dhe that. When reference is made to anything just mentioned dhe is invari- ably used, never di ; and so, likewise, when what is to follow is referred to without using a noun, di is always the pronoun selected. Thus a person, referring to what he has just said, would in Tibetan never say: “I mention this ”’ but ‘I mention that.” So, too, with respect to place, “this” and “that” are not used so loosely as they aie in English speech. The demonstrative pronouns follow the noun they qualify, and are declinable. Thus :— Throw a stone at that tree: Shing dhe-la do gyop ! B- In the province of Tsang and in Sikkim, we have wudi or audi and p'idi in use for “this” and * that 86 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. respectively ; moreover these pronouns then precede the noun {— Who is this girl ? Audi pumo ghang yi'pe ? y. When the pronouns stand unattached to nouns, they often take the affix ka or ga: di-ka = this, this one ; dhe-ga that, that one. In Tsang the affix ni is added in the same way. Which do you want, this or Di-ka dhe-ga, nyi'la ghang got that ? gyu ? 8. Tibetans make use of forms of the demonstrative pro- nouns which enable them to discriminate with considerable nicety the exact position of any object they wish to indicate. Thus, di = this, close by ; hd- gi = that, just yonder; p’d-gv = that, much further off, that far away; yd-gi = that, up there; md-gt = this down below. When used with any nouns, these compounds generally precede it. That (over there) is mine: Pia-gi nga yin. Sometimes in these cases di or dhe is likewise used for perspicuity :— Run to that house (right over P’d-gt nang dhe-la gyuksha there) : 0’ tang (or 10’ dhang ). Turn down that path (just Hd-gi lamkha di kyok song. yonder) : 2. The plural affix is attached to the demonstrative pro- noun and not to the substantive, nam and ¢s’o (sounded ts’u) being the common affixes ; chd(k) is not often heard in Ui:— Take off those dogs : Khyt dhe-ts’o t'i song ! These men are a little late to- Dhe-ring mi di-nam tiktse gor day. song. OTHER PRONOUNS. 87 Where we have ¢ these,” « those,” apart from any noun we hear di-nam, and dhe-dék or dhe-ts’o. 3—INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. These are used as adjectives and in the modern colloquial differ considerably from the older forms. Little more than n |» 3 1 . . 2 . enumeration is needed: Dd: “any; Fhd-she (FIN). <¢ . - some; * ghangmo: “the whole;” £amehd (never iin) , .. or ts'angma “all:> kin « every ;”’ re and re-re each - §hii- ma : others; Shem-ma another. These can be employed alone or with nouns :— Toktse-v tang-la ngai pe-chhd da Ave any of my books upon the dw'ka mind’ : table or not ? ’ ) Tanda Peltu khd-she nang-la Some had gone home at once : chhyin-pa-re’ ; onkyang £am- but all those living near s ché tsa-ne nai-pa dhe sd-la on the ground. | de yi’: at 4 —INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. (1) In asking questions, the interrogative pronoun must stand in the sentence immediately next before the verb and therefore nearly at the end of such sentence, Those 1n common use are the following :— Ghang : which, what; Su : who ; Kipd or Ghi-pé and Ghd-ry - where ; Ghdnde (sounds Kdndé) : how; Qhi-dhui (sounds kd-tii) when ; Ghd-ts's : how much, how many ? All these are capable of declension ar ’ nd th 3 the further forms ;:— us we obtain Ghang-la : why, for what ; Su-yi (vulgarly so-ky) whose ; Ghang- ne : from what, from which; Su-la: to whom ; GQhd-ne : whence : Gha-la : whither ; also a special form in Ghd re’: where is ? 88 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. a. In this connection, the difference between the use of yin and yo’ may be illustrated yin being the more copuala- tive auxiliary, such a phrase as Sw yin could not be taken to mean “who is there,” which requires the use of the verb yo’-pa meaning “to be present,” “to exist,” as wellas “to be” accordingly Su yin means who is he” and Su yo means ‘who is there ;”’ again, Su re’pa yinna : ¢¢ whoever is it.” B. The interrogative affix to the concluding verb is seldom necessary where the interrogative pronoun is used. When 43’ concludes the sentence, the affix is often added, which is likewise the case with yin, the interrogative forms of which are yo pe and yimpe. Sometimes a plural form of the pronoun su occurs, name- ly su-su, e.g. Khye-pa di su-su yimpa: Who are those traders ? ii. When the pronoun ghdng has to be made use of in an adjectival sense, it stands in the sentence immediately after the noun and next before the verb, e.g. mgd-chd lam ghdng do ghi-dw’ “which way are we going?” A variation of the position occurs in a few special instan- ces, as in the phrases: Kho ghang yul-pa leb-bhd : From what district does he come ? Khyi ghang ts’e-la do: At what time do you go? Gha-ts’s is used adjectivally in such sentences as: Tashi-lhiimpo-ne Lhdsd la td ring tung gha-ts’o yo’dha what distance is it (how far is it) from Tashilbiimpo to Lhasd? 5—RELATIVE PRONOUNS. i. The most common method of expressing relative clauses, namely by means of continuative and gerundial particles, has been already fully explained and illustrated (ante Chap. VI, B. 5, 7.) ii. There remains to be indicated the rare form of con- struction where our European method is resorted to. More- RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 89 over, in many instances relative pronouns are used in combi- nation with the gerundial construction. Lastly, there is a correlative use of the pronouns, of frequent ened, Ghang, su, nam, are the relatives and correlatives in use. 11. The ordinary relative construction may be chosen in such a sentence as the following : — Tou : . Bring me the coolie who arrived just now.” Such a sentence may be expressed in two ways—First with the relative pronoun, thus : — Ngd-la khurpa ghang tanda “Which coolie arriving just rang lep-ne tv shok : = now bring to me.” Or else, we might hear th . e sentence tur . this style :— rned somewhat in Tanda rang lep-pai khurpa The coolie arrivi : dhe ngd-la ti shok : riving just now bring to me. Another sentence more precisely analogous in Tibetan dress to our relative construction would be this :— “The dog, which shewed its teeth savagely, was fast . tent pole.” astened to the Here we might have the rendering : — Khyi ghang rang-ghi so ngdarma ten-pa dhe ghur-ber la dam-ne yo’ I't will be noted, however, that the relative clause is inserted between the antecedent to which it refers and the article of such antecedent, the verb of the clause occurring as a participle. Thus, save for this introduction of the relative pronoun ghang, the sentence resembles the participial forms already explained. Another example will suffice :— The guns which belonged to Méndd ghang mi-ts'o la yo’ pa the men must be given up : di tang go-du’, iv. Those sentences known as correlative rather than relative always require the introduction of the relative pro- noun, 12 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. They will be best recognised by means of several examples: — Potsoi dmd ghang yimpa . dhe She who was the boy’s mother khd-sdng lep jhung : arrived yesterday. Di ghang-ghi t'obpa ngd-la khur Whoever gets it bring it me. shok : Khkys' ghang dok-ghi-dw’ dhe hd- Do you understand what you go ghi-duw’ : are reading ? (Lit: What you read, that do you under- stand ?) Su-la pe-chhd di yi’ pa di-la dok If anybody who has this book yong nd, ye-shei mangpo lop- will read it, he will learn yong : much wisdom. Khyi'rang-la t'song-wa ghang yo’ Shew me what you have to sell. (Lit : What to sell there is to you, that shew to me.) pa dhe ngd-la ten-nang : Su yang ngd dhang nyampo Whoever will come with me, yong-wa dhe-la ngul-p’ok ydik- shall be given good wages. po ter yong : (Lit : Whoever will come with me, to that one good wages will be given.) Khyi'rang-la to-chhd ghdng yang Whatever victuals you wanted g6-yi’-pa, dhe ger-ne yo’ : have been provided. (Lit: To you whatever victuals were wanting, that has been provided.) Khorang ghang jhye’-kyi-yi’-na Never mind what he is doing. yang khye'mi du’ : Jhye’-kyi-yd’ is the Narrative Present, ky: being used for ghi after the elided d of jhye’.) B. Not only is the demonstrative pronoun inserted after the clause, but the article is also introduced Biter the rel- ative pronoun in order to give a general or correlative sense to the latter. Thus ghang di ¢ the what’ signifies ¢ what- ever,” and su di ‘the who” or “ the whom ” is equivalent to < whoever ” or ¢ whomever.” This method is one of the commonest devices to express sentences of this kind in the RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 91 colloquial; and we should recommend to the beginner recourse to it in the first place. Taking such a sentence as: “ I shall wear whatever I like,” we shall transmute it into the form : “To my thinking the what is, shall wear;?” i. e., Ngdr §hempa-la ghang di ghon yong. v. Lastly must be mentioned the usage where “ as” occurs as a relative pronoun. We meet with the relative construc- tion in a sentence of this kind: “Do as I tell you.” In order to render this into Tibetan we must turn it « As I tell you, so do,” or more literally, ¢ According to what I tell, you according to that do!” Nydrang ghd nangtar Ser, khyo’- rang dhe nangtar jhyi’ chik. In Rudok and the West, gha- suk and dhe-zuk take the place of ghd nangtar, &ec. In Central Tibet such a sentence is best rendered Nydrang ghdnde Ser, khyo’rang dhende jhyi’ chik : * Like what I say, you like that do!” In fact this latter phrasing is the more generally heard. The expression ‘So far as you can” is turned : until what until that ...... e. g., Khyi’-rang ghd-t'uk do chol, dhe t'ul song. Kho-la ghdnde qo yo’, dhende Give him what he needs. ter chik : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER VIII. ADVERBS. — eto i. The Adverb can be formed from the Adjective by put- ting the latter in the Terminative Case. Very few Tibetans, however, make any distinction, in this class of Adverbs, between the Adverb and the Adjective. Thus we hear gyo’po in use for both “quick” and “quickly; ” gorpo for “slow” and “slowly; sim-po for ¢ quiet” and ‘ quietly.” Pro- perly the adverbial forms of these words should be gyo’por or gyo’bar, gor-por, and sim-por. When the Adverb is formed from a Participle or from an Adjective of participial mould, the particle ze is employed, as in tdl-bu-chen-ne ‘‘lingeringly.” ii. Custom has singled out certain words for adverbial use which are never employed as adjectives but which decidedly are not Primitive Adverbs. Thus ghd-/ii’ ¢ gently,” « goftly >> (Hind : dhiste) ; tik-nyomla “ evenly > ¢ equally ;” ma-parpar-la : seldom.” iii. ApveErBs FroM Nouns :—These are such as: kang- tang “on foot,” khd-ne orally > (lit : from mouth), ’¢-ma- la “at the end,” dong-la “in front,” first,” gydp-la < at- the back,” ts’da-dhdk < hastily” ¢ hurriedly,” ddm-la close by, near” (lit: at the bank), dhiii-gyiin (pr. ti-gyiin) al- ways,” Shug-la ‘behind > (from $hug-gu ‘the tail ’). iv. ApverBs oF Time.—Nearly all these are Primitive ; but in some instances the original form has been augmented ADVERBS. 93 in the Colloquial by the addition of various syllables. The chief temporal adverbs are :— Tinda (or tanta) : Tanda teltu : Tanda lamsang : Tel t'el-la : Ting-sang : Ngé-mad : Chhyimo (often P’imo) : Nygen-chhe’ : Ting-la : Dhé wona-le : Le-ne : Je-la : } Angki jukma : Takpa réshi : Kap-kap-su : Re-shik : Chik-char-la : Hlengyai-la : ; Dha-chi : Dha-rung : Dha-p’en : Dhi-t'uk : } Yang-kyar : Yang-kyar-gang : now, immediately. at once. without delay. at present (Hind : dj-kal). early. late. previously, formerly. later, hereafter. since then. afterwards. last. always. sometimes. a little while. all together, simultaneously. recently, lately. still, yet. as yet, until now. again, often. To these may be added a numerous list expressing specific times, but of which it will be sufficient to mention :— Kha-sang : Yesterday. Dhé-ring : To-day. Dhd-rang : This morning. Ts'en-la: To-night. Ning : Day-after-to-mor- Shé-la : Three days hence. Gui : Four days hence. Chhus : Five days hence. Dha-lo : This year. Sang-nyin : To-morrow. [row. Khdsang-lo : Last year. Sangpd’ : Next year. N. B—The commoner term for “this morning ” is dhd-rang §ho-ge. 94 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. v. ADVERBS OF Prace.—Some of these are Primitive roots :— Di-pa : Dei : Dhe-pa : Dher : Ts’ ur-la : Diru : Paru: thither. P’G-gi-la : yonder. Ha-gi-la: just there, over there. Yd-gi-la: up there. Md-gi-la: down there. Kyen-la: upwards. Shi’la : downwards. Gong-la: above. Me'-la : below Di yen-la : at upper part. Di men-la : at lower part. Yar: up. Mar : down. } here. } there. } hither. Gyap-la : behind. Diin-la : before. Kiin-la : everywhere. Pdar-tsam : beyond. Sham-la : lower down, fur- ther on. Gyang-la : afar off. Nang-na : ~~ within. Bug-la : inside. Kyiltu : in the middle. Pi-la: outside. Tung-tw : } near, close by. T'sa-ne : Rik-te : close together. Hd-chhok : opposite. Di-ne : hence. Dhe-ne : thence. Lok-ne : back again. Par ts'ur la: to and fro. T’al-le : past, on. vi. ADveErBs oF MaNNER.—In addition to those directly derived from adjectives as shewn above, the following should be noted :— Multar : accordingly. Chikpu : alone. Dhenda : like that; a’piece. Mangpo: much, mostly. Dinda : thus, so. Rang-8hin : of its own accord. Chhd-lam : rather. Kyang-pa : only. Ye-ne: quite. Chhyi-lok : backwards. Gyiin-la : continually. Ts’angma dom- altogether. ne : Rim&hin : by turns. Shenma : otherwise, ano- ther way. Ha-chang : too much, very. Tii-gyiin ddpu : as usual, Nenten : certainly, really. Mu-ne : exactly, precisely. Holte : loose. ADVERBS. 95 vii. NgeATIVE ApvERBS.—All negative particles used with verbs are naturally adverbs, and these have been already explained and illustrated (VI, B. 8, ii.) Two or three others require notice: fema (with verb) and Ja-re me not at all,” re-ken “by no means; also nyong which, when pre- ceded by ma and annexed to a verb in the past tense, has the force of “never,”—but see VI, B. 10. However, with the present and future tenses nyong seems to be inadmis- sable, the expression tsé-wa-ne followed by the verb in the negative being then resorted to :— I shall never go again : Nga yang-kyar tsd-wa-ne do qyu me’. He never comes to see me Tanda kho ngda-la td-gyu-la tsd- ~ now: wa-ne lep-kyi-min. [ shall never be afraid again : Nyda yang-kyar tsd-wa-ne she'ms yong. Ndmdng with a negative future or imperative also occurs :— The body of the abbott will Khempo-t p’ungpo ndmdng tor never decay : mi yong. When you come to a chhorten, COhhérten-la lep-ne, yiii-ngoi-la never turn to the right : nd-méng ma kyok. viii. A number of characteristic adverbs in common use are formed, as in the case of many adjectives, by re-duplica- ted syllables. Sometimes in the second syllable a vowel 1s varied. Thus: ¢s’er-ts’er » often, time after time, zol-zo0l anyhow, Sop-8op : topsy-turvy, r@p-rip awry ; also dimly,” tap-tip upside down, chhdg-gha chhog-ghé all in a heap, tap-tap-te or tap-tap-por : suddenly, sam sum : quietly, hrik- brik : all around, shrang-shrang : alone. ix. Certain adverbial expressions qualify with a sense of indefiniteness proposed actions or past sensations. These introduce in reality indefinite relative pronouns. We refer to phrases of this sort: “so far as I can,” “go faras I know.” One mode of expression is to couple ghang or jhi 96 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. to the requisite verb, and to introduce this clause immediate- ly preceding the subject of the sentence :— I will do the utmost (as much Jas nye’ ngdrang-ghi jhyd-gyu as possible) : yin. So far as I know he set out Ngdrang ghang she-pa khorang yesterday : khdsang jhyon sony. But see under Relative Pronouns (iv, y.) Again fsam-§hik-la = as soon as ’’ :— As soon as the sun sets, blow Nyima di gdi tsam-8hik-la né up the fire: pu dhang. POSTPOSITIONS. CHAPTER IX. POSTPOSITIONS. —nl A ——— 1. These, the Oriental substitutes for the prepositions of European languages, may in Tibetan as in other tongues be divided into two main classes, namely, Primitive Postpositions and Derivative Postpositions. The Primitives, which are all monosyllabic, comprise the case signs and a few others. The Derivatives, which are mostly words of two or three syllables, have been formed—often by an ingenious and interesting process of evolution—from adverbs, adjectives, substan- tives, and verbs. Many of the colloquial Derivatives are of modern development and are never to be seen in books. 2. The Primitive Postpositions are the following : Kyi, ghi “of ;”” La “to;” Na “in ;” Nai or ne, “from ;”’ Lag or le “from among; Kyi, ghi “by * “by the agency of ; ” Dhang ¢ with ; > Dhu, ru, tu, or su, < into,” unto,” ¢ for,” The usage of these will require some illustration. La, in the colloquial, is not only the sign of the accusa- tive (contrary to the literary usage it is seldom the sign of the dative) but also possesses the locative significations of “at” and “on”? :— Look at him : Kho-la toi shik ! I shall start at dawn: Ngdréung kydreng-la gyu yong. Put wood on the fire: Me-la shing chuk ! The bird ispale on the breast: ~~ Jhyd di dhang-la kydkoré yo’. Hide-boats float safely on the Ko-d Yai-ru Tsangpo-1 khd-t ok- surface of the Yeru River : la ling-ghyi ding du.’ 13 en TRE L 3 a TIBETAN GRAMMAR, Sometimes la carries the meaning of “in” :— Throw the small fish into the Chhu-la nyd chhung gyop ! water : I have headache (pain in the Nga-la go-la Suk gyak. head) : In assessments of price, &c., la corresponds with our preposition ¢ for” :— The book has been sold for 15 Pe-chhd di genden tangka chongd Galden tangkas: la, ts’ong ts’ar du’. Occasionally “from” and ¢ by” require this postposi- tion :— The finial fell from the chhor- 1 ok dv chhorten-la bap song. ten : Hold the bird firmly by the Dap-shok-la jhyd di ling-ghys wings : dzin ! La used in the sense of “to” is confined almost to its use before pronouns and after verbs of giving, saying, and sending. Na is rarely heard in Tibet Proper as a locative postposi- tion; and when it correctly enters into the composition of certain compound postpositions, la is often substituted. Nar or NE has usually the pure ablative sense of ¢ from ;” but likewise is found in the sense of “out of” and “through ”’ :— He sprang out of the lotos : Kho pema-natv jhung. From Darjiling to Pemiongchi: Dorjeling-ne Pema-yangtse t'uk- pa-la. It is eight years’ ago: Di-ne lo gye’ jhung. This postposition is discriminated from Lar or Lg, which besides the special meaning ¢ than” (vide IV, 9, a,) conveys the sense of from out’ ¢ from among’ :— Choose me two sheep from the Khyu-le luk nyi ngdrang-la pe flock : Jhye! COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS. 99 Out of nine only three were Gu-le sum mempa (or ma-tok) saved : BAY dei min du’. Saved from the Queer-heads Go-lok-le £ar-ne yo’. (robbers) : Duane is not ordinarily classed as a case sign, though it carries the meaning “with” in its most distinctive sense. It is attached in particular to certain verbs (such as dhalwa “to be separated * and delwa to meet ’) and is also join- ed with certain compound postpositions. As a conjunction it has a distinctive use, (Vide: Ch, X, 1.) 38. Derwative or Compound Postpositions:—The first quality to be noted respecting these Postpositions is that the majority of them govern the Genitive case. Accordingly each of these must be linked to the noun, adjective, or par- ticiple, which it affects, by means of another postposition, to wit the Genitive case-sign. Much nicety is requisite in selecting the proper postposition to express the intended relationship with exactness and idiom. We have endea- voured in the lists which follow to give the precise shade of meaning attached to each in order to avoid, where possible, double significations; and, with this view we have sometimes omitted allowable renderings. assigning the sense more commonly understood in colloquial usage. Many of the postpositions are identical with, or have been derived from, the corresponding adverbs. Some of this class have been compounded by adding the simple case-sign to different adverbs. In ancient Tibetan such affixes would be those expressing the Terminative case; in modern times the Dative or Locative case-sign has replaced the Terminative ; though some of the forms familiar to readers of classical Tibetan are still heard in modern conversation. 100 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING GENITIVE CASE. Kha-wok : beneath. Ting-la : after (time). Wok-la : below, under. Tondd-la : for (also ton-la). Khi-t'ok-la: on the top of. Nang-§hin : like, as. Tang-la : above. Nang-tar: according to, Kong-na : in the midst of. Gdng-la : on, upon. Sep-la : between (7. e. Dhindhu: in order to. Hrak-la : } Nang-la : in, within. Diindhw : before, in the pre- Pla: outside of. sence of. T’e kyd-la : towards. Ts ap-la : instead of. two, &c.) Len-la : in return for, for. Chhirtu : for, in behalf of. Kap-su : on the occasion of. Te nyd : opposite to. Tsa-ne : at, near. Tsu-rol-na : on this side of. Tsar : to, towards. T’uk-pa : up to, unto. Do-ru: beside, adjoining. Gdam-la : close to, up to. ~~ Wangdhu-shor- T’d-nyepo: near. na : concerning, as to. Mempe : except. Gyap-la : at the back of. Par-la : away from. [of. Dong-la: in front of. Parkha : on the other side Der-la : on the side of, (or Jei-la : after (place). ‘“ face of.”) POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING ACCUSATIVE CASE. Shuk-la: behind, Pen-la: until. Yen-la : over. Ngo-la : towards. T°6 : above. Ten-ne: with respect to, as to. Kor : about, regarding. ~~ T%siin : within, by the time of Menchhe' : underneath, not so (in the sense of far as. “not later than.”) Penchhe’ : beyond, further Sur-ne: along, beside. than. Chhok-la : in the direction of. POSTPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ABLATIVE IN DHANG. Nyampo : with, together with. Dd-te: like, equal to. Cha-su : containing, belong- Mi dd-wa : unlike, different ing to. from. COMPOUND POSTPOSITIONS. 101 N. B—In the colloquial da or de (really ARN) has quite taken the place of the literary word TN in the sense of “as,” “like,” &c., especially in compounds. 4. Use or Compounp Postrositions.—These can govern either substantives or adjectives or verbs. When governing the latter, the postposition is placed at the end of the sen- tence, converting it into a gerundial clause. Subjoined are a sufficient series of examples illustrating both methods of employment :— You will find rain-shelter beneath ) Khyo'rang-ght dhdk bhong di-i that rock-boulder: y khd-wok chhar-kyib nye-yong. The path passes between these? Yd-gi-la chhorten dhe-v sep-la lamkha di tal do. Let us go up to the monastery : Gompd-yi gam-la do-gyu nang. Don’t go beyond the tree tommy Mda-gi-la shing di p'enchhe’ ma do. chhortens up there: there: The road runs along the river-) bank : § Come after two days: Lam dv chhu-dam Sur-ne gyu. Nyinmo nyi-kyi ting-la shok ! This money is for your help: { "I A Khybrang-ghi ro-rim kyi len-la du’. I shall arrive in three days : Nyin sum ts'iin lep yong, There is nothing but snow "] Yd-gi-la ghang-ghi mempe chang there : min du’. N ,, . 7 * on . ’ All except two have been found : ( yt kd-v mempe kin di nye’ ma { Jhung. ( Khyo-kyi mempe su yang to- | td ma jhye’ kyi-du’. Di ghur-ky! p'i-la gyuk tanda t'eltw ! The shops are opposite the Cho- ; Sok-khang di Cho-khang-ghi t'e- No one except you grumbles: Go outside the tent at once: khang : nyd nds song (*“ are placed”). Khoi ts'ap-la ngdrang khyi dhang nydmpo do-gyu-yin. I will go with you instead of him: 102 TIBETAN GRAMMAR, It is different from that: Di-ka dhe dhang mi-da-wa du’ Ngdrang dhang nyampo Gyang- -tse : Come with me to Gyang se tse t'uk-pa shok ! Gi-khung-gi tang-l Hang it up above the window : PI ge tang-la yar dak On the occasion of the lama com- ing, prepare pastry : } Lama di yong-wdi kap-su, khur- wa tdl-dhik jhyi chik. Instead of walking quickly home, 4 orang myurdhu khyim-la dul-wd-yr ts'ap-la, kydng- you saunter along : put-wa-yr tsap-la, kyang kyong jhye’. Kho song-watv ting-la, sor-dub di nye’-chhok min du’. After he had gone, the ring was not to be found : Down there is placed a chhorten Md-gi-la chhorten dung-rii Mdng containing many bones: } The box containing books : Dz dom pechhd dhang chd-su di Regarding that, I will send il Sang-nyin dhe kor khyirang-la to you to-morrow : lon p’ul yong. This is not for him: Di-ka kho-i ton-la ma re’. . . Di-ka nyirang-ghi kyermen-kyi This is for your wife : { i oy chhirtu yi’. Two rupees to buy the calf (for) Gyd-tam nyi, pe-to Ayo-wdi the purpose of buying): ) dhondd-la. I will give this for that: Nyda di wi dhe-yilen-la p’ul yong. {* -war dhondhu tdl-dhik jhyi chik. {ok ghang kor-la she’ kyin Prepare to set out: What is he talking about: dw’ or Ser-kyin-du’ or ser-kyin- yo’ pe ? They went in that direction (to- ) Kho-ts’0 dhe chhok-la song ov dhe wards that) : Le It came out of yonder cave : ngo-la song. Ha-gv p’uk p’i-ne jhung. He sold it for three sho: f Klorang §ho sum la ts’ ong-ne Take aim among them : Dhe-yi ftang-na bem-la gyaik. dhang chd-su chik §hak jhung. CONJUNCTIONS. CHAPTER X. CONJUNCTIONS. — EES LT — 1. Those Conjunctions, which in English connect short clauses to each other and likewise link together longer sen- tences, are generally expressed in Tibetan by means of the gerundial and continuative particles elsewhere fully ex- plained. (See: Chap. VI, B. 6, 3, ii, and Chap. XIII, 3.) However, our common copulative and” finds its coun- terpart in the Tibetan dhanrg, which literally signifies * with.” Thus, such an enumeration as ‘“ horses and cows and sheep and goats” would in the Tibetan idiom be rendered: ¢¢ with horses, with cows, with sheep, goats ” Ti-ts’o dhang, bhamo ts’o dhang, luk-ts’o dhang, rdma-ts’o ; or, possibly, Td-ts’0 dhang bhdmo-ts’o, luk-ts’o dhang rdma-ts’o : “cows with horses, goats with sheep.” Although dhang is usually translated and,” the point to keep clear in the mind is that it is really a postposition meaning “with,” and therefore in such an example as the foregoing dhang belongs, not to bhdmo-ts'o as if “and cows,” but to #d-ts’o which precedes it. 2. In enumerations in the colloquial we mostly find this copulative omitted for the sake of terseness; and the sen- tence above would be spoken ti-ts’o bhdmo-ts’o luk-ts’o rd-md- ts’o, or, more briefly still, t¢ bhi-mo luk rdma-ts’o or even td bhd luk ri-ts’o, the one plural affix ts’ sufficing for the whole of the items :— Buy radishes, turnips and Ldpuk Ayungma yerma nyo shik! pepper : 104. TIBETAN GRAMMAR. I have lost father and mother: Ngdrang dp’d dmd ghi-la song. (Lit: “I have gone inloss.”) Give me three mules and two Ngdrang-la dhew sum dhang jhomo : jhomo nyt nang ro dze ! I want to eat and drink: Ngd-la 8a tung gor. I want both to eat and to Nyd-la Sa-gyu dhang t'ung-gyu drink : gor. When dhang is used in the copulative sense the accent is thrown on the preceding word and dhang spoken shortly and quickly. Conversationally, where the conjunction needs to be ex- pressed, the form dhdrung is frequently substituted for dhang. Dhdrung, signifying more yet,” is used precisely as aur is employed in Hindustani, both as “and” and as “ more’ :— The man aud his wife came : Mi-po dv dhirung rang-ghs chhung-ro lep jhung. Sometimes when both ”—¢¢ and > would be used by us, the Tibetan places the two nouns consecutively with nyi-ka « the two” appended, e.g. ‘The charges for both the men and the yaks” would be mi yik-ts’o nyi-kai p’ok. 3. The contrasting or disjunctive conjunction can be rendered by means of continuative particles. However two or three set terms are to be met with. a. In short sentences where the sense of “although” is admissible the conjunction rung is employed. In such a sentence as: I am permitted to eat mutton but not beef,” we may turn it; “the weight” §dng-chi = * the light-heavy ;”’ “the thickness” bom-f’d = ¢ the thick-thin ; > “ the height ” Pin-mén = “the high-low ;”” “one’s means” chhyuk-iill = 5 ’ ““ the rich-poor;”” and so forth. Other similar substantives are derived from adjectives by the aid of the affix khye which itself signifies “ difference.” FORMATIVES. 109 These are akin to those just enumerated ; e. g., thickness” = bom-khye ; a habit or custom (lit : “the accustomedness ) = ghom-khye. 2. VErBAL Supstantives.—These may be formed by the addition of li or tang to the verbal root; e.g., dok-tang the reading, §a-tang the eating, ung-tang the drinking, do-lz the going, the departure, ldng-lz (literally “the being”) the state, the condition, &ec., &c. 1] e . The doer of an action is expressed by the syllable khen added on to the verbal root, and such forms are of very frequent occurrence. Thus: s颒-khen a slaughterer, murderer ; dok-khen a reader, jhyd-khen the maker, bdk-khen a carrier, coolie. Sometimes po is added instead of hen, but to the Infinitive, not the root. This syllable may be also appended to noun substantives, when it serves to indicate one who has specially and habitually to do with the thing to which it is attached. So we have shing-khen the carpenter, lam-khen the guide, ts'em-khen a tailor, td-khen groom, horse keeper, &ec., &ec. 4. ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM SUBSTANTIVES AND VERBS. a. In the colloquial of Tibet the derivation of adjectives from nouns is accomplished invariably by the use of the affix chen. The process is very regular and of extensive application, even the formation of ordinary possessives falling mostly under the same rule. Thus we have: wang power, wangchen powerful ; rik fame, rdkchen famous; rin the price, rinchen expensive, valuable; sem the mind, semchen intelligent ; nydk-nyik filth, Aydk-nyik-chen filthy ; lung wind, lungchen windy. In the case of possessives we find the genitive of the noun, where it expresses the quality or substance of another thing, rendered in the same way: e.g., dorjé serchen a dorje of gold, or golden dorje; khyim shingchen a wooden house, or 110 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. house of wood; but at times we might hear ser dorje and shing-khyim used for brevity with the same meaning. The construction with chen is, however, frequently carried still further, being used for all manner of possession and even with the personal pronouns. So we occasionally hear dukpo ldmdchen instead of ldmd-yi dukpo for ¢ the lama’s coat,” and Shambu Punts’o-chen instead of P’unts’o-i Shambu, for ““ PPunts’o’s cap.” The pronouns “my,” “his,” &c., become ngdchen, khochen, &c., as indicated in the table of pronouns. B. The affixes chhok and nyen are appended to verbal roots for the production of derivative adjectives, and indicate fitness, capability, &c. Thus from the verb gdl-wa “to pass over,” “cross,” we obtain gdl-chhok “passable” “fordable’: Dongtse-v wokné Nyany Chhu From below Dongtse the Nyang gal-chhok yo’ : River is fordable. Ydrka-la Ghang-lé-chhen La di In summer the Kanglachhen Jam-jdain qal-chhok jhung : Pass becomes smooth and passable. Di chhu di £ung-nyen yimpe ? 1s this water drinkable ? West of Shigitse nyen is more commonly heard than chhok ; whilst further east chhok is always used and nyen quite disappears. Thus in Western Tibet we have Sa-nyen, khyer-nyen, gdl-nyen, &c.; whilst in the province of Ui are said Sa-chhok eatable, khur-chhok portable, do-chhok capable of traverse, &c., Rung also occurs in the latter district as an affix of similar import : e. g., tsong-rung saleable. The negative formative in these cases is usually me’ sub- joined in place of chhok, &c. Or else mi is placed first and chhok attached as before. TT ung me’, mv ung-chhok. y. The negative substitute for chen 1s also me’. Thus we hear shekchen strong, shekme’ weak (lit: possessed of strength,” ¢ without strength ;’’ shek or she’ being a sub- stantive = ¢‘ strength ’) ; dho’chen tasty, dho’me’ tasteless. Also go-me’ headless, and such like. VERBAL EXPLETIVES. 111 8. The use with chen has already been shewn to be exten- sive. It is further available in more complex formations. Thus we find it combined with a double noun in such expres- sions as jhyd-yib-chen “ having the shape of a bird >’ or “ bird- J) shaped; khyd’-rang-ghi yib-chen having your shape ”’ = “like you.” Indeed yib itself is almost a formative and occurs frequent- ly with chen :— That mountain is shaped like Pd-gi ri dhe lang-ghi go yib the head of a bull : chen du’. Yonder peak is like a Noi-jin P’d-gi ri-tse di Noi-jin gyalpo yib king : chen yo’. He resembles his sister : Khorang singmoi yib-chen yi. It is like mine: Di ngdi yib-chen du’; or Di ngdchen yib-chen yong. 5. VERBAL Exprerives.—The primary signification of the verb is capable of modification by means of certain syllables introduced or annexed. (i) Bhag is added to the verbal root and indicates inclination to do anything, disposition to feel anything. When used, the causative verb Jhe’pa is generally employed in conjunction with it as an auxiliary to the primary verb; a few examples will at once shew the occasions where bhag can be resorted to :— I am inclined to go on to an- Nygdrang-ghi dhdang-sa $hem-ma other stage (of journey): t'uk do-bhag jhe’. Khorang gyel-bhag jhe’. If you don’t tread carefully, I Khyi tenpo mi kyo’ -par, khyd’'rang He is going to fall : shall be disposed to beat you : la dung-bhay jhe’-gyu-yin. He is inclined to accompany Kho khyi'rang dhang nyampo you : gyu-bhag jhe’. (11) Dhd-te attached to the root of any verb acts as an augmentative, signifying that the action is carried on to an excess or at least in a degree greater than usual : e. g. ;— He prays unremittingly : Kho kurim jhe’-dhd-te. 112 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. The snow is falling abundantly : Khau-a dv bhdp-dhd-te. Women chatter incessantly : Bhwme’ lapchha gydk-dhd-te. Thank-you much, I have eaten 1 ukje-chhe, wngdirang to 3§d- abundantly : dha-te. Please drink plentifully : T’ung-dhd-te jhyi ro chy! A kindred augmentative exists in the particle nz, which is used however in a different way. For the sake of emphasis the verbal root is repeated and ne is inserted be- tween the repeated syllables. We may render the particle by such English expletives as “indeed,” assuredly,” &ec. :— They indeed said so: Dhenda Ser ni Ser-ne yo’. You shall assuredly go : Khyorang do ni do-gyu-yin. It seems to be more frequently employed when some con- trasting statement is about to be put forward :— Though he indeed went, he did Khorang song ni song rung, de- no good : mo chyo’ ma jhung or Kho- rang song ni song-ne, ma le-mo chyo-ne yo’. (iv) Leisure or time to do anything is very conveniently expressed by annexing the syllable long ¢ vacant time” to the verbal root. Thus we obtain such a series as the follow- ing which might be indefinitely extended :— Sd-long : time to eat. Pep-long : time to come Sim-long : leisure to sleep. Kyo-sang-la jhe’-long : time to take re- Dok-long : time to read. creation. De’-long : time to stay. Ngédrang-la lap gyak-long me’: 1 have no time to chatter. Gompa dhe-la tok §hik-long re’: Is there time to look through that monastery ? (v) Opportunity in the sense of a chance or occasion offer- ing may be expressed by adding dp as an affix to the FORMATIVES. 1138 verbal root; but though a favourite mode of speech with individuals, it is hardly a universal locution :— Kyapgin dhang jdl-kha nye’'t'dp Is there any chance of gaining yo'pe : audience of (or ‘access to”) the Protector ? Pep-t'ap na, ngd-la lon nang If there is an opportunity of ro chi : going, please give me notice (send me word). TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XII. IDIOMATIC PHRASES. — EEA LT (1) A gerundial clause is grammatically speaking only an expanded adverb and an adverb is a contracted gerundial clause. Thus in Tibetan we often find the adverb expanded into a gerundial clause :— He was beating the horse very Khorang tak-po jhye’-ndi td-po severely : dung-gir-duk. Pull the boat slowly to the Kdle jhye'-ndi dam-tu ko-d di shore : dong tang. The literal translation of these sentences is :— He, doing it severe, the horse was beating. Doing it gently, unto the shore the boat pull. (2) This mode of turning the phrase occurs also in such expressions as “in such a manner,” “in the best way he could,” “according to the king’s command ”’ :— The girl climbed up the ridge Pumo-i ghang ts'uk kyi jhye’-nii in the best way she could : gang teng la dzek song. Note :—GHANG TS'UK KYI is a phrase in itself, meaning “by what one is able” = “ to the best of one’s ability.” The Regent is supposed to issue De-si di Gyd-wa Rimpo-chhe-i orders according to the Dalai gong-par nang-$hin jhye’ nr Lama’s wishes. kagyur nang-gyu nyam-pa- yin. (8) Our very common expression “IT think that’ is ren- dered Ngdi sampa la tomy thought ;”’ also “I know that > IDIOMATIC PHRASES. 115 can be phrased Ngdi shei-pa la or when uttered in a warning manner Ngdi khyen la :— I think that it will snow to- Nydi sampa la tering khau-a di day : bab-gyu-yin. I think he will not stay here: Ngdrang-ghi sampa-la kho dir do’gyu ma re’ (also Kho-wos sampa la, &e.) I know you will not come back : Nygdrang-ghi khyen-la khyirang lok yong-gyu-ma re’, I know that sbe went home : Nygdi shéi-pa la mo-yi khyim la song. The hermit considered his place Gomchhen-kyi sampa-la ngai sé- was lonely : chha dv empa du’. Similar also is the construction in phrases beginning “I like ” which are turned ngd-i Shempa la or ngd-i dho-wa la (““to my taste’); and again this is akin to the method of rendering “I want” by go: and kho-wa. (See Ch. VI, B. 13). (4) When it is desired to express the arrival of the time at which anything should happen or has happened, &c., the verb bdbpa (“to descend’) is invariably made use of. Thus, for the phrase “It is time,” a Tibetan will say “It has come down to the time of.” So, for “It is time to start,” he would turn the phrase ‘ It has come down to the time of going: Gyu-pdi dhui-la bdb-jhung ; or, using another form of the participle : Gyu-khen-kyi gang-la bib song :— (Khyirang-la ld p'inpdi nyin la When the day for paying you bdb-we, kap-kyen df ghen-dhm arrives, 1 will A shuk yong (HRN AGREES this: -~ | SAFER) . PI : « is 13 ~» However, ren du’ is a vulgarism for « It is time to. (5) The verb “to be” and the pronoun in the dative is . » he mode of expressing ‘to have,” “to possess,” as already 116 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. indicated ; but the construction with the dative occurs in other phrases also, such as :— Dhé-ta ngdrang-la dhelwa re’: 1 am busy now. (‘There is business to me now.”’) Dhéring ngarang-la ne’ yo’ : I am unwell to-day. Pumo dhe-la shek-chhung yo’ : That girl is weak. Dhe-la shek-kyi chhokpa yd’pe : Is that strong enough ? (6) The Verbum loguendi takes the usual Oriental circum- locution. When a message is sent or any direction given what is to be said, the speaker projects himself into the posi- tion of his deputy, using in the direction the exact person in pronouns and verbs which he supposes will be spoken when his direction is carried out. Thus, “Tell him not to come” is in Tibetan phrased as “ Tell him © do not come ;’ > and “ He told me he had seen you” would be turned ¢ He told me ‘I have seen him.” These two sentences in Tibetan collo- quial would be :—Kho-la ma yong lap and Khorang ngdrang dhe-la tong jhung lap song. (N. B.—Probably in the last sentence dhe-la which we have used for ‘ him ”—really “ that one ’—would be expressed as kusho-la “the Saheb 7). Sometimes, however, our European phrasing of such sentences is resorted to, and it is not unknown even in literary works where, usually, the expression of the werbum loquendi is still more formal. (7) Not dissimilar is the usage where the solution of a doubtful state of things is requested, and where we should employ an interrogative “if” or “whether.” Thus, “See if he is coming” becomes * See, is he coming?” Again “Try whether the bridge is firm” becomes “Try, is the bridge firm ?”’ In Tibetan, therefore :—Tov shik ! khorang yong-ghi-yo’pe ? and Ts'6’ tot shik ! §ampa tempo é yi’? The last sentence might be varied into Sampar ts’é’ tov shik ! tempo ¢ yo’ : ““ Make trial of the bridge—is it firm 7” Again :(— Khorang lep jhung-ngd shin-gi **I do mot know if he has ma re’ : come.” HONORIFICS. 117 However, both the positive and negative alternatives are often expressed in injunctions of this kind : e. g. :— Make strict enquiry whether Ld di khau-di chur-wa-i kar-tdk the pass is blocked with jhyi-chik !—Y@’pa re’ me’ pa snow, or not : re’ ? (8) It will not be out of place once again to direct atten- tion to the predilection of the Modern Colloquial for expand- ed forms, especially in the case of verbs. This usage is adopted in certain instances solely for perspicuity, as :— mik td-wa ; instead of td-wa : to see. to §1-wa ; » ,, 8d-wa: to eat. yi-ge dok-pa ; ’ ,, dok-pa: to read. nyi’ Ayal-wa; ,, myal-wa : to sleep. But in many cases, apparently from mere love of expan- sion :(— dho-wa ta-wa ; for dho-wa : to taste. sam-lo tang-wa ; for sem-pa: to think. gyuk-shd 15'pa; for gyuk-pa: to run, ge’mo ghe’pa : for gi’pa: to laugh. kii-ne khurwa : } for ku-wa: to steal. ku-ma kii-pa ; Similar expansions are noticeable in such phrases as kd-le khékpo re’ : it is difficult ” now used for the old form kd yi’ ; dhdrang sho-ge * this morning” used for dhdrang ; tak- puk “a cavern” for p’ukpa; chhu-t’o “lips” for chhu ; &c. Again be’pa : “to try, endeavour ”’ is never heard now, - the present expression being tsin-dii (ISFRATN) jhye’pa ; No kyong-wa to help ”” is supplanted by ro-rdm jhye’pa ; whilst numerous other examples might be instanced. HONORIFICS. (1) The custom of employing special words in lieu of the ordinary expressions when addressing persons of superior position remains to be briefly noticed. This usage, which in the Corean language has reached the extreme of elabora- tion, is likewise in the Tibetan tongue governed by systematic Ne See CRE ih > 3 ry Te A ile A a bb i BB a as 118 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. principles. Not only are the names of things changed on these occasions but also the verbs and pronouns are affected, the adjectives alone retaining their common forms. Moreover, there are two departments of this respectful speech ; first, the series of terms to be used in actually speaking to, or of, a person of rank or sanctity ; secondly, a more limited set of words employed when talking of one self, or to others of ordi- nary position, wn the presence of superiors. The first class are Honorifics, the second Elegancies. (2) For practical purposes, a few of the more frequent terms will be sufficient to acquire. Especially should be noted the honorific forms of the pronouns; khye’ and nyi'rang being used for khyd’rang, and nge’ as an Hlegancy should be employed instead of mngdrang. However, in addressing su- periors, the pronouns should not be used abruptly, but each sentence or question should commence with the word Fkusho, answering to our “Sir,” or in the case of a great lama the better style 1s Jetsiin or Jetsiin Rimpochhe. When mention- ing parts of the great man’s body each term denoting these should have the syllable ku prefixed. The principle verbs to remember are the verbs p’ep-pa meaning both ‘to come ”’ and “to go” and p’ulwa to express your ‘ giving” to the superior while nang-wa denotes his ““ giving” to you. Also, instead of the common jhye’pa, we have dze’pa as the honorific and gy?’'pa as the elegant synonym used in polite talk between equals. Other honorific verbs are the following, most of which in the original spelling have either J or § as the mitial :— Shu-wa : to address. she’-pa to speak (of superior himself speaking). §hen-pa : to desire. SUNG-WA ghe’-pa: to laugh. §i-wa : to see (superior seeing). shum-pa : to weep. sen-pa : to hear (ditto). Shu-pa: to sit, stay. §im-pa : to sleep (ditto). §heng-pa : to get up, rise, de-war sheg-pa : to die (ditto). §he’-pa : to wish. sol-wa §hei-pa : to eat. §hei-pa : to receive, accept. sol-wa : to dress, put on, HONORIFICS. 119 So, also, with the honorific names of things which chiefly, we find, commence with the letter s :— Shak : day. u: the head. Shap : foot. shang : the nose. ghal : mouth, face. chhyak : hand. Ship : flour. pu: hair. Shok : the side. tuk : heart, mind. sang-ma : food. sol-jha : tea. One often hears ku prefixed in the sense of “your,” e. g., ku kham : “your health,” ku shdp : ‘your foot.” Before utensils and eatables sol is put: sol-shd ‘ meat,” sol-bing “ tea-pot.” As an elegancy, $hei is prefixed to eatables and Shal to articles used in connection with the face ; thus :(— Shei-pdk ‘“ bread,” §hei-kyem drink.” §hal-sak “a pipe,” 8hdl-gyen * moustache.” When reference is made to personal articles belonging to the Grand Lama of Lhésa, or to his characteristics, the word ser, “ golden,” is prefixed. So his “tea” is styled ser-jhd, his “nose” ser-shang, &c. When he dies, moreover, they say Shing-la p’ep song “he has gone to the field ;”” while of a great man they would say de-war sheg song, and of any ordinary person shi song ‘ he has died.” TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CHAPTER XIII. COMPOSITION. ——eleT— 1. Orper oF Worps.—The usual order of words in a simple sentence is Subject, Object, Predicate. Of the words attached to the chief substantive of the Subject, we note that any Possessive or Genitive is placed before the chief substantive, any ordinary adjectives immediately follow the substantive, any numeral follows the adjectives, any demonstrative pro- nouns, indefinite pronouns, or article follow the adjective or the numeral if there be one. The same order is observed in the component parts of the Object in any sentence. All extensions of the Predicate precede the main verb. In any sentence whatever, including gerundial and participial clauses, the verb stands last. In any sentence where the verb takes an impersonal form, the dative connected therewith stands at the head of the sentence, e.g. Woma-la serru gyak jhung : The milk has become bad ;”’ or “To the milk badness has befallen.” The interrogative pronoun is placed immediately before the verb : e. g., Luk-ghi kang pa chhak-pai shempa di ghdna yo’pe : “ Where is the butcher who broke the sheep’s leg 7” Any expansion of the substantive, of the nature of a rela- tive clause, may either precede or follow the substantive upon which it is dependent. In the former case the participle of the clause is placed in the genitive ; in the latter construction the participle remains in the case of the substantive which it follows, the article being placed after the clause. (See Ch. V1, 5, y, N. B.) CONTINUATIVE PARTICLES. 121 2. (GoverNMENT BY VERBs.—Many of the verbs in use of transitive sense take as Object an uninflected Accusative. There are, nevertheless, a certain number which require the Object to be inflected by the addition of the affix la. The case thus formed may be sometimes the Dative, sometimes the Accusative, and at times even the Locative which rarely in Central Tibetan assumes the ordinary Locative affix na. Other verbs, moreover, necessitate the assumption by the Object of the Ablative Case in dhang. a. Verbs of giving, shewing, speaking, teaching, take the Dative in la. B. The following verbs, with others, must be followed by the Locative in la :—8hdk-pa to put, place, té-wa to behold, look at, duk-pa to strike against, dhe’pa to dread, gar-wa to fasten. y. The Verbs requiring dhang are de-wa to meddle with, khd-# dl-wa to separate from, jalwa to wait upon, pay one’s respects to, ’¢’-pa to meet, with a few others. 3. ContiNuATIVE PArticLEs.—In Tibetan composition the finite verb occurs much less frequently than in European idiom. The main clause or sentence is almost undiscoverable in any long statement or paragraph. The whole style of composition is a chain of gerundial and participial clauses, depending only technically upon one another. The chain of clauses or sentences proceeds continuously, each successive clause in form, though not in sense, a sequence from the other, until at length a final verb—by no means the most important or main one in meaning—brings a break in the connexion. In written compositions this style 1s more observable than in lengthy spoken sentences, but the better-educated resort to the participial or gerundial construction even in speaking. All the affixes forming the different gerunds ennmerated in Chapter VI. Section B, might be denominated with equal accuracy Continuative Particles, for nearly any one from 16 roe. gers 122 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. among those may be added to the concluding verb of each successive clause to carry on the chain of connexion. Of course where the construction, in signification as well as in external form, is really gerundial, the choice of particle annexed should be differentiated in accordance with the dis- tinction of kinds of gerunds already set forth, and the sense may in fact be affected by such choice. In addition to the affixes already given, te and dhang may be mentioned as Continuative Particles; te being added to the root of any verb and dhang being appended to the infinitive ; or, in other words, dhang requires to be connected with the verb to which taste or random selection may have attached it by the inser- tion of pa or wa after the root of such verb. Example of use of Continuative Particles :— ‘““ The soldiers arrived at the city and remained standing outside the gates. They were clad in yellow coats and felt boots, and wore on their heads Lit’ang-shaped hats. By means of those hats we knew they did not belong to the Lhasid Government; and were afraid.” For translation, we arrange the wording thus :— “The soldiers having arrived at the city, remained standing outside the gates. Being clad in yellow coats and felt boots, and wearing on their heads Lit’ang-shaped hats, because of those hats, we knew they did not belong to the Lhasa Government ; and were afraid.” Mikmi-ts’o dhong-khyer-la leb-nav gyalgo-i p’i-la lang-nai de’pa dhang chhupa serpo bhe-pik-la ghyin-la dhe-yi go-la Lat’ ang-yibchen Shdmo ghyin-par §hdmo dhe-yi chhyir-dhu kho-ts’o De-wa Jong-la ma ti-wa ngo-shei-te ngdchdik tser Jhung. In the foregoing there is no finite verb, nor any but gerundial construction, observable until the concluding verb ts’er hung. However, in the English sense of the term, that is not correct; de’pa and ngo-shei-te are in reality both of CORRESPONDENCE. 123 them finite verbs which, after the Tibetan style, are conjoined, each to the sentence following, by dhdng and te, respectively, which are thus Continuative Particles, pure and simple. So seldom are these Particles needed in the Colloquial, that nothing further on the subject can be added here. 4. LerreErs AND CORRESPONDENCE. In modern letter-writing, especially in commercial and domestic correspondence, the Colloquial development of the language is clothed in the old literary style only so far as the spelling of the words is con- cerned. Thus if the rules for pronouncing the written forms are applied in inverse order to the details of grammar and vocabulary as given in this work, there can be no difficulty in epistolary correspondence, provided the characters, printed and cursive, are first mastered. The rules as to spelling and pronunciation are explained elsewhere, and if the printed characters, as there displayed, should be used by the traveller or student in letter-writing, any Tibetan will at least be able to read his effusions. To acquire the cursive alphabet may be taken as a work of supererogation for tae majority of those interested in this tongue. However, in Csoma Korosi’s Grammar the various types of handwriting are fully illustrated, and doubtless by practice fair proficiency in Tibetan calligraphy would be easily attainable. As specimens of the modern epistolary style, we transcribe two letters received by the author, one from a Tibetan lama of moderate acquirements, the other from a man well-known as a Tibetan scholar. Naturally, we give these in the ordinary printed character, appending likewise a literal translation of each epistle. LETTER FROM TIBETAN LAMA— RAH RA AG FHA NGAN] XH RAT GIR FA FET RRA 124 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ra 5 aa RA 3) AFR AA ER Fy eR AIA TERI FANE 3g 55 z= ARR RRA ME FERS aay TRIGININIINY FIRST RITENRRYS Raja) F 3 ASF NN AR RYE BA NBN RRA MR Eton emt menor omelets NYRR EI (ASFNELETART FIRHITLIN — rs NN. PB v = v = wv vo ~~, . . A RRR ARA SIRES NA NR AYR GI ARTA] qa’ PRAANR IRN FT IG AYN EG WIR AYA JHNGY AN GNA ER 9G FIFI ~~ - a ~~ WE YET ITI NS GN NAN NL ISN YA | (Translation.) To his Graciousness the Padre Saheb Lama— Faithful and earnest wishes are presented from your humble one that you are well in bodily health. Very, very great thanks not only for preparing your former letter but also for sending a letter just now. Here am I a lama well also by the favour of God. Some eight or nine months ago, a man here had a book by the Reverend Milaraspa ; but the book was sold by that man for fifteen rupees (gyd-tang). 1 am looking out for Milaraspa’s book for you once more. If it is obtained particulars shall be immediately transmitted to you. At present a man here will sell a copy of “The Skein of Golden Precepts and Biography of the Lotos Teacher” (i. e. The Padma Tang-yig), asking thirteen rupees. So if you re- CORRESPONDENCE. 125 CN quire it, please to send at once in a Money Order (NEWT: ) thirteen rupees. When I have bought the book from him, it shall be sent as quickly as possible. Many salaams are offered from your humble Urgyan Gya-ts’o. [It should be noted that the Tibetan of the foregoing letter is not in places strictly accurate. Thus, several times the Ablative is used instead of the Instrumental Case. The use of {= with - QS should be remarked in both letters. ‘ Salaam,” too, is not a Tibetan greeting. ] LETTER FROM A TIBETAN SCHOLAR— REAR TRY Regard SRR Zz” Ey ARR SRSA] BAY FIR NNER ANF RATER qaras SRT) AReE FRET A Ragga SNYNINAFRRIIIREFR|] ARIK RGERNEr SRR RR Ag SEE AER Gas RR A SE Rar ANE] NENG] NITES aN RAN Aa I HEAR GRRE AF AFTRA Fc RENAN EEN ARDS ENTRY I Tass ARHENRNGATN | SWAY Mesa ais Faas AEN GZ FR AT De SERA RF SE SER FERAL TRA | SEWER BS Rea 126 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. RATE SR SHES AR RA SS Ian Bare Rar RY GINE| GARNI FAS Fm SjeREN] (Translation.) Down before the lotos-feet of the most precious lama the Reverend Gerham Sendbergas, the friend of virtue who lays hold on the 30,000 stainless observances of the chivalrous! Respects be offered !| Having to-day received your letter written from Katak, on the 8th day of the twelfth month— many thanks. Here am I continuing still well in health and profoundly anxious to render any services with the very utmost attention.! Please excuse what is omitted? (z. e., what may be omitted in my proffers of service) ! You yourself ® and your wife, the partner of your seal, the goddess mem being well in bodily health and prosperously settled, it is indeed well. With regard to your work—the book of the Sikkim language, I have had occasion to examine it thorough- ly. Your letter which you wrote on the 3rd instant has been To-morrow a reply to it sent here from Sir [Notes on THE ABoveE.—l “With the very utmost attention ;” AEE exw > NEA RF AR 8 Literally NANA = “Vacant or intermediate space,” and hence “What is left out,” and so is now always inserted after the polite expressions and proffers of service which form the preface to every Tibetan letter. It implies a request that what has been left unsaid through want of space or inadvertence should please ( § ) be taken as meant to be written down. No 8 HN signifies really “body,” and is used as an honorific form for > “yourself,” i.e., “ Your own body.” The ordinary word for “body” is AN lus. CORRESPONDENCE. 127 shall be despatched.! As to the kind expressions of thought which, unwavering, come yet again from you to me, pray accept my repeated thanks. Sincere? wishes and compliments for happiness on the good date (i. e., Christ- mas)? are offered. ~ ! Mark here the future passive tense YRS ARN ‘“ Shall have NA -— been sent,” or ‘ Shall be sent.” JA is honorific for EC as Xa is for - weg “3VTy 2 FS N means, of course, ‘“ white,” and hence, in this phrase, may be rendered ‘‘ pure’ or ‘ sincere.” 8 The writer of the letter, though not a Christian, very appropriately and thoughtfully renders ‘Christmas Day,” in this decorous expression. | PART II. CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES AND TECHNICAL LISTS. NOTES ON LETTERS. CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES AND TECHNICAL LISTS. —_— NOTES ON CERTAIN LETTERS. Wherever 6H occurs in these pages it will be best under- stood (when spoken by Englishmen) if it is sounded merely as K. Thus ghang ‘ what,” may be conveniently pronounced kang ; ghd-pa, where,” as kd-pa. So also pH, though correct, may be always sounded T, and indeed Dp is by natives frequently sounded as 1. Thus dhin-la “for” (Hind : ke- waste) is heard often as tonla, dhdté “now” as tdtd, (or vulgarly tandd) ghdnde ¢ how,” may (though improperly) sound kdnte ; and the common word dhang should be pro- nounced tang. So, too, JH, though correct, had best be spoken as is cH. Thus jhd ‘ tea,” may be sounded chd ; but where the y sound follows jh as in jhyd “a bird,” either jhyd or chyd > often sounds chye’pa, and even vulgarly as chyi-pa. We advise may be used. The common verb jhye’pa “to do,’ chye’pa here ; imperative : chy? “do!” Again; we print in these pages BH in words spelt in Tibetan orthography with initial B; but we advise the invariable use of p for BH. Thus Pé’pa “a Tibetan,” for the more correct Bhi’pa. We have printed LH throughout, but as the letter is some- what guttural, the h should be sounded before the I; so, we say for Lhdsd, always Hldsi, and lham “a boot,” is Hlam 132 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. As to U1, E1, and A1, by which we have generally represent- ed the elided final s in us, es, and as, these are not diphthon- gal sounds; but though the ¢ is sounded separately, it must follow the u, e, and a so quickly and lightly as to be hardly audible as a distinct letter. In the case of Ar, the sound of our diphthong a? in ‘ rain,” stain,” is approached, and for convenience we recommend that sound, or that of the open e. So yi’pai “is!” may be pronounced yd’pe. Final 0 in short affixes sounds like w, as in ydkpo “good,” tékpo “hard,” &c. The vowel ein some words seems vulgarly to change to the vowel i. Thus ngé she-ghi-dw’ 1 know,” is heard as ngd shin-ghi-dw’ and jhye’-kin-dw’ “is doing,” is vulgarly pro- nounced chyin-kin-dw’. In Colloquial Tibetan the final letter of a syllable is gener- ally very indistinctly heard ; and certain letters when occurring as finals are completely dropped. Final 6 takes the sound of k, and in many parts of Tibet is hardly audible, at least in most words. Thus t'ukje thank-you,” sounds t’u-je ; ydkpo generally yd#’po. Final B is changed to p, as leb-jhung « arrived,” which is pronounced lep-chung ; but this final p is frequently unsounded, as in #'u(p)§ong shall be able,” pd (k)-1¢(p) “broad.” Where p is the last letter it is always inaudible, save for an abrupt almost imperceptible breathing. Accordingly, we have invariably omitted final d, at the same time indicating the elision by an apostrophe ; e. g., jhye’pa “to do,” for jhyed-pa. Final 1, though often heard in the province of Ui, is frequently dropped, especially in Tsang; e. g., Pdl-po, “a Nipalese man,” sounds Pd’po, or Pe’bo. After u it modifies that vowel into i, as yi’ for yul “country.” In Jaeschke’s and Csoma’s works, no distinction as to sound is made between the letters ch and chy, chh and chhy, and ) and jy. As in listening to natives we have clearly detected the y sound, we have generally in these pages indicated the y-letter words where they occur. Thus jha (or cha) is “tea,” NOTES ON LETTERS. 133 but jhya (or chya) is “a bird ;” chhe = “great” and “very,” and chhye = “ flour,” chhung-wa = small,” but chhyung-wa, « to take out >’ “remove ;”’ je’ pa = to forget,” but jye’-pa = ““ to open.” * [Where any difficulty is experienced in sounding the cere- brals ¢, ¥, d, dh,—and one is very apt to sound the ordinary dentals instead—it will be best to use tr, tr, dr, and dhr, in their place. According to Mr. Rockhill this latter pronun- ciation is the Lhésé method. Sarat Chandra Das and others, who have actually visited Lhdsé, contradict this assertion ; but, although we are decidedly opposed to Mr. Rockhill’s phonetic system in general, we are bound to admit that we have fre- quently heard the tr and dr used. Thus drdé may be said for 4 “the voice, wi-tro for wd’-to “light” mdndro for ma do don’t go,” t’'rdk for Pak “blood,” &c., nevertheless, the other is deemed the proper pronunciation by the educated. ] TIBETAN GRAMMAR. BRIEF ORDERS. Come here : Come near : Come back : Come inside (or Come into the house) : Come to me : Come along with me : Don’t come to-day: come to- Morrow : Don’t come so close : Go outside : Go away (Be off) ! Go in front : Go behind : Don’t go so quickly : Don’t go far: Get up : Keep straight (Hind: Sidha karo) : Make haste : Run quickly : Listen here (Attend)! Give your mind to it: Take care : Don’t trouble me (Hind : Dik mat karo) : Catch hold of it: Stop! Stop : Remain here : Stay waiting here (Hind : Hazir raho) : Sit down: Ts’ur shok or Diru shok ! Ts’ anas shok ! Lokne shok ! Nang la shok ! Nye tsar shok ! Ngédrang nyampo shok ! Dhe-ring ma yong: sang-nyin shok ! Dinda ts’dnai ma yong ! Chhyi-lok song ! Ha-la gyuk ! Ngen-la gyu (often Hen-la gyu) ! Shuk-la gyw ! Dinda gyo-po mdndro ! P’ér-tsam mdndro ! Kyére lang chik! or Yar long! Khaddu chy: or Khaddu gyu ! Ts a-dhak jhyi shik ! Gya-po gyuk ! Tsur-la nyon 8hik ! Nang-dhdk jhyi §h3° (jhyi sounds chyr) ! Rikpa jhyi; or Rik dim ! Nyd-la nydp chii ma p'i ! Di-la zzm ; also Di-la she’ ! Ghuk-ta : ghuk-ta! Di-pa di’ shik! or Dipa gu! Di-pa gu'ne di’! Nd-la di’ or (politely, with gesture): Shu ! BRIEF ORDERS. 135 Is it there or not—See : It is time to go now : Send him here : Hold in your dog, please : Throw it away : Blow up the fire: Set it down; put it up; lift it up: Fetch the horse here : Bring me more water: Bring the Sahib some tea : Take away these things : See where he goes : Look over there—up there— down there : Give me that, please : That’s enough (Hind : Bas) / Take off your cap : Don’t forget (Hind: Mat bhulo) ! Keep in the middle: Go inside the blankets : Go and see: Never mind what I said (Hind : Kuchh parwa né) : It is time to wake up : Put it back again : Throw this thing away : Don’t make such a noise : Go and see who it is : Make ready to start : Never mind the rest (what remains) : Don’t let it fall : Now you may go: Dhépa "tndu mindu—To shok ! Tanda do-ren du’ ! Diru kho tong ! Rang-ghi khyi-la zzm roch (for ro chik) ! Yuk 8hok ! Mé pu! Sa-la 8ho’ ; yar 8ho’ ; yb-te t'o ! Ts’ ur ta-po dv t'v! Chhw dhdrung khur shok ! Kusho-la so’jhd khur shok ! Chha-khd di-ts’o khur song ! Gha-la do-war kho-la to shok ! Pa-gi-la—ya- gi-la—mid-gi-la to dhang ! Nyga-la dhe-ga nang roch (for ro chk) ! Shang yong ; or yong nge ! Shambhu tu ! Mdnjé! (last syllable abrupt)! Kiltu §hog ! or kiltu chyi! Midsen bug-la gyu ! Td-la song ! Ke-chha di ténla ma to’ ! Nyi’ se’par ren du’! Di lokne §ho’ ! Chha-kha di yuk tong ! Wur dhenda ma gyap ! Su y6’pe ta-la song! Do-gyu t'l-dik chyu! Lhak-liiv la mz to’ ! Dri sak ma chuk ! Khyo' tanda do chok ! 136 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Go and call him : Tell him to come here : Gyu-ne kho-la ke tang sho’! Diru shok kho-la lap ! EVERY DAY QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS. Can you speak Hindustani : Can you speak English : ‘What is this called : Speak in the Tibetan language: What is the name of that hill : I don’t know : Do you know that man : Do you understand : He has a bad character : Who is this boy : Do you know : It is not mine: That is mine : Is that for me: Has he come yet: Who knows : Did you know : What are you doing: I know : Nothing; Sir: Why are you doing that: Why are you asking : I don’t understand ; did not understand : Don't forget : I will not forget : Khys' Hindi ké lap tup-ki- yo par ? Khys® Piling-ght ké lap chok- pai ? Di-la ghang Ser-yong ? Ps’-kyt ké-la lap. Hi-gi ri-yt ming-la ghang Ser ? Ngé shen-ghi me’ (often : shin-ghs md re’) ? Khys® ma di ngo-she yo’ pay ? Khyiérang ko jhung-nga ? Kho-la shi-gyii’ Rgempa re’. Pugu dv su re’ ? Khys' shin-ghi-re’ta ? (shin is really she’). Di nga-chen ma re’. P’agi ngdi yin. Nygdz chhyirtu dhe-ga re’ ? Tandd khorang lep jhung-nga ? Su she? She’ jhung-nga ? Khyi' ghang jhe'-kyi-yo’ (or chyi-ki-yo’) ? Shin-ghi-re’. Kusho ; ghang mindw’. Khys' dhenda ghang-la jhe’ -kyi- yi’ ? Khys' ghang-la di-t'ok di-ki- yo’? Nga ké-chhd shin-ghi me’ ; ke- chha she ma jhung ? Ma jé-pa jhyi (sounds chyr). Ngarang jé mi yong. GENERAL SENTENCES. Don’t chatter so: Don’t let him forget : Everything has been arranged : How can we go? How was that done ? I can’t say: Look! do you see him ? Look there! what is that? When did you see him ? Where have you been ? What do you say ? When did he bring it ? Where did you put it ? What do you want ? It will not be wanted : Can you begin at once : I shall begin the work now : Call him to come here im- mediately : Oh, never mind! (Hind: Kuchch parwa nahin) : Tell him not to come : Why did you not come yester- day ? I was ill yesterday : Where do you live ? I live in this place: 18 Dhende ke-chhd ma gyap. Kho je ma chuk ? Ghang-ga gho-chd’ jhung. Ghande do t'up yong ? Le-ka di ghande jhumg song- nga ? Nydrang she’ ma chok. Mik to-dhang ! kho-la t'ong- nga ? Déyi ti dhang! Dhe-ga ghang yo’ ? Khyo’-kyi kho-la ghd-dhii t’ong Jhung ? Khyo’'rang gha-ru song ? Khyi' ghang lap-ki-du’ ? Di-ka kho-i gha-dhi khur lep song ? Di-ka k&-pa shak-pa-yin ? Khyo’ la ghd go yo’. Ghang mi go. Khys® tel-t'el-la go-dzuk chok- ka’. Tanda le-ka di go-dzuk yong. Kho-la ke tong dhang, diru tanda t'eltu shok ! Ke-chha te dhinla mito’ ! Kho-la lap, ma yong. Dang-la ghang-la yong-pa-me’ (or lep-ma-song) ! Nga dang-la nd jhung. Khys' nai-ts'ang kd-pa y&' or Khyo' ki-pa de-ght yo’ ? Nye nai-ts’ang di chhyok-la yo’ (“my dwelling is in this place 7’). 138 Run for my letters to the Post Office : What is your name ? From what country do you come ? I am from Gal-rong : You must really come with me: Be it as you command, Sir: Ask him if he got the letter: He says he received it : How much shall I give you ? Give me what you think right: You know best, Sir: May leave-of-absence be grant- ed me: Never mind what you have to do, come : Have you a substitute (Hind : badly) ? Please, give me an advance : I dismiss you: Sahib, do not be angry with me: TIBETAN GRAMMAR. } Yik-khyim-la nge ji-ge chhyirtu gyuksha l5’tang ! Khys-kyi ming-la ghang Ser ? Khyirang yu(l) ghd-ne yin ? Ngé Ghal-rong-le yin (or lep Jhung). Khyd’ nenten nge nyampo yong go yo’. Kusho ; kd p’ep rang nang! Kho-la lap dhang ; yige dhe t'op Jhung-nga. Kho lap-ki-dw’ ; dhe-la top Jhung., Khyi’-la ter-wa gha ts’ ? Nang ro mang ku-khyen Fku- sho ; khyen khyen. Kusho ; khyen khyen! Ngé-la gong-pa mang ro ch’ (stress on ro). Khysrang ghang jhye’ gyu na yang khye’ mi du’, shok ! Khyirang-la ts’dp yi’pe ? Nga-la ngiil ngd-chhyi nang ro nang. Khyirang-la gong-p’ok nang chi’. Kusho; mnga-la gong-pa - ore (FRNA ) ma t’sum ; (in- stead of ngd-la often #’em- bhu-la ¢ with the little hum- ble one ”). ASKING THE WAY. ASKING THE WAY. Whose house is that ? What is the name of this vil- lage ? Tt is a large town: it is called Tse-t’ang : Is there a lodging here or not ? On the further side of the town, { is there any road out or not: See those men building the new wall ; the road begins there : What is yonder peak named ? Shew me the way to Gyamda: Kindly shew me the way: Where to 7—To Tashilhiimpo : Where is the bridge ? Where are you going to? Is it an easy path ? It is only a foot-track : The path is steep and narrow : Is it a broad path ? It is a steep ascent to the Pass: Is the road to Samye level ? How far is it from here to Sha- In? Where is the road ? Don’t go across that bridge : How far is it to the next halt- ing stage ? Nang dhe so-kyi re’ ? Dong-pa di. ming-la ghang Yo’ - pe? Di dong-khyer ckhe di ; Tse-tang ger yin. Di-pa nai-tsSang §0'pa re’ me’- pa re’ ? P’d-lok-la dong-khyer-ne lam chi 76° pa re’ me’ pa re’? Mi-t'so tsik-pa sarpa gyap-lhan dhe-la t8’ tang! Lam di p’d- gu go-dzuk. P’d-gi ri-tse-la ming ghang ser- ki-yo’ ? Gyamdd-i lam di wngd-la ten roch ? Lam di ten roch! Gha-la ?— Tdshi-lhiimpo la. Sampa di ghd re’ ? Khyd ghd-ru do-ghi-yjimpe ? Lam-kha di jdm-jam y&'dha ? Kang-lam chi man-na mi yong. Lamkhd di ghyen-ghyen tokpo dw’. Dhe lamkhd yang-po chi yo'-pe ? Lé di-yi ghyen-la Sarpo dw’. Samye kyu lam nyom-nyom € du’. Di-ne Shd-lu-la td-ring-t ung ghd ts’o ? Lam kd-pa 40° ? Hi-gi Sam-pai t'e’ lam-la man- dro! Nye-wai sim-dang-sd la £'d gha ts’o ? 140 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Is it a long way to Chhabdo? Chhdmdo la t'a ring-po é yo’ ? Which is the way ? Lam ghang-ght yin ? Do you see that tree on the Tsang-poi . ho hen-ngoi-la, other side of the river ? | Fis shing dhe mik tong- nga ? Say that again ; I don’t under- Lok-ne lap nang; ngd hd-gho stand : me Yong. Ah! I understand : O-ho ! ngd hd gho jhung. How can I find a way across ) Ngdrang-ghi chhui t'¢ lam di the river ? } t'op t'w’ yong-nga ? Go the second path on the left Yén-ngoi-la angki nyi-pai lam- side : kha gyu. Come along! keep in the mid- Nyampo shok ! kiltu shok : dle : Go straight on; afterwards slant-off to the left (lit Dong-p 0 dong-po song: lar-ne yon. “ slanting, go”) : ngd’-la kyok-ne gyuk. Keep straight : Khadu chyi (i. e., jhyi’). The path turns to the right : Lam di ydi-ngd’-la do ghi-du’. The right-hand path; left- Ydi-lak iam; yin-lak lam ; gyok- hand path ; a short cut: lan. THE WEATHER. The night is very dark : It is becoming almost dark : It is now dark : It is now light : Rain is going to fall : The snow will not cease to-day : The snow is melting quickly : Ts’en di la miin-nak song. Ndam-shrs® yol song. Tanda miinpa nék-po re’. Tanda tang karpo re’. Chhérpa bap-yong. Te-ring khau-a di chhé mi yong. Khau-a di gyokpo (sounds gyo’- 0) Shu ghi-du’. Chhdrpa di tanda chhé song. Nga mukpa (often mu’pa) lang- wa t'ong-ghi-yo’. Khd-ts'up chi’ t a-nyesa-la yong- ghi-du’, The rain has ceased now : I see the mist rising : A snow-storm is at hand : THE WEATHER. 141 Thick mists are on the moun- tain side: Tt will be fine to-day : Can you run quickly ? Don’t go there; there is mo shelter there : Pitch the tent at once: the rain will pour down this instant: Climb the rock: over there is rain-shelter—beneath that boulder : The Pass is filled with snow : The mists will pass away when the rain ceases : The sun is very hot : The sun will cause pain in your head : It snows : it is freezing : Down there, there is rock- shelter ; under that it will be warm : The river is frozen hard : When does the moon rise : There is no moon to-night: The wind is rising; it is very cold* : The air will be mild at Shi- kha : Shake the cloak well : Mw’ pa mongpo ri-lok-la dw’. Dhering nam tang yong. Khyo’rang gyokpo gyukshd 16’- tup yong-nga (gyuk-sha 15’pa “to run.”) Dhe-pa mandro ; dhe-pa chhdir- yap me’ (or chhdr-kyip me’.) Ghur di ma-t’okts’e (or oftener tanda teltu) §ho’ tang : tanda lamsang chhdrpa gyap yong. Tak-la zok; hd-kiru chhar-yap dw’ —p’d-bong-ghi wokla (or p'ong-ghz, &c.). La di khau-a-yi kdk du’. Chhdrpa chhé-ne, mw'pa di yel do yong. Nyi-ma hd-chang ts’dpo dw’. Nyi-ma-yi khyd’ ky: go nas yong. Khau-a bap-ki-dw’ : khydk-ghi- dw’. Makvru dhak-kyip yo ; dhe-yi- wd’la dhimmo yong. Chhu di takpo khydk jhung. Déwa gha-tur (or ka-tii) shar yong ? Piro di dawa mind’. Lhdkpa lang-ghi-re’ ; nam hd- chang dhangmo dw’. Shi-kha la ngd-ra dv jampo rak yong. Chhar-bhi du sop-sop jhyi nang, * In such phrases as “it is cold,” “it is warm,” “itis fine,” Tibetans always say : “the sky is cold, warm, fine, &c. Thus nam lémpa dw’ : “it is wet ;” but only, of course, when speaking of the weather or atmosphere. 142 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. When the mists are thick in a Lung-pe nang-na mi-pa di mong valley, snow is falling heavi- po yong-pai, nye-tsdne ri-la ly on the mountains close khau-a dv tw’ pa bap-kyi-re’. by : It is not freezing now : Tanda khydk-(or khyd-) ghi- min-du’. AT AN INN, &c. Where can we find lodgings ? Ndi-ts'ang ghd-pd nye’ chok-ka ? In this house: inside the Nang di-la: gom-bai bug-la. monastery : Knock at the door, please : Go-la tdk-ték jhyi’ nang). Where is the landlord ? Nédi-bo ghd-pé yi’-pas ? I am the landlady ; salutation, Ngdrang ndi-mo dyin : Ku-sho, Sir! chhd-pe'. I want lodgings this night, Ngdrang-la ndi-ts’ang p’iro di please : go nang ro nang. Kusho : chhé-pe’ zhu nang. Sir; you are welcome : T have two rooms above; or Nygdrang-la ya-t’ok nang-mik nyt du’ ; md-t'ok td-ts’o dv do- tu nang yong. horses will remain under- neath. I am tired : where is the bed ? Ngdrang-la dup-kyo yin: nyd ri € yo. Sir; climb up the ladder and Kusho! ken-zd-la dzek-te tong see : nang ! Here are bed and bedding : Di-lé sim-t'v mdl-ting jhung. What bedding have you ? Khyi-rang-la mal-ting ghang yim-pe’. Fox-skins and a coverlet; they Wd-pdk, khebma chi: de-ddk are dry : lem dw’. Thanks madam hostess, I do Kd-dhim, naimo jhomo, dak-la not require them : kho-jhe me’. I have a hair-blanket myself : ~~ Ngdrang-la rang-ght chhalu dw’. All right, Sir: (Sir, it is): La, la yo (or La, ld-so). Saheb, do you desire food ? I want a little washing-water; Ngdrang-la t'@-khu goi-pa y&’ dharung chang ma re’. Kusho, nyi-la solwa $he’-pa-re’ ? nothing else : MOUNTAINEERING. 143 Have you a wash-bowl; also water-for-washing-the-feet ? I have no bowl : it is not neces- sary : We Tibetans do not bathe : Have you a large pot ? Bring me warm water I beg : Are there bugs in this room ? Give me a light : What is the charge ? Farewell | Many thanks : Khyi-rang-la t'i-shong chi é yo’? shdb-sil yang é yo’ ? Nydrang-la shong chi me'-pa : goi-gyu mén. Pi-p’o-pa ngd-zhé mi t'i-pa. Khyi-rang-la kK og-chhen chi € yo’. Chhu ts'em-mo chi khyer shok ro nang ! Dé-shik-ts'o nang-mik di-la yo’ dha. Nyd-la Jng-gu chi nang 70 nang ! Ndi-ghong ghd ts’ ? O-nd ghd-le pep! T'uk-je chhe ! MOUNTAINEERING. The weather is misty : As the rain is falling, the mist will soon pass away : Yes! it will indeed pass away ; but not until evening : It is time to strike camp : Fold up the tent: Put some snow in the pan : Melt snow and make tea : Place the saddle on the pony : Be careful to draw the strap tight enough: Now we will start: Be off! Tread firmly : To which side does the path turn off ? Keep to the right ; to the left : Don’t loiter on the way : Nam di la na-bin 1b jhung. Chhdrpa bhap-ne, nd-biin gyo-po Pp u-gyu-yin. Yd-ya ! p'uni p'u-gyu-yin ; yin- kydng nub-mo t'uk mang. Ghur lok tang-wdi ren dw’ : Ghur di rl tong Dhok-le nang-la khau-d §hok. Khau-aé t'im-ne, soljha shom chi’. Td-la gd te’ Shak. Ts’6’ tor dhang ko-t'a dik tangpo chhing! Dhd-ta shek-gyu-yin. Ha-la gyuk! tempo jhon chi’ (or tempo kyo’ chi.) Chhyok ghang-la lamkhd sék- dhe-la gyu-wa ? Ydi-chhyok-la song ! yin-la. Lam-la gor ma gor! 144 TIBETAN Go straight ahead : Go obliquely by degrees: GRAMMAR. T’e-kang-la gyu! Rim-rim sek-dhe-la song ! After we have crossed the Sampa la gdl-nai, gang-khéd bridge, we shall ascend the ridge : On the other side the moun- tain-face is very steep and a mass of loose flints : There is no bridge ; how shall we cross Blowing air into this yak-skin, we shall have a hide-raft. zek-qyu-yin. [Pir ri-ngor dv gyen- Sarpo chhe shalma-chen dw’. } Sembe chi’ me’ ne, ghd-tsul-na gal-wa ? Yék-ko-a di nang-la lung p’u- nat, ngd-la ko-dhu shi’ yong. The current is too violent; it Chhu-gyin di hdchang dhakpo is not safe and is fearful : Let us go together : We must climb up this torrent- bed : Being very steep, climb firmly : I am feeling dizzy : Shall we descend the khud- slope : There is a ravine below : Walk gently along that ledge: Be careful: don’t fall : Don’t go further that way : That chasm is unfathomable : The path is very precipitous : The snow-bridges over ravines are all melted now : We call snow-bridges “ God’s bridges : ”’ The hill-side has become whol- ly melted ice : i... gyukndi, mi tempo yong-nai, dhe-po dw’. Nygéchak hlengyar-la do-gyu-yin. Dhok-3ar dv la shi'ne dzek-pa got. Sar dha-te, tempo shi’ne dzok. Ngé-la khyom-khyom jhung. Kad-sar shd’dhu bhap-gyu-yim- pe. Men-la dhokpo §hik yong. Lam-t'ang dhe la dzemte dul song ! Riko dim : zdk ma chulk! Ngo dhe la dhérung mdn do! Gyé-ser-ka di ting me lon dw’. Lamkha Sar-Sar chhe sho’dhu bhap. Ghdng-§am dhokpot tengkha du Lib tanda Shu jhung. Ghang-8am la ming dindra Ser : konchhoa-ghi am Ser. Ri-ngoi di ts’angma khydk-§hu- koko jhung. MOUNTAINEERING. 145 As the fog is thick, it is diffi- cult to see the edge of the precipice : Do we continue on this side of the river : (Lit: “ Do we go, continuing,” &c.). No: the path climbs from be-) low, and beyond that rock yonder there is another bridge of split-cane : Where is the bridge (split-cane bridge) : You will see it just now : I am not equal to this task: Shall we pass under that over- hanging rock: A little more: and we shall see straight on: The other side, remains of snow still continue : What is the name of that valley down there below : (Mé-gi-la lung-pa-i ming la ghang Ser) ! Pitch the camp here: How far is the Pass from here : How far is Pal-dhe from here : 19 Mis-pa mongpo y&'-pe, kad-§ur di mik td-la kd-le khdkpo re’. Tsang-poi ts'urkha t 0-ne do-wa ? Mindw : lamkhé di shi'ne dzek- nat, p'd-gi dhak di-yi p’réisém ts’@r-sam $hem-ma yo’. Ts dr-5am dv ghd-re ? Dha-dhe dhdrung di-la tong yong ; or Dhdtd rang di-la t’ ong-gyu-yin. Ngdrang di le-ké-i ya mi chok. Dhe dhak-kib-kytwok-la gal-gyu- yimpa ! Dhdrung ts’abik-nar t'e-kang-la t'ong yong. P'ar-kha khau-@&i t'o lic jhung. Ha-gi lung-pa shi-la di-yi ming la ghang Ser (N.B., hd-gt sig- nifies “ yonder” but closer to the observer's feet than p’dgs. Perhaps hd-gv shio-la by which we have rendered “ down there below” would be replaced by md-gi-la). Di-pa ghur lang chi’. Ts'wrne ld di t'ukpa t'dk-ring- tung ghd dzo yo'pe ? Ts'ur-ne Pal-dhe t'uk-pa t'dk- ring-t'ung ghd dzo’ yo'pe ? 146 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. How far is that peak from the Laptse-ne dhe zoktse t'ukpa t’ék- Pass-top: It is a long distance from here to the Pass-top : Tf you descend quickly you will soon fall on your face: The water trickles from the rock down along my back : Is this water good to drink : All is drinking water up here: A snow-slip is descending : Ice, snow, boulders all from above : Is there any cave near : Yonder, yonder ; below : Run for your life (i. e., “ Run- ning preserve your life.” ) There is only rock-shelter— yonder under that boulder- mass : Run into the cave over there : This is not a cave; we call this * grotto-shelter :” I am not at all hurt: With spikes on your boots, you do not slip often : Fasten spikes on my boots please : See the Pass-top now: ring-t'ung ghd dz0’ yi'pe? (dhe zoktse instead of zoktse dhe ‘ that peak’). Ts’ wr-ne laptse t'ukpa t'dk ring- mo dw’. Khyorang gya-po shio-dhu bhab- par, nyurdhu kha dap yong. Dhék-lar chhu dzak-nai, ngd-i gyap kyt tang-la bhap-ki-dw’. Di chhu di t'ung-wai dhindhu, yakpo € yo’? Yd-gi ts'ur chhu t'ungchok (or tungnyen) ts’angma dw’. Kha-ru chi’ bhap-ki-dw’. Yd-t’ok-ne khyak, khau-a,shélma lib! Ts¢-né tak-p’uk hi é yo’ ? P’a-gv, p’agi ; ma-gi-la ! Gyuk-nav son-te shrung ! Mempe dhik-kyib mi duw’'—p’dgi p’dbong-ghi wok-la ! Hag tak-p’uk nang-la gyuk : Di-ka p'uk chy’ ma re’: ghydm- kyip dhende Ser. Ngarang ye nyam-pa ma jhung. Rang-ghi lham-la ~~ kang-dzer dam-pe, mangpo shor-nai gyel- gYu-min. Nga-i lham-la kang-dzer dam ro Jhyt! Tanda laptse to shok. Beware of the Pass-poison Ld-dhuk rikpa dim ! (poisonous air on passes). JR iE ERAN PAYING VISITS. 147 Here we are! Hail, hail, to T5ur lep jhung! Lhd sollo, lhé the mountain-gods ! Victory, sol-lo; Lhd gyal-lo, thd gyal-lo! victory, to the gods ! Beware the demons on the left Yon-ldk-kyi dé-tso la rikpa dim! side : PAYING AND RECEIVING VISITS. [On receiving a guest in your own house the orthodox greeting to be uttered to him is: Chhdk p’ep 8hii’ mang or Chhak pep mang chik !—the meaning of the first form being ¢« On arrival and departure salutation springeth forth,” and of the second On arriving let salutation be given thee 1” The correct reply for the visitor to make to this welcome is Lhd yo’ (or ld y&’) “Sir it is” or « Be it so, Sir.” To an inferior comer the salutation is Tanda lep song : « Now you have arrived ;” (akin to our “ Well, so you have come !”) When the visit is a formal one, it is usual for the caller to present a visiting scarf styled jéldar or khdté (lit. kha btags “that which binds the mouth.”’) This may be either accepted if the visitor be of average means ; or, if he be poor, though the scarves carry the most trifling pecuniary value save in rare instances, it may be returned to him by tieing it loosely about his neck ; first, however, courteously and gra- ciously receiving it] :— Is the master at home: He is at home—not at home: Will his Reverence give me an interview : His Reverence does not receive to-day : Announce me ! Pray sit down : Take a seat on the cushion : Take some tea: Kusho di §hu-ki-yi'pe ? Khong §hw’ y&'—§hu’ me’. Je-tsiin-kyt do’dhu chug-ghd ? Dhe-ring Je-ts’iin-kyt do’-dhu mi chuk. Lion kyur-pa nang! Shi! Shuten la shi! Soljhé §hei nang. 148 Thank you, Sir: Bring the tea-pot here: Do you drink tea or beer : Place the broth on the stove : Is your sacredness quite well: T am quite well, are you well: Sir, I am: Take tea, Sir : Many thanks, Sir: Take more tea : I have enough : Have you come alone : From where have you come : I must go now : Now pray dismiss me : Farewell (lit. “ Be happy!”) Grant me your protection ! Please come again soon : Many thanks, Sir: Accept this scarf : Come again and again : May we meet again next year: (on parting for indefinite period). Visitor : I wish you farewell : Host: Well; go gently: TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Lhé tukje! (often heard as t'orje). Ts ur-la 6° bing di khur shok ! Chhang soljhd khyorang-ght ghang tung-gyu-yimpe ? T’ukpa di jhélang-la Shik. Je-tsiin Lhd-yi kham dé la-sam ? Dik yé-demo ; nyt’ demo € yo’ ? Lha, la-so. Kusho, soljha §hei ! Lha, t'uk-je chhé (pr. torje- chhe). Soljhé dhd-rung Shei ro. Ngé-la ta-yong la-so. Nyi'rang shring-shrdng la € yong ? Khys' ghé-ne lep jhung! Tanda ngdrang do-ren du’. Tanda gong-pa nang ro. De-war 8hu shik ! Ku-yi kyab-tu ngembu-la nang ro! (ngembu depreciative title for “me.” Yang gya-po p’ep ro nang ! Lhé, t ukje chhe (*‘ t'orje-chhe.”) Khatak di her ro nang ! Yang-kydr-yang p’ep! Sdng-pd’ jal-wa chhok ! Wona ghdle ku §hu nang. Wond ghdle pep ! N.B—It is etiquette in Tibet, before leaving the room after a visit of ceremony, to empty any tea left in your tea-cup into the shd-luk or slop-basin standing on the low table. ys COOKING APPARATUS. 149 COOKING AND DOMESTIC UTENSILS. Sol-dong : a churn of hollow bamboo used for compounding tea with soda and butter previous to boiling. Instead sometimes the butter is put direct into each tea-cup afterwards. Dong-mong or Do-mong : a large tea-churn, made of two half- logs hollowed out and coopered into a barrel-form with willow twigs. Khok-chhen ; or Sol-§ang : tea-kettle of copper, somewhat urn- shaped with handle on either side but no spout, in which the tea ingredients, after churning, are boiled. Jhémbing, or Sol-bing : brass tea-pot with spout and lid, as with us, into which the tea is ladled from the urn for pouring into cups. Khok-t'il : another name for a tea-pot. Sing-ts'dl : tea-pot of another shape, in use in Tsang province; often made of red or black pottery. Tibril : round tea-pot, as styled in Lahul and Ladak. Dzémbing : earthenware tea-pot. Jhébtuk : stirring-stick for tea while boiling in §ang-bhu. Mé-kyok : fire or charcoal shovel. Sol-t'um : ladle for transferring tea from urn to tea-pot. Jhé-ts'ak ; or 8hi-ma: tea-strainer made of very fine split bamboo or cane. Porpa : cups or bowls of various kinds of wood, box-tree and vine-root, (but maple-knot the most valuable), used for tea, soup, and all food, generally carried in coat-pocket (p’orshuk). Bii’pa : bellows. (In Tsang: Bi’ pa.) T’drbak : iron plate for food. Terter : dish for meats. Rék-t'um : large brass ladle. Dhok-le : large open iron pot with handles, used for cooking victuals. Chédk-mak : tinder and steel. Sang-bhu : general term for copper degchies, tinned inside. Mér-pdru : round tin butter-box. Chhye-kyal : flour-bag. Tsam-khuk : tsamba-bag. 150 TIBETAN GRAMMAR, Chhu-t'uwm : large metal ladle for getting water at springs. Dzd-ma : ghara, or clay vessel for holding meal, water, &c. Léng-gé : iron pan in which to parch barley for tsamba. Sem : wooden cask or barrel. Ohhub$om : wooden pail with lid for conveying water on back up hills. ARTICLES OF FOOD. Tsdm-ba : barley-meal, prepared by first parching the grain and then grinding it into flour more or less coarse. Pak : porridge made by soaking tsamba in hot-tea, and often as thick as dough. Sen : the meal soaked in beer or hot-water instead of in tea, kneaded into large tough balls and eaten warm or cold. P&'-lep : this mass made very thick and with the addition of ginger and aconite as yeast, baked into flat-cakes. Ohur-ra : a sort of flat cheesy maccaroni, made by boiling down milk into a curdy mass and drying it; a little flour being often introduced. Of- ten in granulated masses. Khur-wa : cakes fried in fat, made of various meals. Gyd-khur : Chinese cakes fried in oil. Bé-chi: cake made of maize meal. Mo-mo or mok-mo : pastry-puffs in which is enclosed minced meat and chopped vegetables, sometimes sugar also. Khabse or Shé-to : flour and fat rolled into pastry of worm- like form, coiled into cakes of different shapes and baked. Tre-tse : vermicelli made of millet. T’uk-pa : general term for broth made either from meat or, like gruel, only from meal- stuffs. Gyé-t'uk : * Chinese broth ”— a more substantial soup, being chur-ra and onions cooked up in meat-broth. Pé&’t'uk : broth thickened with barley. T’uk-t'dl: barley-meal first boil- ed in meat-broth and, when strained out from the broth, then roasted on an iron-plate ; hence styled * soup-dust.” Sé-t’uk : soup made from a pun- gent wild vegetable, nearly as hot as the chilli. Dai-t'uk : rice and meat soup. ARTICLES OF FOOD. 151 Dai-tsém : ground. Yik-sha : boiled). Luk-shé : mutton (usually boil- ed). Ré-shé : goat-mutton. P’ék-shd : pork. Bo-ts’il : bacon. rice parched and yak-beef (usually Shé-chuk : meat cut in strips and dried. | Gyu-ma, or gyu-ma kdrgyang : sausages, or even the intes- tines cooked, as every part of an animal is consumed in Tibet. P'ékro and Lukro: carcases of pigs and sheep roasted whole in their skins and sold thus The meat be- comes hard and brittle and for drying. will keep for more than a year in the severe cold; the carcases being gradually eaten. P’ing-shd : curried meat, sold dried on small skewers of wood. Kidm-chhin : liver. Ts ilkw : fat. Sha ts'ilme’ : lean meat. Démché : duck. Khyimchd : fowl. Wo-ma : milk. Mdr : butter. have a supply of butter 50 (“ Some people | | years’ old, laid by in their houses, sewn up in sacks and skins ; this is produced with great pride on special occa- sions, as the oldest wine is brought out at European ban- quets : "— Moravian Report). Ohyema kara : sugar (refined). Bhu-ram : brown sugar sold in cakes. Mission Gong-ngd : eggs. Chu-li : dried and stoned ; staple winter food in Western Tibet. Ngért kham-bhu : name of these in East Tibet. Chu-lt t'uk : soup of dried apri- cots. apricots Chu-li taghir : boiled apricots mashed into pulp, made into cakes and then dried. Dai chu-li : apricots with boiled rice. Wosé taghir : mulberries, dried, pulverised, and made into cakes. Lé-pu’ : the white radish; a popular vegetable in Tibet— baked, or soup. finely-grated in Nyungma : prized). turnip (greatly Sho-ko : ordinary Tibetan pota- to. 152 To-ma : very small red sweet potato. Piling kyiu : English potato. Choma : creeping fern-like plant with self-rooting runners and extensive system of roots underground bearing small tubercles. These are dug up and much prized as food. See Huc. Potentilla anserina. TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Tséng : onions. Petse : cabbage. Kung-lapuk : carrot. Te-ma : peas. Mamoipe Loto : maize. Khalo : spinnach. Targha : walnuts. Debu : apple. Kyerpa : barbery. PREPARING AND EATING FOOD. Place the stove down here : Place the pot on the stove: Make the fire burn brightly : Throw wood on the fire : ‘What have we to eat : Go and buy some fish: Here are minced-meat and bread : I have bought a whole dried carcase : You have bought too much meat : Where is the saucepan : How many plates have we: The copper-pot has become dinted : Boil eight eggs : Is the tea-kettle full : Clean out the tea-pot and make fresh tea in the tea- kettle : Blow up the fire again : EE —.R Jha-lang dhe di-pa p’db §hik. Sang di jhd-lang tang-la §hok. Me di t’ol-le t'ol-le par chuk. Shing me-la luk ! Nga-la §a-war chhir-tu ghang e ys ? Chhyin-nai Rye Ayo shok. Tanda momo’ pd’lep du’. Nga shd-khak ghang-gd nyo-pa- yin. Khyo’-kyi shd hdachang mangpo Ayo du’. Sang-bu dhe kd-pa yi’. Ngd-la derma ghd-ts'é’ yin ? Sang di dip song. Gong-nga gye’ kol shik! Sol-8ang tem-tem (or ghang) yo’ par ? Khok-t'il di tui-ne sol-3ang-la Jha sarpa §6 shi’. Me dhe ydng-kyar p'u gyop ! PREPARING FOOD. 153 Fetch more fuel : I want milk and sugar : We Tibetans always mix butter in tea : Make the tea in the usual way: Bring bowl and stirring-stick : Pray don’t let the water boil over on the hearth: § The milk has boiled-over : 3 Then put butter on the hearth Pii-shing §dng-kyar khur shok. Nygdrang-la ®oma chyéma kdra go yo’. Pi’pé ngé-sha dhui-gyin jha-la mar te-ghi-ya’. Dhiii-gyiin nangtar jhé di Jhyt (jhyye is pr. chi). P’orpa jhdb-tuk khur shok. T°db-la chhu di li’ ma chuk ro jhyi (pr. chi or chyi). Woma li’ song Dhe-ne t'ab-la kar-sur tong ; ngd khyo'-la Ser-wa mangtar dhe and say at once what I tell ¢ tanda teltu lap chi’ (kar-sur you : J Say like this: “O hearth-god. don’t be angry; I didn't ¢ know !”’ Give me Chinese broth : Remove the saucepan lid : Skim off the dirty grease on the surface : Throw salt in the broth : Is the barley-meal broth ready : Tt is spoiled : Cut up the meat into bits: Cut the mutton and put it in the pot : Is it hot enough : There is not enough milk : Is it sweet or not : Fill the tea-pot with water to the brim : What is there to eat: 20 = mar). Dinde lap : “ T"ab-lha, gong-pa ma tum ; ngas ma she.” Gyd-t'uk nang chik. Sang-bhu-t khep sang chak. Kha-tok-la numtst tsok yap chik. Ts'd t'ukpa-la tab (or luk). Pituk tal-dhik € jhung (pr. often t’alti é chung). Dhe sang jhung. Shé di tsdp tsdp jhyi. (tsab-pa: to mince). Luk-sha di t'upné, sang-na luk. Yong-su ts'd-po yi'pe ? Wo-ma $hang ma song. Dhe §himpo é-yo’ m’é-yo’. Khok-t'i(l) nang-la chhu dhak- dhak ghang ghyong (or luk). Ghang $a-wa ? 154 Please give me some : Is it good to eat : The dried meat is old and brittle; I can powder it: Powdering it, pour hot water on it: This is old meat : it is not bad : Tibetans do not eat ducks : Englishmen are fond of fish- flesh and fowl-flesh : Tibe- tans not : Soak the liver in water: This hard dry liver is very bitter: No matter ! no matter! I can’t eat it : Are you hungry: I am not hungry : Eat more butter: it has not become rancid : In taste this is sweet : Boil the fish and put salt with it into the water : Always fry the eggs in good butter : We have no salt: Fill the pak into that skin : The pak is like dough : Is the Chinese broth savoury : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Nyd-la kda-she nang roch. Di 34-na yd’po yi’-pai ? Shd-chuk nying kok-chenre’ : nga §hibmo jhe’ up. Dhe §hibmo So-ne, chhu ts'dpo luk tang. Di-ni shé nying-pa du’ : dkpo mind’. Pipa yd-tse to §a-ghy me’. P’iling-pa nyd-shé jhyd-sha la gé-ghi-dv’ ; Po’pa mindw’. Chhinpa pang-ne $ho’ (&T ) Chhinpa kyong kem di kha-po re’. (In Tsang) mi-to’, mi-to’! (In Lhasa) khye'mt yo’, khye’ ma yo’! Nga di-la 8¢ ma chok. Khyo' tok-ghi re’-ta? Dak-la to-pa tok-ght mindu’. Dharung mdr §o: di-la hamds gyap mae jhung. -— Di dho-wa-la (JRA) ngar- mo du’, Nya kol (or ki) ; chhu-i nang- na dv nyampo ts'é luk-ne. Gong-nga mdr sdng-la dhui-gyiin sek jhyz. Ngé-la ts'a me’. Gyu-ma-v bug-la pak gyang 8hik. Pak dv kyoma dhang da-te re’. Gya-t'uk dhe dho-wa §himpo yo'par ? THE KANGLACHHEN PASS. 155 Peel the potatoes : Parch the barley-grain and then grind into flour and Sho-ko di pékpa shu §ha’. Nai lam-ne chhyé-mar tak dhang tsamba ger chik. make tsampa : I want fresh milk: What is the price of milk : The soup is very weak : Put a piece of that butter in Shompa-la dr di-yi dhwmbu the leaf with a spoon : chi’ turma-ne §ho'. Nyé-la Womé sarpa goi yo’. Womd-i rin ghd ts’ ? T’ukpa hdchang ld-po dw’. OVER THE KANGLACHHEN PASS BETWEEN WALLUNG AND TIBET. [The Kanglachhen and the Tipta Passes are the two prin- cipal mountainous gateways out of Eastern Nipal into Tibet. The former is much used by the colony of Tibetans and Limbus settled in the Wallung Valley ; and it was over this Pass, which is 17,000 feet at its apex, that Sarat Chandra Dés gained access to Tibet in 1882. Sir J. D. Hooker ap- proached but did not ascend the Pass] :— The weather is clear: we will Nam dhdngpo dw’: ngé-ts'é La go up quickly toward the Pass: Where are my snow-shoes : Help me to descend this decli- vity : Take care ! It is very slippery : Don’t fall! I was very nearly falling: That gorge must be 2,000 or 3,000 {uma deep: (1 #'uma — 18 inches) : This path runs along the face of the cliff ; you will not fall: di t'e-kyd la gyokpo do-gyu Yin. Ngdrang-ght kang-hlam di ghd- pa yo ? Tak-§arpo di t'engla do-gyu ro- ram nang. Rik-pa dim! Deé'ték shor-ghi re’. Gyel ma chuk! Ngd tiktse min-na gyel-tap-yin. Qyd-ser di kyi ting tse la f'uma tong nyt tong sum jal-gyu yin. Lamkhé di dhék-Sar kyi dong dong la gyu-kin-dw’ ; khyo’ 8ak ma yong. 6 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. There! you can see the corner ~~ of the rock: At that corner the path turns to the right and ascends : Where is the bridge across this ravine: I don’t see it: The bridge has broken : If you collect twigs and dung, we can light a fire : Look at that long plain of snow: 1t must be a glacier : What is the name of that river yonder ? Do you know ? It is the Yungma; the great river of the Wallung Valley: The upper part of the valley is full of snow : Don’t tread there ; the snow is quite soft : Ah, to be sure! It is a deep crevasse full of snow: Fresh snow has not fallen on the pass: This long ridge of snow is called Chang Chhup Gya- lam : There is no path across the ridge : Never mind; mount on my back : Can you bear my weight ? Be careful! Don’t slip : Hé-gi! dhak-ght khuk di tong chok. Khuk dhe la lamkhdé di yéi- na kor-ne dzek yin. Dhok-po-t bhar-nangla Sampa di ghd re’? mgarang mik td-wa ma chok. Sampa dhe chhdk song. Khyi' kam-shing béng-kam du yong nd, me dhiu-pa chok yong. Khau-é-1 t'dng ring-po dhe la tor shok! Ghéngchen chi’ jhung gos. P’G-gi chhu-wo dhe kyi ming ghd Ser ? Khyo shé-sam ? Yungma ming di Ser yo’; chhu chhempo dv Walung-ghi lung- pé-yi du’. Di p’u di khau-a tem-tem jhung. Te-la ma dul ; khau-a dv bol-bol dw’, Kye, te-ka yo’ ! Khau-da-ne tem- tem-khen ser-kha tang-ring chi’ du’. La-i tang-la khau-d sarpa bap ma Jhung. Kang-sam ring-po di Chang Chhup Gya-lam Ser jhung. Kang-8am kyt bhar-nang-la lam- kha min dw’. Mitok ! Nge gyap-la dzok. Khyo’ nge jig-ts’e khyer chok-ka. Rik tim! Shor ma gyap ! ESTIMATES OF TIME. 157 Hark! what is that noise ? Nyen chi! dur-da di kang dw’. An avalanche is rolling down } Kha-ru chi md-ki-ru gya-ser kyt into the gorge below : | t’eng-la bap-ki du’. NT t-cha’ hh We have now left Chang ch- | we or he ori hup Gya-lam. This rock is a Bg g , _ ghye song). Tak di la ming named Dzama Nikmo : Jo, , i di Dzdma Nakmo Ser yo. } Di-ne Pukpa Karmo-la Cdk ring-t'ung ghd ts’o dw’ ? How far is it from here to P’ug-pa Karmo ? Are you tired ? We can take shelter there : I am very tired : You proceed to Koro in | Khyd' t’ang-chhe song-nga ? P’-gi-la kyib nye’ chok. Nydrang héchang t ang-chhe-so. P’ukpa Karmo-ne Kangla-chhen from P’uk-pa Kar i rom Lruk-pa Barmo in a tuk chhya-shar-la dang do. due east direction : Itis two miles to the head of P’ukpa Karmo-ne lap-tse la nye- the pass from P’ug-pa Kar- mo. ring di pakts’e nyi jal, That is of no importance : Di dho-kal min du’. TIME—AGE-SEASONS. Tt is necessary to set forth briefly the Tibetan method of reckoning time ; though in all estimates of time past, age, and the date of events, the whole race shew the same inaptitude for which the natives of India are remarkable. There seem to be systems of counting the years from particular eras in the history of the country ; but, for the purpose of distin- guishing the years within the memory of those living, what is termed a 7db jhung, or cycle, has been invented, which affords distinct denominations for each year in a period of 60 years. As each cycle of 60 years elapses the same series of names are run through again. When, however, a Tibetan informs you such and such an event happened in such a year, naming the year, you can only judge from the context of his speech, or other auxiliary circumstances, whether—for example—he 158 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. means you to understand a date which is 30, or one which is 90, years ago. The sexagenery cycle has been formed in imi- tation of the Chinese mode of reckoning ; but the Chinese cycle does not exactly correspond with the Tibetan cycle, the latter being said to be 4 years in arrears of the former. In order to form distinctive titles for every year of the sixty composing the cycle, there has been first arranged a set of twelve names to represent a lesser cycle of 12 years, called lo kor. These which always recur in the same order are the names of 12 different animals or, rather, creatures :— 1. Jhi: Mouse. 5. Duk: Dragon. 9. Spre-u : Ape. 2. Lang: Bull. 6. Dul: Snake. 10. Jhd: Fowl 3. Tak: Tiger. 7. Td: Horse. 11. Khyi: Dog. A Yos: Hare. 8. Luk: Sheep. 12. P'dk: Pig. As soon as the 12 years, each named after an animal in the above order, have elapsed, the series re-commences, following the same names, and so on, ad infinitum. However, in order to vary the names so as to produce 60 different titles, another cycle of 10 years is made to run concurrently with the duode- nary series. The 10-year cycle is composed of the names of Gve elements, each repeated twice, once with the masculine affix po, and once with the feminine mo :— 1. Shing-po: Wood. 6. Q4-mo: Earth. 2. Shing-mo : Wood. 7. Chék-po : Iron. 3. Me-po: Fire. 8. Ohdk-mo : Iron. 4, Me-mo: Fire. 9. Chhu-po: Water. 5. Sd-po : Earth. 10. Chhu-mo: Water. The po or mo is generally dropped ; and these names are combined in the following manner with the duodenary series. The two cycles begin simultaneously, the first-named element being conjoined with the first-named animal to denominate the first year; the second element in the list (which, however, is the same as the first-named) being next conjoined with the second-named, a different, animal ; and so ESTIMATES OF TIME. 159 on. Thus we have :=—1. Wood-mouse year; 2. Wood-bull year ; 3. Fire-tiger year; 4. Fire-hare year: and so forth. It is obvious that the 10-name series will be exhausted before the 12-name series. It is, however, at once re-com- menced, the first element being conjoined to the 11th animal, the same being also conjoined to the 12th animal, which as both series run on concurrently causes fresh combinations. Variations for 60 years are thus produced, when, the 10-year scale having run exactly six times, and the 12-year scale exact- ly five times, they both once again comuiguce together, form- ing the same sets of combinations as in #FiVixty years just concluded. The rdb-jhung, or sexagenary cycle, now in progress in Tibet commenced in the year 1863; in which year the 10-year and 12-year series began together. Accord- ingly we have for the approaching years the following titles whereby they may be discriminated :— 1893: Shing Ta Lo: Wood-Forse Year. 1894: Shing Luk Lo: Wood-Sheep Year. 1895: Me Téu Lo: Fire-Monkey Year. 1896: Me Jhya Lo: Fire-Fowl Year. 1897: Sa Khyi Lo: Earth-Dog Year. 1898: Si P’ak Lo: Earth-Pig Year. 1899 : Chék Jhi-wa Lo: Tron-Mouse Year. 1900: Chak Lang Lo: Iron-Bull Year. 1901: Chhu Tak Lo: Water-Tiger Year. 1902: Chhu Yos Lo: Water-Hare Year. 1903: Shing Duk Lo: Wood-Dragon Year. 1904: Shing Dnl Lo: Wood-Snake Year. 1905: Me Ta Lo: Fire-Horse Year. 1906: Me Luk Lo: Fire-Sheep Year. Another system of nomenclature, slightly different from the foregoing, is occasionally employed, wherein the 10-year cycle is composed not of the elements twice repeated, but of the five primary colours: karpo (white), ndkpo (black), marpo (red) serpo (yellow), and ngompo (blue), together with the names of 160 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. ESTIMATES OF TIME, 161 five secondary colours which are considered shades of the first. 1891: These are combined in the same way with the twelve names of (6) July 8th f ua dnd yn ; Sixth Month. animals to form as in the other case a 60-year’s cycle. Men- ond dd-wa : Faiset] Month. tion is also sometimes heard of a lengthy cycle of 252 years, (7) August 6th Gian ditnga eventh Month. . } i lowical Dho-§hin dé-wa : Wheat-faced Month. supposed to be used in the chief monasteries for chronologica ’ Tot Kalond betruse affair in (8) Sept. 5th Dd-wa gyepa ; Eighth Month. records. The Lo-t’o, or ka ° ar, 18 . ol a ol ane ept: Tram um dd-wa: Threshing Month. Tibet, little understood even by men of or inary earning. 0 Out ah Dwar guegpa ; Ninth Month. Tibetans apportion the year into lunar months (dd-wa), cor- 9) ct. t { Té-Tdr dd-wa : Forith-8tar Month. responding with the re-appearances of the moon, and reckon- Dé-wa chu-pa ; Tenth Month. ing ordinarily only twelve months to the year. This system (10) Nov. 3rd { Min-dhuk dé-wa : Pleiades Month, would cause the commencement of each new year to occur (11) De 3rd Dd-wa chu-chikpa; Eleventh Month. some ten or eleven days earlier than its predecessor. How- e TY Go db-wa : Month of Heads. ever, in order to obviate the continuous travelling back of the 1892 - opening day of the year, every third year an intercalery Dé-wa chu-nyi-pa ; Twelfth Month. (12) Jan. 20d { month, styled dd-t’eb, is inserted, which serves to bring the Gyébl dd-wa : Month of Victory. lunar year into some settled correspondence with the solar I year. New Year’s Day, or the first day of the first month, is VOCABULARY. made to occur some time in our month of February according te Time, space of time: Dhii-ts’é. Day after to- to the date when the new moon is first visible to the naked » SP y | Nang-par. v 1 on Febr Year: Lo; Month: Da; déwa. MOITrow : eye. In 1891, the Tibetan New ear opened on Tebruary Week: Gungdiin. Spring : Chyi'ka. 11th, which was the first day of the first menth and the be- Day: Nyinmo. Summer: Ydrka. gmning of the Great Festival of Logzo. Taking the kalendar Two hours: Khyim. Autamn: Tinka. for 1891, therefore, the months of the Tibetan year may be 94 mins : Chhuts’s. Winter : Giinka. thus set forth, with the customary names and day of com- This year : Dhd-lo. Last night : Ddng-gong. mencement of each month during 1891-92 :— Last year: Nd-ning. Evening : Kong-ta. 1891 : Next year: Sang-lo. All day : Nyim-gang. Feb. 11th Dé-wa dhangpo ; First Month, To-day : Dhering. Yesterday morning : Khdnang, ( or | Ti-pa dd-wa : Horseman Month. Yesterday : Khdsang. To-morrow morning : Ngdmo. Di-wa nyi-pa ; Second Month. Day before This morning : Dhdrang. (2) March 12th Be da-wa : Blosseming Month. tele iy Khé-nyin. This evening : Tom Di-wa sumpa; Third Month. Two days before Day of the | Tse Hind: (3) April 10th { Nak dé-wa : Black Month. yes iy } Mazi nyin. Se | tarikh.) ( (4) May 10th ( hea or “ ee Three days before Yan ngiin- 3rd day of month : Tse: sum. Sa-ga ard: cer oo yesterday : nyin. 10th day of Tei ch ro, { Da-wa ngdpa ; Fifth Month. To-morrow : Sang-nyin month : s ev chu tampa. L (5) Jume Sth ( Nron da-wa : Snake Month. 21 ’ yu. ’ EH —— er ii DA 162 15th day of month : Nya. Sunday : Sé-nyima. Monday : Sd-dawa. Tuesday : Sda-mikmdr. Wednesday : Sd-hlakbo. Thursday : Sd-p’urbo. Friday : Sd-pdsanyg. Saturday : Sd-pembo. Midnight : Namchhye’. First Cock-crow ) Jhdpodang- (about 3 am.):} po. Second Cock- Crow : Third Cock-crow ) Jhd-po sum. (about 6 a.m.): ; pa. } Jha-po nyi-pa. It is time to go to sleep : We must set off now : The night has nearly gone : The day has nearly gone : The sun has set : What time is it : About 3 A.M. : The ‘“second-crowing” is near (2 A.M.) : How long have you been wait- ing here ? I arrived at about dusk: We must start at day-break : It is time to go indoors: Wake me early in the morn- ing : -How old are you: I am 18 years’ old : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Two a.m. : Namchhyé’ yol. Three a.m. (or To morsows | T’orgo Sin. head past”) : Six a.m. (“rising of the night”): Eight a.m. (or Nyi-shir. “ gun-risen ”’) : Nam-lang. Ten a.m. (‘“sun- a’'walk”) : Nyi-dul Noon: Nyi-chhye’. 4 p.m. : Nyur-me’ (myur-smad). Sunset : Nyi-gdz. 8 pm. : Sa rup. 10 p.m. : Shro’chhol. Nyi’ nya'-la do-ren du’. Tanda nga-is’o gyuk go. Nam lang-la khe' dw’. Nyima dv yol-la khe'. Nyima di gai song. Chhuts's’ ghd ts’o re’ ? T’or-go-§in tsam-la. Jha-ke nyi-pa gyap-la khe’ du’. Khyo' di-pa gu’ne yin ghd ts'o song ? Sap-sip tsam-la lep-pa-yi’. Nam lang-ne ngdts’ o do go yi’. Tanda nang-la pep-ren dw’. Ngdamo ngdrang-la nyi si’ v6 chyt. Khyo lo ghd ts’o re’ ? or : Khyi'- la lo ghatsam lomnam ? Ngdrang lo chobgye’pa yin. ESTIMATES OF TIME. I am a “serpent-year’’ per- Ngdrang diil-lo-pa yin. son : I was born in the water-tiger Ngdrang lo chhu-tik la kye pa year : re’. How many years have you ) Rhys iy: lo ghdtsam ne di-pa spent here : ) Sha-pa yin? Twenty-three years : Lo nyu-shu tsdak-sum., The man who was here yester- Khd-sang-ghi mi di lokne lep day has come again : jhung. (Lit: The man of . yesterday, §c.) Four months ago my brother Nge piin shi-ne ddwa 5h song. died : I think the gun will be brought Ngé sampa-la mendd di sang- to-morrow : nyin kyal jhda-gyu. What day will the Grund) Kyapgin chhempo di shak ghang Lama give audience : } jal-kha nang-wa ? You are very late : Khyo’ yin ring-po gor song. What day of the month is Dhéring ts'éi-tang ghang re’ ? to-day : ) It is the eighth : Come to my lodgings in two Nge nd-tsang la dhd-td chhye hours : khyim chik shok. I want my dinner exactly at Nyi-gdi-ky: kap-la, ngd-la to- chhé’ kho-wa. Ts éi-tang gye re’. sun-down : The reckoning of time at Lhdsa Gyd-nak-kyr ts'ul ~~ nangshin goes according to the Chinese Lhasd-la dhw’-ts'0° tsi-wa di method : do. In general the lunar month is T’un-mong-la dia-kyr dd-wa used : nangshin tsi-ghi re’. Two days’ ago the tea was all Shak nyt ngin-la soljha di lib done: ts’ar song. From the 4th to the 15th day) Di khau-a di tséi $hi-ne Sungte of the month the snow fell: § ts'ei nya t'uk-la bap-kin jhung. The snow was falling all night Di khau-a di nam tang bap-kin- long : Jhung. 164 1 arrived three months’ ago TIBETAN GRAMMAR. (tit : From I arriving, oe | Ngdrang p'epne dd sum jhung. months have arisen). I was delayed a long while= quite a week : You are three days late : I have been calling you a whole chhuts’o : I have been ill for more than a week : I have dwelt at Lhisid three years : Ever since last month until now have I been ill: I will return in nine days : This lama is 63 years old. Ngd-la yin ringpo gyang jhung —diin-§hak tang chi’. Khyé'rang §hak sum t'ep yo’. Ddk-ght khyd'la ke gydk-naz chhu-ts's kang-ga song (or chhu-ts'c tang song). Diin-t'rak p'ar-la dik nd-ts'a-yi gir jhung. . Lo sum tuk Lhdsé-la do’ mar yo. Khésang-dd-wa-ne §ungte dhatd- pen ngd ne’ kyi §ir jhung. Nga Shak gu Shuk-la lokne lep yong. Ldmd di lo re-sum dw’. PLANTS AND TREES OF TIBET PROPER. Som-shing : (Pinus Gerardi ana) (?) Séma-dong : (Abies Brunoni- Sholpo : poplar. Yarpa : poplar (another spe- cies). Mal-chang : large willow (Salix viminalis). Rong-chang : cliff willow (Salix tetra-sperma). Yili: maple. Tdkpa : white-flowered rhodo- dendron. Tikma: red-flowered rhodo- dendron. Se-shing : spruce (Abies Smi- thiana). Diin-shing : silver-fir (Abies Webbiana). ana). Sé-dong : larch (Larix Griffi- thii). Ti-dong : (Pinus longifolia). Tong-shing : (Pinus excelsa). Ridp’ang : Neosa pine. Tsenden: cypress (Cupressus funebris). Ting-shing : yew (Taxus bac- cata). Shuk-po : (Juniperus pseudo- sabina). Péma : (Juniperus squamosa) TIBETAN PLANTS. 165 De-shuk : (Juniperus recurva). Targa : walnut, Gom-rok : holly. Champaka : magnolia (Michelia Champaka). Luduma : (Decaisnea insignis). Shdlmdli-shing : a huge Bom- bax loaded with lovely scar- let blossom, producing pods bursting with long silky wool. Ku-shu : Tibetan apple. Nyo-ti : Yarlung pear. Sendu : pomegranate. Choli : apricot, Wosé-shing : mulberry. Kye-dum : plantain (in Zayul). Dha-li : dwarf rhododendron. Manupatra : (Bryonia dioeca). Tu-nak : (Helleborus niger). Li-tsi : (Pyrus baccata). See Hue. vol. I, 24. Wamp’u-shing : (Pyrus ursina,) stunted-shrub akin to rowan. Ser-lum: wild yellow rasp- berry. Kyu-dema: current bearing edible large red sour berries. Bhi-li-tsi : wild gooseberry. Alhirso : cranberry. Kunda kdri : cloudberry. Kyerpa : barberry (Berberis Tibetanus). Nyang-ka : wild current (Ribes petreeum). Se-wa : yellow rose. Sallow-thorn (Hippopha# rhamnoides). Taru, or Kharmu: (Nitraria Schoberi) “ camel’s thorn.” Umbhu : tamarisk, Burtse : Eurotia. Ts er-tar-kar : Dhdma : Tibetan furze. Brita: (Cuscuta epilinum). Ts’e-pe’ : (Ephedra saxatilis). Chitdka : ( Anemone rivularis). Bhong-mar : red aconite (Aco- nitum luridum). Bhong-nak : (Aconitum nap- ellus). Tong : gigantic arum (Ari- scema). La-chhw : rhubarb, Ruta : elecampane. Jhyd-kang : (Orobanche coe- rulia). Jhya-po tsi-tsv: Roylei). Jhang-chhup (Impatiens shing : white narcissus. Yd-kyima : (Saussurea gossy- pina). Kurkum : marigold (Caltha scaposa). Khur-ts'6’ : dandelion. Tikta : chiretta. Dhevma : poa grass. Lu-di’ : plant with edible tubers (Codonopsis ovata). Cho-ma : (Potentilla anserina) having edible roots which are highly-prized in Tibet eee err mpeconseeeenteenbrremeeetieteie bee tiem’ rode sams 166 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. (See Hue. II. 86, and Rock- hill 180). Zd-tsa : large nettle (Urtica heterophylla). De : (Daphne papyraces). Tang-goi : (Arenaria rupifraga). A-t’ong : (Arenaria Roylea). Sira karpo : (Cuminum cymin- um). Serchhe : (Saxifraga flagellaris). Laddra : (Delphinium glaciale). Ngémbhu : Delphiniam Bruno- nianum). Latsi-metok : Musky Pedicu- laris. FAUNA AND AVI-FAUNA OF TIBET. MAMMALIA. A Dong RAR" Wild yak (Poé- phagus grunniens). Dong-dv : Wild yak-cow. Dong-t'uk : Wild calf. Yik H[NA] Tame yak (gener- al term). Na Dimo QS N° Domestic female yak. Dimdzo : cross between yellow ox and dimo. nF, Dzo NER (often Jo) cross be- tween yak-bull and common Indian cow. Dzo-mo : female of this breed ; the most common domestic animal in Tibet. Garpo—Garmo : maleand female resulting from further cross- ing of dzo-po or dzo-mo with common Indian cattle. Tolmo : further cross, back towards yak by interbreeding garmo with yak-bull. Langto: Common humped-ox (Taurus Indicus). Bha-chu : Humped cow. et . Nyga-gi’ R&R Wild camel (Camelus Bactrianus). By. col ERE Domestic Bactrian camel. Gung = Mongol Tiger: thick- ~ Ngd-mong and broad-headed species found on Chinese fron- tier (Mongol : Kharakula). Tak BA Common Tiger (Felis tigris) ; variety of, found in furred Zayul and Pemakoichhen, S. E. Tibet. N Sik =A Tibetan leopard (Felis irbis) akin to the Ounce. ; MAMMALIA OF TIBET. 167 Sd NA Snow leopard (Felis macrocelis); named shan in Ladak. Sd-chulk ANA Clouded leopard (Felis macroceloides) akin to the Rimau Dahan of Sumatra. Pungmar RARARNN (also Sik jug-kar) : Red-shouldered tiger-cat (Felis nigrescens: Hodgs). Sikmdr : ~~ Marbled (Felis dosal). Yi Rg Tibetan Lynx (Felis isabellina) paler than Felis lynchus (in Ladak 7). Tsokde or yi-chhung: Pallas’s Lynx (Felis manul). Sik-chhum : Spotted Civet-cat (Prionodon pardicolor: Hodgs). i Sd-chhyong FNAAKE" Com- mon Civet-cat. tiger-cat (Viverra melanurus : Hodgs.) Chyd-sik : Paradoxurus lani- ger: Hodgson. Shul-jhi : Tibetan (Putorius Tibetanus). Pole-cat Tou-p’v: Tibetan tree-marten (Martes toufeeus : Blyth.) Tou-lo : Indian Marten (Martes flavigula). Kalon-shram : Black Sable (Pu- torius zibellina). Buldkha : Golden Sable of Tsang (Putorius auriventer); a rare and beautiful species found in Tsang, Lhobrak, and Jhya-yul. i Kangshram : Ermine (Mustela erminea). Té-mong : Pale Weasel (Mustela temon ). Ld-kyvmo : White-nosed Weasel (Mustela canigula). Stré-mong : general term for species of Weasel found in East Tibet, e. g., Mustela Moupinensis, Mustela astutus, and Mustela Davidianus, Wok-kar RMR White- throated Ferret-Badger (Helictis monticola). Dhumpa NA Tibetan Bad- A] ger (Meles leucura); found in Tsang. Dhum-pu-se: Tibetan Shrew- Badger (Arctonyx albogu- laris). Tak-shram : Hill Otter (Lutra aureobrunnea). Chhu-shram : Clawless Otter (Aonyx leptonyx). Wak-dongkha AER Tibe- tan Racoon or Red Cat-bear (Ailurus ochraceus). - Dhom = Tawny Bear (Ursus pruinosus : Blyth). i HH An means Tartana ee se taser fi Joey Fark Tt Agi SL Ba feet Hg 168 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Dhom-khdina : Snow Bear (Ursus isabellinus). - a Dhée’mong AAR Ko6-ko-nur Bear (Ursus lagomyarius), Tik-dhompa : Spectacled white Bear (Aeluropus melanoleu- cus) found in Moupin and probably north of Namts’o Chhyidmo. } ng v Chyang-ku 3 TM Wolf of Tibet (Lupus Tibe- Called shangku in Golden tanus). Ladak. Chyang-rok : Black Wolf of Tibet (Lupus lycaon). Parchyang : Wild Dog (Cuon alpinus: Pallas). Par-wa: Lesser Wild Dog (Cuon primeevus)e Wi-mo : Himalayan Fox (Vul- pes montana). rte . Wa-do-do iN Sl al Yellow Tibe- tan Fox (Vulpes flavescens) ; found all over Tibet. Yi-gur or Witse: Rusty Fox (Vulpes ferrilatus). Wi-ndk : a black Fox. Gomkhyi : Larger Tibetan Mas- tiff. Shangkhyi: Small sledge dogs. Lingkhyt : Greyhound. Chhi-wa ; or Chhi-p’t: the Tibetan Marmot; of which Mongol several species exist in Tibet, swarming everywhere. Kyang TR" Wild Ass of Tibet (Equus kyang). Bong-bhu : Domestic Ass. Td : Horse. Wal-wa : small black horse of Gyangtse. Dhe-po : mule. Shé-u or Shd-wa: large deer sometimes known in books as the Barasingh (Cervus Wallichii). Kha-sha : Spotted deer. Séru [N'X’ the Serow (Ne- morrhoedus bubalinus). ~~ Tss* or Tseuw H|ON the soe called Hodgson’s antelope ; the cho of provincial Tibetans and stsot of the Ladaki. -~ Go-a RR Ravine deer or Tibetan chamois (Procapra picticaudata). Ld-wa ax Musk deer (Mos- chus moschiferus), of which there are 3 species. SN Eyin 9% Tibetan Ibex (Cap- ra sakeen). Danmo 5H Female Ibex. MAMMALIA OF TIBET. 169 Ni HI5R° or Napu : the great Burrhel wild sheep (Ovis Nahur), Nyen H|%%" the Argali wild sheep (Ovis Ammon). Shapo : Another wild sheep (Ovis Vignei). Jhang-luk : the large load- carrying domestic sheep of N.-W, Tibet. Rd-wo : Common goat. Rd-po-chhe : Wild goat. Jagma : Red Squirrel of Sikkim. T'dlyi: Squirrel; steel grey with jet-black tail. Ri-gong : Hare. 4 species. Abra ; and Zabrad : Several vari- eties of Lagomys or tail-less rats are included under these names, SSN Ting-Jing ARERR Brown- toothed shrew (Sorex Sikki- mensis). Tak-lungchen JESS Spi- ~ der shrew (Sorex myoides : Blanford). Shing-ting-jing : Tree shrew of Khams (Tupaia Chinesis). Chhu-jhi-tse : Tibetan water shrew (Nectogale elegans). P’u-se or Pra-li : Tail-less shrew (Anurosorex squamipes). Tsi-p’u-tse : Uropsilus soricipes. Pi-chhung : Musk-rat (Sorex murinus). - Surdman : Brown mole of Ké- ké Nur (Scaptonyx fusicau- datus: Milne Edwards). Byu-long : Short-tailed mole (Talpa micrura). Ld-tsi-byu-long : Musk mole (Scaptocheiros moschatus) : in N. E. Tibet. Jhi-tsi : Common rat. T'si-tsi : Common mouse. Zikmong : Porcupine (in Zayul, &c.) Gang-serma : Hedgehog: term for both the Erinaceus auritus and Erinaceus Amurensis (of Koko Nur). he Teu 23 Greyish-yellow lan- gur monkey with long tail (Semnopithecus schistaceus). Shiré-kho : Larger Tibetan Ma- caque monkey found in Khams, &c. (Macacus Tibe- tanus). Mdnu : A brown monkey. A-nwo: Szechuen monkey—Ma.- cacus cyclopis. Tr, or Shra : y White langur monkey. 22 err] smear tet coi Ht 170 P’a-wang : Jhyd-soma : Gd-wang- Qd-p’ong lowing kinds Names used with little discrimi- nation for vari- ous species of Te'kyq : Bats. The fol- frequent differ- ent regions of Tibet :— ‘Plecotus auritus (Long- eared Bat). Synotus Tibetanus (var. of Barbastelle). Vesperugo noctula. Vesperugo serotinus. Vesperugo discolor. i il FE RE TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Vesperugo Leslieri. Vesperugo Maurus (in Dok- de and Derge). Vesperugo borealis (in Khams and Amdo). Hipposiderus Prattii (Dar- chendo and Lit’ang). Scoptophilus ornatus ( Yun- nan frontier), Vespertilio mystacinus (Bast Tibet). Vespertilio dasyeneme (Tsaidam). Harpiocephalus herpia(Sik- kim, Zayul). Birps. Jhyd-l8k : Eagle. Jhdngd’ or Gho-wo: Lammer- gayer. Kydk-lik : White Scavenger Vulture. Gho-ser : Himalayan Vulture. Nyéd-ldk : Osprey. Ping-kyu-ma : Kite. Né-1é ; Great Buzzard. Bhong-t’a : Tibetan Falcon. Tq: Hawk (two or three species of). Ukpa ; also Singjhya Ukpa : Owl, the many species of which are hardly discrimi- nated by Tibetans. Porok; also Chhoi-kyong : Raven (Pyrrhocorax gra- culus). Khd-ta : Crow (Corvus pasti- nator). Kyungka : Jackdaw. Te-ka : Magpie (Pica pica). Gomchhen kyd-khi: Large- headed Magpie. Sa-shdka : Jay. Jol-ndk : A species of Black- bird (Merula ruficollis) : the se v v REA Ey of Tibetan litera- ture. Jol-t'd : A large piebald Merula, described as white in color with yellow markings, and red behind the ears. T'ung-t'ung : Crane. Kangka : Heron (Ardea pra- sinosceles). BIRDS—SPORTING. 171 Kyarmo : Bittern. Khamehhu Ringmo : Snipe (Scolopax solitaria). Mdbjhya : Peacock. Purgin : Wood Pigeon. Ang-gu : Dove. Shing-gon ; Woodpecker. Lhijhyd Ghongmo: Crossop- tilon Tibetanum. Ri-kyek : Lophophorus I Huysii Ghong-yak : Ithaginis Geof- fryoi. Horpa-karpo : Thaumalea Am- herstiz. Horpa : Thaumalea picta. Juk-deb : Wagtail. Ghong-sek : Phasianus decol- latus. Sekpa : Partridge. Ong-lok : Tragopon (Ceriornis Temmincki). Ou-nétso : Parrot. Pupu-kushu : Hoopoe. Kingbo : Swallow. Chhilpik : Sparrow. Ngangpa karpo: White Goose. - Ngangpa serpo : Yellow Goose. Hwang-ya : Sheldrake. Ngurpa : Wild Duck. Ngur-ru : Teal. Yd-tsé¢ : Common Duck. Khézhur : Water-hen. SPORTING IN TIBET. rifle : me-dé. double-barrel rifle. Turkish musket : chdl-¢’d. pistol : rangbdr. gunpowder : medzé. bullet : dik-ril. cartridge : medzé-shup. small-shot : ¢s’igu. gun-stock : gumdad. gun-barrel : dd-chdk. powder-flask : dze-khug. gun-cap : me-do. (really “flint.””) trigger: mdsha. gun-cock : me-kdm. hunting-knife : rd-kysi. spear: dung; dung-t'ung. saddle-cloth : gd-khep. knap-sack : khdbtika. to fire : gyap-pa (me-dd). to shoot : p’dng-pa. to aim at: dik-pa. to hit : khéi-pa. to wound : md-chung-wa. to kill : se-pa ; sok chi-pa. to lie in wait : kok-jdb-pa. to creep: p’e-wa. to stab : sok-khung gyap-pa. horns : rdcha. skin : pdk-pa. tail : shu-gu. bones : rii-pa. feathers : pudo. claws : der-kyu. 172 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. [ When the native explorer A—. K—. visited, in the year 1880-81, the northern parts of Tibet, he brought back word of the marvellous profusion of game of the larger kinds to be found roaming over the steppes of the Jing- t’ang.. Mr. Hennessey in the official report thus summarises the explorer’s information :—‘ The Jingt’ang is a vast and marvellous expanse of high undulating land ...... only some 100 miles broad to the west near Skardo ; it is widest on the meridian of 86° where it is some 500 miles across, and to the east it ends in an inclined width of some 350 miles, from whence it slopes further eastwards, rapidly losing its characteristics and merging into the cultivated lands of China. Its length is about 1,500 miles, and in area it is some 480,000 sq. miles This enormous tract of high table-land is believed to be generally some 15 or 16 thousand feet above sea-level... .. The whole Jingt’ang is coated by a short succulent grass, which from May to August, covers the undulations with the softest of green carpets, extending far away and visible for even 50 or 60 miles in the clear crisp atmosphere prevailing. But beyond the abundant grass, nothing else will grow on this high land ; there is no wood or scrub of any kind for fuel; and, in a word, the products of the earth are solely suited for graminivorous animals, which run wild in enormous numbers, as the yak, goat, sheep, deer, &c. ; and the weaker of these provide food for the wolf, jackal, and yi (lynx). It is said the grass does seed, and most probably is propagated chiefly by that means; but other seeds, as of wheat or barley, though they germinate and produce fodder for cattle, yield mainly seedless ears, and hence no food for man The vast number of wild animals of the Jangt’ang sufferer diminution from one cause only—the occasional extreme severity of winter, when, deprived of grass, they die by thousands, as their skeletons testify.” ] The gun is not loaded : Me-da di dze-me re’. Give me another gun: ‘When I have fired, hand me the other gun at once: As soon as you see it, call out : I saw the antelope near the river down there: Climb up that tree yonder and look round : Do you see anything : I see nothing : Follow me quickly: go care- fully : That is the dung of what ani- mal ? Do you know : Lukpa! where are you : Here ? what is it, Sir: Ngé-la me-dé shemma kur chik. Gyap song-ne, tanda teltu ngd- la me-dda §hemma kur chik. Di-la tong tal, ke gyak! (or khé tang). Ma-gi-la chhu-i do-ru tsew di mik tong jhung. Hi-gi shing dhe dzek-la Khor to shok. Khyirang-ghi ghang-yang 8hik t’ongpe ? Ngdrang-ghi ghang-yaig tong ght ma re’. Nyurdhu nge shug-la shok; chd- gha song. Dhii’'do ghdng-la chr-wa di yimpe ? Khyorang she-sam ? Wa Lukpa ! Khyorang ghd re’ ? Diru! ld l&-sdm ? SPORTING. 173 Be ready with the cartridges : If I miss it, there will be a struggle for life : Sir; I hold my life cheap (Lit: “ do not see my life’) : Bears live on that slope : What is the name of that bird ? I don’t know ; I forget : Pick that up; I want it: We must climb up the torrent- bed : Hold on to the tree ! take care : I am slipping down : Throw down the powder-flask : Let it fall gently : I want help: give me your hand : There is no grass: the plain is quite bare : Do you ever see wild yak on this plain : I have never seen yéks here : Many wild ydks are found beyond that lake yonder : Do you see those trees on the opposite side of the valley : Look further on: you will see three go-wa deer: Beyond the three go-wa are six nyen: I see them: until now I did not notice them. Médzé shup dhe t'dlti hdl ? Ngdrang-ght di-la mi khéi-nd (“if I don’t hit it”), sok dharg tondd jhung gyu re’. Kusho ; nge sok-la mik td- ghi-me’. Dhe-mo-ts’o dher gang-khi-la do-ght yo’. Jhyd di-la Ding ghang Ser ? Shen-ghi ma re’; ngdrang je'- ght re’. Dhe ruk chik! ngd-la kho-jhe yo’. Nygdcha dhoksar-la shi'ne dzek go. Shing di dzin : rikpa dim ? Sho’dhu de'tak shor-ghi-yi’. Dze-khw’ dhe t'engla yuk chik. Di jém-jém gyer nang. Roram goi-pa : ngd-la lik sing tong. Tsa me’ : t'dang di ter ter du’. T'ang di la dii re shi’ dong da t'ong ki du’ ka ? Ngdring-gi di-ru dong t'ong ma nyong. P'd-gi ts’o dhe p’en-chhe "dong mdng-po nye chung. Khyo' shing-ts'o dhe lung-pd-i p'ar-khd t'ong-ké ? Par-tsam toi shok : khyi-kyi go- wa sum t'ong yong. Go-wa sum di p’enchhe nyen tuk yo’. Ngd dhe-la mik tong: dhi-ta p'en dhe-la jhi-ra ma jhe’. 174 ll i A ey Look again: take heed : Look out! where are you go- ing : Drag the body to the river- side : Can you skin it : Work carefully : Collect dry dung and burtse, and light a fire : Where is the tinder-case. AER TT SE J TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Lok-te to shok : myon chik! Rik dim ! kdpa do-ghi yin ? Chhu-yt ddm-tu ro di Cen song. Pakpa di shu ts'uk-ka ? Chdgha lditka jhyi’ chik ! Bang-kdm burtse t'u-ne me dhuk 8h’. Mé-chék-khuk di ghd ve’ ? SHOPPING IN LHASA’. Where can I buy books : Book-vendors remain standing near the western gate of Cho- khang : Do they sell printed books : They sell both printed books and Manuscripts : I want to buy the Pe’'ma Tang Yik of Pe’'ma Jungnai and the Ponpo book Lu Bum Karpo: : I have the first book; the second is not sold publicly in Lhasa : What price do you ask for Gyal-rabs Sal-wai Me-long : I want twenty Galdan tangka : Will you please abate the price : Sir, I have fixed (lit: “cut”) the price ; I cannot abate : You are outwitting me: Pe-chhd-ts’o ghd-pa nyo up yong-ngd ? Pe-chhai-ts’ongpa Cho-khang-ghs nup-gyd-go ts-ndi tdng-te de’. Par-ma ts'ong-ghi-re’ ? Par-ma yik-chha nyi-pa ts’ong- ghi re’. Pe’'ma Jungndi-ky: Pe'ma Tang Yik di dhang Pin-kyi pe- chha Lu Bum Karpo nyo kho - wa yo’. Nyd-la pe-chha dhangpo di yi’ ; nyi-pa di Lhdsd-la d-sdl-la ts'ong ght ma re’. Gya-rap Salwe Mélong-ghi rin ghd ts’ lap-ki yo’. Ngdrang-la Ginden tangka nyi- shu goi-pa. Khyd’rang khe-ru song ro dze’. Kusho ; rin di cho’ pa yin ; khe- ru do mu ts'uk. Khyi'rang-ght ngd-la dok long. SHOPPING I never cheat ; we do not throw abuse like that in Lhasj : You fix the price too high : I will lessen the price one tangka : Taking the price, give me the book, please : Where are the tea-shops ; kind- ly show me : Tea is sold in the market : What kinds of tea have you : Various kinds; all that are necessary : What sort is this tea: What is the weight of the brick : The full weight of this kind : What do you call that tea : This tea, Sir, is the best; it is named Du-t’ang No. 1: The price is one shrang and two tangka each brick : That other tea is Du-t’ang No. 2; that is the second class : The third kind is called Gye- pa; and the worst is Goka : Show me, please, the way to the Nipalese merchants : They live in T’om-si-ghang near Wangdu chhérten : What merchandize do they sell : They sell vases, ornaments and bells; they are the gold- IN LHASA. 175 Nygirang lui ma nyong ; Lhdsd- la khd-ts’ok dhende ma gydk. Di gong hdchangne chd’-ki-yé’. Ngdrang tangka chi’ khe-ru do- qyu re’. Gong dhe len-te, ngdrang-lé pe-chha nang ro nang. Jhi-i ts'ong-khang ghd re’ ; ten 70 nang. T’om-la jha ts ong-wa. Jhii rik ghang yo'pe ? ~ Nd-so-s0; t'dmche kho-jhe yo’, Jhd di rik ghang é yo’? Pdrkd-yi dek-khd ghd ts's’ ? Di rik-kyi dek-khd is’ angma yi’, Dhe sol-jhd-i Rving-la ghang Ser ? Kusho, soljha dhe angki #'eb-bo yo’ (lit: “that tea, it is the thumb,” s.e., best) ; Ming di Du-t'ang angki dhangpo Fer Jhung. Parka re-re-ld shrang chi’ dha- rung tangka nyi di rin di re’. Jha §hemma Du-t'ang angls nyi-pa re’ ; dhe rik nyi-pa re’. Rik sumpa di Gye'pa ser yo’; dhang t'd-ma di Goka re’. Pd’po-i tsong-mi-la lam ten r0 nang. Dhe-ts’o T"om-si-ghang-la wang dhu chhirten tsdnai dg'-ki-re’. Dhe-ts’o ts’ong-zok ghang ts'ong wa ? Kho-ts’o-yi bhumpa, gyenchhd, dhilbhu ; kho-ts’'o Lhdsdchen Eu SR Re I a ee ni Eg TL Es Rd I SAL pa SL] TIBETAN GRAMMAR, smiths and iron mongers of Lhés4; they are skilled arti- ficers and make the large gilt-copper domes and gya- p'ik for temples: Turn to the left; now see the Palpo workshops ! Over each door is a round red mark and under the red cir- cle is a white crescent: you enter thus—beneath those low narrow door-ways, down three or four steps : Some of these Nipalese are chemists and some are dyers : This is a gold-worker’s shop ; enter and see what he sells: Sir, salaam; what can this bumble one do for your worship : I want a golden charm-box with turquoise and pearls : Here is what you want: See upon it what kind of tur- quoises there are! six “yu- puk” the most precious sort, and many of the good kinds of turquoise‘ t'ukmar"” and ¢t'uk-kar.” Here also are coral beads. All those are the thumb. No bad ones at all: sérgdr chdkgdr yo’ ; kho-ts’o dzo-pa kyen-po yin-nai kam- bung qydp'ik ser-Sangchen chhempo dzo-ki-re’ gompe ton- la. Yin ngo-la or chhok-la do got; tandd Pd’pochen zo-khang la tov §hok ! Go-t'8’la re-re tak mar-po ril-ril yo'te gormo marpo-yi wok-la dd-wa chhye'chok yi'pe: dhe go't'em-kyt wokla—men {’d- mo—rt’emso sum §hi sho’dhu— dhende nang-la p’ep ro. '@’po khd-she mén-ts’ongkhen khd-she ts'ot-gydk-khen re’, Di-kd ser-zo-pa-yi khang-pa re’ ; pep-la ghang ts'ongpa di to ro chik. Kusho, chhd’p’ep; t'embhu di nyi-rang-ght dhindhu ghang dze’cho-gha ? Ngd-la ser-gyi sung-gd-wo dhang yu-chd mutik dhang kho-jhe’ yo’. Ngi'rang-la ghang kho-wai dhe di-ka yo’. Dhe-la yu-kys rik ghang tov ro mang shik! yu- p'uk dhuk chik rik rim pochhe tukmdr t'uk-kar mangpo yu- kyi rik le-mo dhe-la yo’. Dir kyang jhu-ru-i ali yo’. Dhe- yi ts'angma angki t’eb-bo yo’ nai ; la-re rik akpo me’. SHOPPING IN LHASA. 177 I want a silver clasp and a kabzoma of gold with jasper and amber beads on it : We sell silver things by weight: (lit: ““ Like what (ghande) the weight of silver shall come, like that those things are sold.”) All is settled (e. e., The busi- ness is concluded). Weigh these ear-rings and buckles on the steel yards : What weight ? Excellency : fourteen sho : Will you dye this pulo red : Only Tibetan cloth is legally permitted to be dyed : Where do the Kashmiri mer- chants live ? Their shops are very fine ; there is nothing that is not collec- ted together there : You can buy poultry, eggs, fruit, and tsampa at the Wangdu-siga market : This sheep is plump : Your servant will buy mutton at the Gya-gyo-wak-sha market : Meat is very cheap in Lihisa: The sinful butchers are Mussal- mans who kill all meat out- side Lhasa at Chiri : 23 Ngarang-la ngul-kyr chhabtse dhang ser-kyi kabzoma §hik dhang dhe-la yangti-i ali, poshel-kyi ali kyang kho-jhe’ yo’. Ngul-kyi karka ghdnde vy&'pa, dhende ts’ong-wa yin. T"amche gho-chd’ jhung (or chd’ ts’ar). Ai-kor chhabma di-ts’o gydma- la tek ro chik : Karka ghd, ts’a’ ? Kusho ; 8ho chubsha. Kyo'kyt t'erma di marpo ts'ot gyak-gyu-re’. T’im-la Pi'kyt t'ruk kar-kyang ts’ot gyak chhok. Kha-chhe ts'ong-pa di ghdru de’ pa? Dhe-yi ts'ong-khang dze-bo chhe re’; dher dzompa me’pa chik kyang me’. T"om Wang-dhu-siga la khyim- Jhya gong-do, shing-t’ok, tsam- pa, nyo ts'uk. Luk di ts’ompo re’. Nyi'kyt yokpo Gya-gyo-wak-shd t'om-la lukshi nyo yong. Lhasa-la sha kye-po re’. Dikchen shempa Chiri-la Lhdsd-1 chhyi-lo’ la shd kin-kyt shrok se’ pa-yi Khd-chhe-pa yo’. PEL A TON A YI RRR a Ce 178 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Buy some curry-powder for Khd-ghang nyi-la p'ing-ship nyo two kha-ghang; it is dear chi’ ; Lhésd la dhe kyong-po in Lhasa. re’, Weigh this carefully on the Di-ka gya-ma-la nya-ra-kyi tek- steel yard and reckon the nar nyvrang-ght su-an-pan price by your su-an-pan. nang §hin rin di tsi-nai gyak ro cha’. Measure the length of that : Dhe-kyi ring t'ung ts'e’ jal cha’, VISIT TO KIN-KHOR-DING. [This is one of the appellations of the principal temple in Lhésa ; but the place is also known familiarly as Cho-khang or the “ Lord’s House.” Sarat Chandra Das describes it fully under this name in his secret Report (un- published as yet); whilst the Survey explorer A. K. alludes to it thus: “In the centre of the city stands a very high square temple called Jhio, the roof of which is covered with golden plates. The images in it are numerous, but the most important of these are of Jhio Sikia Muni and of Palden Lhamo. The idols are richly inlaid with gold and precious stones, and have various ornaments round their necks ”’] :— To-day the Nirvana morth begins : To-day the Lord Buddha be- came Bhagawan : All persons will go to the Cho- khang to do homage to the precious lord : Let us go early : There will be a great crowd : What shall we take with us: Everybody is taking incense- sticks : Anything else : They are carrying bowls of butter for the sacred lamps ; also scarves of various kinds : Dhe-ring Sdga-diawa di jhung (““ arises’). Dhe-ring-la Jho-wo Sdng-gyai di Ohomdendar dub jhung. Kye-wo kiin Cho-khang-la do-naz, Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi §hdb-la ku-rim dze-yong. Or: Kiin Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi $hab-la ku-rim dze'par dhon-dhu Cho- khang-la do-gu-yin. Ngda-sar do-gyu-yin. Tom chhempo chi’ ts’o yong. Ngdcha-la chhd ghang khyer-wd ; Kiin-kyi poi-rengbhu len-ghi- dw. Dharung yo'dham ? Mar-me-yi dhon-dhw marchen- ky: p'orpa dhdrung khd-td na-ts'o-ts’o khyer-ghi re’. CHIEF TEMPLE AT LHASA. 179 We will withdraw from the throng and go up this lane : Now we are near the Cho- khang : Do you see yon tall poplar : Well! what is it: That poplar grows up from the sacred hair of Buddha lying beneath it : And do you see that column there : Tell me what it means : That column is a memorial of the victory by Tibetans over the Chinese: Behold the portico of the Cho- khang! We will enter : First, we enter the Ti-tsang- khang : Now the image-keeper comes ; he will explain everything : This one is the famous image of the most precious lord (Buddha) : This image here is not the representation of him as Buddha: in this figure he is only 12 years old; and therefore you see a young prince but not the Victorious One Perfected : See you; the face is remark- ably beautiful : Mi-ts'ok dhang ghye-nai lam- shrang di ghyen-la do-gyu- Yin. Dhdta Chokhang-ghi tsdnai lep- song. Hd-gi sho’po ringpo di tong chog-ghd ? Ydkpo ! Ghang é du’ ? Dhe wok-la Jho-woi td-dho-ker kur tang Shu-pai, sho’po di t'ung jhung. Pd-gv do-ring dhe-la £'ong-ghd ? Dhe ghang yin ngd-la she’. Pi’pa-yi Gyd-ndk-pa la jom- pa-v wang-dhu shor-na je-do §hik doring dhe lang-nas de’. Cho-khang-ght ka-chen-kyi gyd- go di toi-shik! Nang-la do- gyu-yin. Nyiin-la Ti-tsang - khang - ghi nang-la §hug-ghin-du’. Dhi-td ku-nyer di yong-ghi-re’ ; khorang kiin she’-yong. Di-ka Jho-wo Rimpochhe-yi ku- ten rdk-chen di yd’. Di ku-ten di Sang-gye-kyi yib ma re’ : di yib-la khong (for khorang) lo chu-nyi ting-la mempe mi yong ; dhende gydl- shrdi §hon-nu §hik tong rung, Chomdendar di t'ong-ghi-me’. Nyi-rang §i shik! Ser-§hdal (“the golden face,” honorific for shal) di nyam=ts'arwa re’. 180 Yonder stands the image of Tsong-khédpa. Beside him has been placed the fossil rock named Amolonkha : Why is that piece of rock there ; and what is that bell upon it: » Tsongkhapa discovered that rock himself in a cavern; and that bell is the bell which was used by Mongal- puttra : Over there in that chapel you see the blessed eleven-faced Chenresi : That figure was made at the command of King Srong- tsan-gampo; and then the king and his four wives having died, their spirits were absorbed into that image : It is a marvellous image : Pass into the outer courtyard : In the courtyard stands the effigy of Tho-wo-me-tsikpa: further on have been placed Tang-tong Gyal-po, and the lo-tsé-wa Marpa : Tang-tong Gyalpo lived 60 years in his mother’s womb before birth : But look! what numbers of mice are running about: TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Ha-gi-la Tsong - khdpa-yi ku- ten di deng-te di’. Dhe-tsd-né dhak kampo Amolonkhd dhen- de jha-wa di 8hak-ne du’. Ha-gi p’d-wong dhe ghang-la ten- nai, di @hilbu di yang dhe-s tengkha ghang dw’ ka ? P’uk-pa nangla Tsongkhdpa nyi- rang-ght p’'d-wong dhe nye Jhung ; di dhilbu di Mongal- puttra-yi pempa jhye’ne yo’. P’é-kr lhaten-la Chenress chuche- shélchen kdalden dv ta chok. Song-tsen-gampo Gydlpo-v kd solndr dv kuten di §o jhung-te, dhe-nar gydlpo dhe dhe-yi tsiin-mo §hi dub §hing la p’ep- ne di p’ungpor nangla khong- ghi sem-ts’o ts'uk jhung re’. Ten ngo-ts’archen chi’ la so. P’i-yi khyam-ra-la dul nang. Khyamrd-la T"o-wo-me-tsikpdi-3 kunda dv Shak-ndi-dw’ : dhe pen-chhe’ Tang-tong - Gyalpo dhang Marpa lo-tsiwa $hu- ndi-re’. Kye-wii ngen-la Tang-tong Gyal- po yum-kyi lhum-kyi bug-la lo dhuk chu §hu-ghi re’. Yinna-yang toi tang! tsiki du- du kor-kor gyuk. Monks have transmigrated into Khor-la ge-long-ts'o ni tsi-ki tern those mice : qYuUr-song. BEGGARS IN LHASA. 181 Upstairs there are other Tsang- khang and other shrines : What gods shall we see up- stairs : In the Bar-khang are Lha-mo Mék-jorma and the god Tamdin : Greatest of all, the image of Paldan Lha-mo is above : Well, well ; we must perform full homage another day : Yes, Sir: We cannot make the circuit of all at one time : Give some bakshish to the idol-keeper : Ya-t'ok la Tséng-khang Shen tang kuten $hen Shi yo’. Yd-t'ok la lhd ghang §i-gyu ? Bar-khang ki nang-la Makjorma Lhamo Tamdin Lhé §hu-so. Teng-la, ts’angma nangne chhem- po, Panden Lhi-mo §hii-so. Yak-po, ydk-po; Shak Shen la ngd-chdék chhdoi-jal yong-su ts’al gon. Lha, la-so. Ngai tsar-chik la kang-gha-i chhoi-khor gyu chok-pa me’. Ku-nyer la solrd (or chd-ga) ter nang. THE SCAVENGER BEGGARS. There are some scavengers hastening after me: I will not listen to them : I shall treat them with con- tempt : An alms, an alms; give, give ! I have nothing to give you : We are very poor men: You shall bestow some present : Get away, you rogues, you vultures : Give, give! you are rich : I shall call the watchmen : Ta-ta ro-gya-wa $hik ngas je-la nyek-kv duk. Nga dhe-tak la t'67 gyu man. Nga kho-chik la ngen-chhen ten- gyu-yin-no. Dom-bu, dombu; ter-mang, ter- nang. Nya khyd’la ter gyu chang me’. Ngadcha wil-p’ongpa re.’ Khyd’ la chd-g& §hik chin gor. Ha-la gyuk! ngempa-po khyo’ ! cha-lak khyo’! Jhin! Jhin! Khys' chhuk-po duk. Ngan korchakpa la ke tang-gyu- yin, gee gt AS ety tera ARAB LONI i ae RT BI I 182 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Call, call! you must give one Rdk! Rdk! Khys' la tanka tanka : One tanka! not even a khi- gang : You have been a month in Lbésd, yet there is nothing at all for us: Who cares! Who cares! I shall not give you anything : Ah then! wait until we get you (lit: come to us): Don’t bawl like that, filthy Rogya-pa: All right; listen here! when you are a corpse, tying a rope to your neck we will drag you like a dog outside the gates of the city. We will tear you to pieces : Come along : these scavengers are indeed the pests of Lhasa: They have been bawling away at me: Where do they live: They live on the eastern side, beyond Bhanakshol, in houses built of bone: Though they dress in rags, they are very rich : Remember it is thus said of them :—‘ Though outside their houses bristle with chik ter gos. Tangka chi’! Khd-kang chi’ ld-re me.’ Da-wé chi’ nat khys'rang Lhdsd- la p'ep rung ngd-ts'o-la chang me’. A-u-se! G-u-se! Ngdrang-ghi ye ma ter-gyu-re’ (or ye ter-gyu ma re’), Jhyd-ra! ngd-ts'o-la leb-pa tuk guk-te do’chik. Rogyd-pa ts'ichen ! Dhende chd- cho ma gyap. Tik-t'ik ; di-la nyon shik! Khyorang ro-ne p'o-wa-la, rang-ghi ke-la t’dkpa chhing- nai, khyi dhang da-te khyorang dhong-khyer-kyi go-mo p’en- chhe’ dri’ yong. Chhdk-tum-la khyd'rang shral- gyu-re’. Nyampo shok : ro-gya-wa di Lhasd-v ngen-rim mo’ do. Khongts'o ngdrang-la mangpo bar ghi-yo’. Ghé-pa de’-ki-du’ ? Shar-chhyok-la, Bhana-sho’ p’en- chhe’-la, rui-pd-chen khyim-la nar-ghi-re’. Shrulpo ghyon rung, kho-la or mangpo re’, Sem-la ngei chi’—* P'i-lok-la di khyim di rd-cho-ne tsup- tsup jhung rung; nang-lok-la CC —— BOATING TERMS. 183 dhe kho-na nak-kyang-ne sak sék ts’er” dhende sung-ghi-yo'. horns, inside indeed they sparkle with coins.” Many persons are afraid of the Ngar-po-chen yi’pai rogyd-wa scavengers who are very di ghachhen-kyi jik jhung. ferocious : LAKES: RIVERS: BOATING. Rudder : kyd-jik. Bridge: §ampa : Rope : t'dkpa : (of goats’ hair), Ford : gal-ku ; rép. Lake : so. Salt-lake : ts’ékha. Mere : ts'e-u. River: tsédng-po; chhu-wo. Brook : bap-chhu. Torrents : risdrchhu. Streamlet : chhu-¢t'en. Spring : chhu-mzk. River’s-source : chhu-go. Bank : dam. Reeds : nyuk-ma. Running-water : gyuk-chhu. Storm : #s’ibma, Row, to: kyd gyap-pa. Swim, to: kydlwa. Ford, to: gdlwa (cross over). Fasten, to: chhing-wa. Bale, to: chhu-wa. Pull, to: den-pa. Bathe, to: f'u-wa. Current : gyiin. Bathed : f’i1 song. Boat: dhu (in Khams : dru). Small-boat : nyen. Boat of hide: ko-a. Ferry: dhu-kha. Boatman : dhu-pa, ko-khen. Back water, to: len-la sho-mo Boat-hire: dhu-la. kempa. Sail: Darchhen. Steer, to: khd-lo gyurwa. Swamp, to: nup chukpa. Sink, to : jing-wa (neuter verb). Leaky : chhe’'po. Landing-place : tang-sa. Oar: kya. Starting-place : Shdng-khd. This lake is 32 1é-bors round : ~~ Ts'o-t kor-lam di le-bor so-nyi yo’. There are many lakes in Ru-t'ok nangna ts'o mdngpo Rutok : shu jung. The water looks smooth : The wind is rising : The water appears rough : Chhu dhe jam-jam nang-ki duk. Lung lang-ki-duk. Chhu dhe tsub-tsub nang-ki-duk. i i , | { 8 1] } 184 Are there any dangerous rocks in this lake : Is the current swift: Tie the boat fast : The oar is broken : Don’t push with the oar: Turn the boat to the right: The boat is not steady : Which way does the river flow : (lit : “The flow of the river is to where P)”’ Lower down, the current be- comes more strong : The river is very full : Is there a bridge across the river : Is the river-water fit to drink : We must not go too near to the cataract : Where do the rivers meet : TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Ts'o-i mang-na nyén-chén-kyi tak da shak-pa ? Chhu-gyiin tak-po yinna ? Tru di tsdn chhing. Kya di chhak pa yin (or chhak song). Kyd ché’ ndi, ma pul ts'uk. Tru ydi-su gyur shok. Ko-d dv di’-ts’uk me’. Tsang-poi gyuk-chhu di ka-la yo'pai ? Men-la, gyiin di lhak tak jhung. Chhu t'on chhe tam song ; or Ohhu hd-changne t'on song. Ohhu-wo't kong-la §am-pa dw’- ka ? Tsangpo di-i chhu kyem yi’ pas ? Ri-sar-chhu-v dam-tu yong gyu mi rung. Chhu-do di kala yim-pa ? Take care: the boat will up- Nyon chik! Dhu di gyel yong. set : Row hard to the shore: Look out! Take care : Can you swim: Does the river pass through that narrow gorge: Keep the coats dry, if possible : There 1s a hole in the boat: Push the boat to the further shore : North of Lhasa is a vast lake called Namts’o Chhid-mo : Dam-tu rém-rém gydk. Tov shok! Nyon chik! Khyo’ kyal chok-ga ? Dv chhu-wo dv p’dght dak tok- po sep-la bab-kin dw’-ka ? Tuk-po-nam dv kem-kem shrung ro tong. Khun shik dhu bug-la chung. P’-chhyok tuk dhu-la p’ul. Lhasd-i jhangla ts'o chhempo chi’ di-ne dhe-v ming-la nam- ts’o chhyi’mo dhendai Ser yi’. EXCLAMATORY PHRASES. 185 The Mongolian name of that lake is Tengri Nur: There are a few lakes in Tibet larger than Namts’o Chhid- mo : The Yamdok lake is famous for the large island in the midst of it. The name of this island is To-nang : What is the name of that flower : That one on the bank : Tie the boat-rope to that tree : Ts'o di-v khd sok-po di Tengri Nur Ser duk. Pi-yul kyi ts'o-nam khd-chik Ndm-ts'o Chhuk-mo lai chhé duk. Tso Yamdok di shung-ma la ling-ka chhempo tang den-pa rakchen jhung. Ling-ka-yt ming di Tondng Ser yo’ ? Me-tok dhe-i ming kang duk-ka ? Dhe dam teng-ki me-tol dhe yi’. Dhu-ré dv shing dhe tengla tak. EXCLAMATORY PHRASES. Td-sht shik : Good luck to you! Tot shok : Look out ! Nyon shik : Listen ! Look here ! Mi-kyon, mi-kyon : No harm done ! Mztok, mitok: No matter, no matter ! Kham-lok jhe’ : 1t is sickening ! Khii’ ze’ jhy?’ : Hold your skirt out! (as receptacle for alms) Ha-la khur song : Be off with it ! Khye’ khye’ : Quite enough ! Dhe ghd-la p’en : What's the use of that! T’ik-t'ik : All right ! Ala-la : Capital ; excellent ! Yd'-po, yd’-po: Good, good ! Certainly ; 24 Dhe-gé y#’: So it is! To be sure ! Yd-ya: Yes! Min : No! A-tséma : Ah me! Alas! Oh dear ! Oji; Oji: Salaam (in Khams) Ghdle shu : Stay in peace ! Nyar gov : We must take care ! Chéghd jhe : Be careful with it ! Rikpa gyim : Take care ! Ghang-la §hu : Well then ? Ld ld-so : Aye, aye, Sir! Kiso kav: As you will, Sir! Chhédk p’ep : Welcome (salaam)! Gha-le p’ep : Farewell ! Nyampo shok : Come along ! Tsa-dhak jhyy’ : Make haste ! P’vmo ma yong : Don’t be late. Gyang ma jhy?' : Gor ma gor: Don’t delay. 186 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Ohang-rik jhyv shik: Really Shu-le, kusho: Good-day, Sir! attend ! Ah chhu chhu : Tt 4s cold ! Har-sé jhy’i : Rouse up ! Kid-dhi-chhé : Many thanks ! Rem-rem jhys shik: Exert Tdnpokyot: Tread firmly (form yourself. of farewell in Ladak). MEDICAL TERMS. amchhi : a physician. shu-ndl : inflamed sore. so-t’ab : his mode of treatment. wu-sdkpa : difficult breathing. men : physic—drugs. wolma : larynx, windpipe. ril-bhu : a pill. nang-rol : the bowels them- chhyemdi men : a powder. selves. t'ung : a draught. ten-khok : chest and heart- de-ku : a syrop. region. kyuk-men : an emetic. dho’pa : stomach. shdl-men : purgative. lo: side of the body. §i-men : an opiate. bho-longwa : ankle. men-khang : drug-shop. lii’-pa : phlegm, mucus. tak (FT) : blood. ngul-chhu : perspiration. chhu-ndk : pus; matter. ts’e’par-né : ague. md : a wound. rong-ts'e’ : valley fever. chin : urine (the vulgar word). nd-ts’a : ordinary fever. ri-chhu or ti-chhw : urine (me- mak-ser : jaundice. dical term). t'u-jong : diarrhcea. lo-khok : a cough. jor-men : a plaister. num-§em : a poultice. nyda-gyur : cholera. lhen-dum : small-pox. kydk : excrement. tukpa : wind, flatulence. lang-t'ab : griping of bowels, tsd-u tsukpa : to lance. Jhang-khok-la §uk: intestinal #sd gyakpa: to bleed (surgi- pain. cally). so-Ser : tooth-ache. tsa tdngwa : to go to stool. tsi tokpa: to feel the pulse (which in Tibet is done three times successively with dif- boi : lump from a blow ; bump. ferent fingers). kyukpa : vomiting. burpo : a small boil. shu-wa : an ulcer. MONIES, WEIGHTS, &C. 187 MONIES, WEIGHTS, AND MEASURES. Moxey TABLE. SiLver Coins AND INGOTS. Kha-ghang : =]11 anna. 1 karma =j% anna. Kdr-ngd = 23 annas. 2% karma =1 khdghang. Chip-chhye’ =3% annas. 4 kha-ghang =1 §ho-ghang. Sho-ghang or Miskal =5 annas. 10 8ho-ghang =1 shrang. Genden Tangka =73 annas. 50 shrang =1 do-ts’e or Gyd Tangka is the Indian rupee. yambhu. Nak-sdng =31 rupee. Luk-mi’-ma : silver ingot, size and re shape of a sheep's hoof =R15 annas 10. Yik-mi’-ma : “ yak’s GoLp PiIEcCEs. hoof ”’ =R31 annas 4. Tda-m2’-ma; or Do- Ser-ho = Rupees 9%. tse’ : ingot, shape Ser-sang = Rupees 60. and size of horse’s (Both coins rarely seen). hoof =R1561. N.B.—The common silver tangka coined in Tibet, and known variously as ndk-fang, chi’tang, and Genden tangka, is about the size of an English half penny but thinner. The legend on this coin is EN TA RAR REE IR FRNA It is marked so as to be cut into various pieces; and the khd-ghang, kar-ngd, (i.e., 5 kar- ma), chipchhye’ and §ho-ghang, are merely the tangka cut or broken into 1, 1, 1, and 2 parts respectively. In Khams, the Indian rupee, which is current all over Tibet, is preferred to the tangka, and is styled P'iling gormo. In Sikkim the rupee is termed tiruk, in Ladak girmo, in Central Tibet gyd-fam and chhi-gor. The large silver ingot, styled in Tibet do-ts’e or td-mi'ma, circulates in Tibet, Turkistan, and Mongolia, ydmbhu being the Turki name and Aurs the Mongol term. Its value varies, being sometimes as low in Indian currency as Rs. 125. ——————— a SY ERT TES dali ha ition RN ul Mr ashy ES ———— 188 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. CorN AND LiqQuips. Tea WEIGHTS. 1 gydri=1 1. 1 chdmka=21 or 1 pint. 1 parkhd=4 to 5s. 2 gydri=1 dum. 2 chdmka=1 bre or dhe. 4 parkhd=1 ko-toi. MEeAT MEASURE. 2 dum =1 lhu. 5 bre =1 bo. 3 ko-tov =1 gdm. 3 hu =1 zuk. 4 bo =1 khal. 2 gdm =1gdlor 25 khal =1 bhor-ra. gyap. LINEAL MEASUREMENTS. Pi-t'o: span between thumb and forefinger stretched without straining. T’o0-ghang : span between thumb and little finger. Kang-ghang : length from elbow to knuckles. T’u-ghang : distance from elbow to tip of middle finger. Domba : distance from finger-tip to finger-tip, both arms out- stretched. (N.B.—A “piece” of Nambhu cloth at Gyantse measures 9 domba or 54 feet). Gyang-t’dk : distance to which the voice will reach (about 300 yards). | Ts’d¢-lam : distance traversable before breakfast (about 5 miles). Nyin-lam : a day’s journey; differentiated also into luk-pe nytnlam “a sheep-driver’s march ”’ (6 miles) ; kang-t’ang-ghi nyin- lam : “foot-march ;” and td-pe nyin-lam : * a horseman’s march (22 miles). The Chinese L: of 486% yards is frequently used in Eastern Tibet. TITLES, &C., IN TIBET. Gydlwa Rvmpochhe : the Dalai Lama or Grand Lama of Lhasa. Kydp-gon : “* Protector —familiar designation when speaking of the Grand Lama. Dési or Sdkyong : the Regent or Temporal Ruler of Tibet, who is, however, always an ecclesiastic. Gydlis’ap Rimpochhe and Gydlpo : popular titles of the Regent, especially in use in the provinces. TIBETAN TITLES. 189 Ka-lon : official title of each of the five members of the Privy Council, or kdshdk, which advises the Regent in state affairs. Shd-pé (GRAN ““lotos-foot ’) : other and more popular title of a Adlon. De-wa Jong : popular designation for ‘the Tibetan Govern- ment” or “ Grand Lama’s jurisdiction.” Kélon-shik Lhen-gyai (AMR EFT EFT), the full designation of the Regent's Council, supreme in Judicial, Legisla- tive and Executive Administration. Kailon-T"i-pa : the Speaker or Chairman of the Council. Ne . a Chyi-khydb Khempo (3 BINRFA"): the sole ecclesiastical member of the Council (the other four being laymen) who is now the brother of the former Dalai Lama and known as the Lha-lu Td Lama at Lhasa and also by the Chinese name of T§ Lama. Ampdn WJ : title of the two representatives of Chinese interests at the Court of Lhasa and whose “advice” is of paramount influence at the present day in Tibet. Panchhen Rimpochhe: the Head Lama of Tashi-lhiimpo Monastery and titular temporal ruler of the province of Tsang. He is held to be the incarnation of the 4th Dhyani Buddha, W¢’ pakme’ ea - (ARRAS) Génden De-pa Lama : the Head of the Gélden Monastery, said to rank in Ui ecclesiastically next after the Gyalwa Rimpochhe. He is not an incarnate lama, but is nominated, under Chinese influence, ostensibly on the choice of the Kalons. Kusho P’akpa Do-gin : the Head of the Sé-kya Monastery. Mid-pa Lama : the Head of the Sera Monastery, near Lhésa. Dong-pa Lama : the lay co-ruler of Mindol Ling (SFR) the principal Nyingma monastery in Tibet. 190 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Mi Rimpochhe : title borne by the Head of the great Jhang Téklung Monastery, 40 miles north of Lihdsa. Ohdsdk : the Regent’s secretary or deputy. The Grand Lama has also a Chasak. Dd lo-ye : ampans’ aide-de-camps (two in number). Kd-dhung (RMA'QR") : secretaries of the Kd-lons. No T’im-pin-chyt : the Chief Judge of Lhdsd from whom appea lies sometimes direct to the K4-lons. Shdl-chhe-pa : literally ‘ the Big-faced One ;” another Judge. Chhik-dzi’-pa : government Treasurers at Lhas4, five in number to whom the Jongpons pay in the revenue they collect in the provinces. Jong-pon : officials, mainly civil but with a limited military ~e control, who govern the various Jongs (NRK) or petty districts into which all Tibet (save in the Jhang-t’ang) is portioned out, collecting revenue, &c.; answering to our “ Collectors ” in India. Of these there are 53. Chyi-khyab of Nyé-grong in Khams is the Dalai Lama’s Commis- sioner for the administration of this special portion of the king- dom. He ranks above the 53 ordinary Jong-pons. Garpin of Rudok: a special governor of the western districts of Gart’'ok and Rudok conjointly. Dhung-khor-pa : civilian officers; working in Lhdséd as sub- ordinates to the Kd-dhung or Ka-lons’ secretaries, but in the pro- vinces under the Jong-pon, to the office of which they aspire to attain. Tse-rung-pa : ecclesiastical office-clerks ranking with the fore- going and managing the financial business of very large monasteries -~ Ser-yik-pa (FINK WATE “ golden-letter bearer”): name given to special envoy of the Emperor of China or of the Dalai Lama, bearing presents and formal greetings between the two Courts. Tulkw : any incarnate lama, ¢.e., a lama holding in his person- ality the spirit of some departed saint. TIBETAN TITLES. 191 v — . Kusho ( A MIN ) : title of honour placed before the per- sonal name of a person of position, lay or clerical, male or female. Rimpochhe : “ most precious;” title added after the names of Incarnate lamas and heads of important Gompas; sometimes appended to official designation, sometimes to personal name. Lhd and Kusho are frequently used in first addressing persons as we should say “ Sir” and “My Lord.” Pombo : also Pombo Rimpochhe : *“ Officer |” “most precious chief ; ’ forms of address to Government officials. Lhdcham FIN : female title like our “Lady.” Tt is affixed to the names of the wives and widows of lay notables. Often also used alone when speaking of or to such ladies. Cham Kusho : honorific female title, but inferior to lhdcham. Cham-chhung : unmarried ladies’ title answering to our ¢ Miss” or perhaps rather ‘ Hon’ble Miss; as it is only applied to the upper classes. Lha-yum Kusho : lady dowager. - Khempo (NR A"): abbot or head of the larger monasteries ; but said to be a Degree attaching personally and not necessarily to the holders of particular offices ; perhaps like our D.D. De-pa '&l"): territorial chiefs having feudal authority, but P g y without prejudice to the paramount claims of the Tibetan Govern- ment ; a common title in Eastern districts where sounded Deba. ne T’so-pin (BREF) : president of the headmen of a set or “circle ”’ of villages, elected by his brother headmen to control the whole khor or circle in its relations with other village circles. =e > : Pi-pon (3 554’) : ordinary headman of a single village. Gen-po or Gen-sum : village elders who (as in Russia) elect the Pi-pon. (erpa : zemindar or land-owner Foe aD TA Ca = Ho —————— a re al 192 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Mi-ser : tenants of small-holdings, held from monasteries or noblemen or direct from Crown. A numerous class answering to the small farmers in Ireland or crofters in Scotland ; but sub- jected to considerable taxation of produce and with heavy liaki- lities of personal service (td-# and u-ldk). P’d-piin and P’d-ts’en : in a village, those denizens of it having the same lha or household god. Ts’e-yok : * life-servants ” or slaves, reduced to that condition through gambling or debts, and, occasionally, by capture and purchase. RELIGIOUS EDIFICES; AND ADJUNCTS THEREOF. Ling : a large collegiate monas- tery analogous to the Chris- tian abbey. Chhoidé: a lamasery where Tantrik and occult studies are specially followed. Gompa (often Gomba) : any ordinary lamasery, large or small. Shigin : small village gompa with only 3 or 4 inmates in adjacent huts. Ta-ts’ang : special schools or “chairs” established within the larger monasteries, for the teaching of particular doctrines and generally en- dowed with property, land, &e. Puk: a recluse’s cave, often inaccessible to outsiders, and usually such caverns are found together in a colony styled Ri-f’o1. Name also | given to any set of hermits’ cells, not necessarily caverns. Ri-t’0i-ba : the dwellers in the Puk. Chhorten : cenotaphs of stone, built upon a series of square steps, and often containing a saint’s relics, They follow one general pattern capable of certain modifications and are of all sizes; being mostly small solid masses of ma- sonry ; yet in some cases ex- aggerated into huge struc- tures 8 or 9 storeys high, containing chapels, shrines, images, and relics, as in the fine chhortens at Gyangtse and Jhampa Ling. Mendang : long narrow heap of inscribed stones banked-up betwixt two low lenthy parallel walls. Sometimes, as in one example at Leh, more RELIGIOUS than a mile long, and is formed by degrees from every pious traveller, as he passes, depositing a slab inscribed with sacred formuls. Mdny Khorlo (or simply khorlo) : prayer cylinders, both the portable ones worked in the hand like a child’s rattle and the large barrels fixed on pivots. Those worked by running streams are styled Chhu-Fkhor. Mdni Lhdkhang : shed or house sheltering series of prayer- barrels arranged like a system of huge bobbins; so named when isolated from any reli- gious edifice. Tsuk-la-khang : the temple at- tached to large monastery. Lhd-khang : ordinary temple isolated from any monastery. Du-khang : worship-hall of a Gompa. Ts’ 0-khang : - general congrega- tion-hall in large Gompas where public ceremonials are held. Gong-khang : chapel in temple wherein the images of demons and “terrific deities” are segregated. Gyi-ptk ; or Gep’i: a cube- shaped structure with con- cave sides, being a wooden framework covered with gild- 25 - Lab-ding : EDIFICES. 193 ed metal plates, and placed as a dome on temples. enclosure where travellers can pitch tents. Sung-bum : conical stone oven outside houses in which juni- per is burnt as offering to propitiate evil spirits. Lii-ku : metal images. Dempa : large erect figure of any deity. Nydk lu-ku : licentiously-posed figures. Diin-chok : offering-table for flowers. Shu-mar: chief lamp before the larger images. Mar-me: small lamps burning before deities; and used in large numbers at kangsharites. They are small brass bowls of butter with floating wicks. Chhé’ kyok : libation-bowl; some- times made of skull with gilded metal cover and with stand beautifully chased and ornamented. Frequently known as ¢s’e ght bhumpa. Mé-long : convex mirror of oval shape over which, in fore- casts, holy water is poured. Damarw: small drum com- posed of two skull-tops fasten- ed back to back, the opening on either side being covered with ~~ prepared fish-skin; 194 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. sometimes having pendant tassels of bunches of human hair. Dorje : sacred implement held in the hand during ceremonials and shaped like very small hand-dumbells with open- work knob at each end. Ori- ginally meant to represent a thunderbolt. Pur-bhu : ornamental-headed brass javelin with three-sided spike, used by priests during exorcisms against The original p’urbhu is in | Sera Gompa, Lhésa. Kang-dhung : long thin trum- et made of lollow human | P thich-bone : sometimes the joint-cud has a piece of hu- man skin very neatly sewn | round it, or a thong-like piece hanging to it. Used in tem- ple ceremonial, Dhilbh : with elaborate handle. Dhung-kar : Conch-shells, biown small brass bed as interludes in congregation- al book recitals. Dhung-chhen : great copper trumpet, about 8 feet long, blown at 3 a. m. to summon inmates of gompas to the morning rites in the du-khang. Requires two men to hold itup. Yai-khyil Dhung-kar: white conch-shell with whorl twist- demons. | ing to right, very rare and when of large size, almost priceless. Used in monas- teries as calling horns. Gyd-ling : long cornet-like tram- pet with holes and stops. Ré-dung : copper trumpet or horn without side-holes or stops. Roi-ma CESER small brass cymbals in pairs. SN Si-nyen (RNTF) cymbals of better tone and with cloth pad to hold with on either side. Ngd: large drums with long handles placed in temples and often taken out for ceremonies in houses. Ghang-ngd : large heavy metal gong. ) Ydng-yik : music-score used in more elaborate temple-music for trumpets and conches. Bumpa : flagon for holy-water, with a lid and long spout, and with holes at top for tall bunch of peacock-feathers. Tw -bum (RNAI) one of the varieties of Bumpa; a small teapot-like vessel clad in red nabSa and with pea- cock feather in hole at top. Often of silver. Chhdb-bum : much larger variety like a tea-urn with spout and TEMPLE APPARATUS. 195 with receptacle in lid for | Bdk: masks for use in devils’ flowers. Sometimes termed Jhya-ma-bum. Shin-dhi (95535) or Shin- tong : a tall open copper vessel. Nabid : wrappings of coloured silk or satin put on idols, books, bowls, &c., and regard- ed as the “clothes” of such implements. Torma : many kinds of sacrificial offering are thus styled ; but name usually applied to small | stamped | effigies of butter with various sacred devices, | or else to pieces of wood or | moulded clay, coloured, on | which are plastered small slabs and medals made of | butter. Pii-rengbu : incense-tapers, very | | | | thin and generally coloured | pink, burning rapidly and | emitting slight odour; used by | visitors to shrines who light them at lamp burning before | image they would honour. Mendré : small cone, bee-hive- | shaped, stuck all over with raw rice, with dabs of paint here and there, and placed near the Shu-mdr. A hole in the apex serves as a receptacle or vase for unused and partly- burnt incense-tapers. dance on the Guru Pema festival. When not in use are hung up on the walls of temples, with coloured robes and sleeves draped beneath to represent body of face depic- ted by mask. Kyilkhor : framework or shelves on which series of images are grouped; also any sacred diagram on floor (mandal.) Gyen-ts’en (JRNEF') : the Buddhist “flag of victory.” Seen in two styles: (1) a tall cylinder of black felt with a white line or insertion encircling it near lower end, and two vertical lines of white running from top to bottom other white band. Closed in at at right-angles to top where it narrows so as to be often almost like a shut umbrella, and sometimes surmounted by metal trident. (2) Also, made up of three colours, red, yellow, and blue, arranged flounce-like one above the other, with a white flounce between each colour; and placed on tops of poles which are planted in the ground near temples and chhortens. The first kind ll nasser ttiezmem———————— i ————— a ——————— son — ' 196 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 197 decorate the eaves of gompas thas are made and planted AMPA (FRNA), the Buddha to come (Sansk: Maitreya), and palaces. beside the path nearest to generally pourtrayed as seated European- Ddr-chho and Lungtad : flags in- the house. As they are or JHAMPA GoMPO : fashion and not as other ‘deities. Many scribed with mystic formula and strips of coloured cloth fastened to tall poles; the wind fluttering the flags and so uttering the prayers print- ed thereon. Lung-td signifies supposed to resemble the natural dwelling of demons which cause sickness, the demons are presumed to be enticed therein out of the sick man’s body. gigantic figures exist; one 70 feet high at Potala ; another 180 feet high in Jhampa Bum-ling temple in Amdo; others in the Rong Jhamchhen Gompa in Tsang and in Daipung Monastery. These huge images are styled Jhamchhen. 4 airy horse.” Wo pAkME’ ; or th . . Shol-dum : gauze cylinder placed Eu © Sanskrit Amitabha the Dhyani Bud- Ts’e-pAkye’ : dha from whom emanated the famous Chen. - Li (FY) or R Ds (in over lamp; at top a metal Emre e ren Sari Sikkim) : reeds or very thin straight twigs about 2 feet in height, strung with yarn of various colours and bits of stick, in close likeness to the yards and rigging on a ship’s mast. When anyone is sick, rod, projecting therefrom, holds another smaller cylinder of paper inscribed with prayers above the lamp-flame; and, being freely suspended, the draught from the flame causes it to revolve. JHO0-0 MI1-KYD' raisi. He is incarnated in the successive Panchhen Rimpochhe of Tashilhiimpo, who is thus spiritual father of the Grand Lama of Lh4s4. the Dhyani Buddha corresponding to the Sanskrit Akshobhya. A gilt image of this being, said to be 1,200 years’ old, is the chief treasure in the Ramochhe temple at Lhés4. JHo-0 CHeN-Rarsi: the great protecting genius of Tibet, in- carnated in the Grand Lama of Lhasi. He 1s a Ye-shet Sem-Pa or Dhyani Sattwa, spiritually emanating from Wo'pakme’, though actually born from a lotos. Usual- ly depicted with eleven faces and many arms (properly 1,000) and in the palm of each hand an eye. His full Tibetan name 1s Spyan-ras-gzigs Dbang-pyug (Sansk : Avalokiteswara.) JAM-YANG ; or JAM- known as the Shin-nur gyurpa or Renew- PAL : er of Youth; a Dhyani Sattwa, in sanctity second only to Chenraisi. He is constantly incarnated in the current Head of Sakya Monastery. Appears in temples seated, with crossed in-folded legs and upturned soles, on a large lotos. Brandishes gadd or mace in right hand and a dorje in his left. TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. The following are the colloquial designations of the more popular deities, saints, &c., whose effigies are to be seen in Tibetan temples :— SANG-GYE SHAKYA Buddha Shakyamuni, the Buddha who T’uBra; or JHO-0 last appeared on earth; known also as RIMPOCHHE : Chomdendai, and familiarly as ‘the Jho.” There are said to be three original or “ self- sprung” images of the Jho: one in the Jho- khang at Lhasd, representing him as a boy of 12; one in the Chan-than-sze temple at Peking, as an adult; and a third in the golden temple of Kumbum, near Koko Nur, as an old man. Copies in bronze of these three occur in the chief Tibetan temples. A —————————————— ER i { i { ag | | { | { H | it! a | it : i | i ! i { | iH a fit it} Bl it ) ' j it H IEE TTT ———— A —————————_ Dorie CHHANG : LAkxa DorJE; or CHHYAKDOR : LakNA DORJE; or CHHYAKNA DORJE: Dorma (FRE) ; or TO-MA : EDT hp a Aka edie TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Blue lotos sprig is clasped in inner bend of left elbow. Head encircled with high coronet. a third Dhyani Sattwa, who was evolved from the Dhyani Buddha Mi-kyé Dorje. Chief shrine is in Chakpoiri Medical Mon- astery at Lhasa. Often figured in his “terrific aspect ” with screaming face and dishevelled hair, his body painted scarlet. He flourishes the dorje. In Gyantse Chhor- ten is a famous golden statue of this guardian of the Gelukpa order, (Sansk: Vdjrapant). Kashyapa Buddha, or the Atom Eater; a Buddha who lived on earth in a former age. Relics of his corporeal substance seem still plentiful, as they are served up in medical pills obtainable from several Tibetan digni- taries. subduer of evil spirits and guardian of the mystic doctrine. Represented with hang- ing belly and with open mouth displaying three large fangs. Often confounded with Dorje Chhang (also styled Chhyakdor) and also with the next deity. De-pon or Ruler of the Noijin or moun- tain spirits. He may be distinguished from the just-mentioned deity by his green paint or green clothing. Known in Tan- trik ceremonial as ‘ the green-robed Lakna Dorje.” “ She who delivers ;” the chief goddess of Tibet who has ever co-operated with Chenraisi for the good of mortals. Her spirit has disintegrated itself into 21 branch emanations whose images grouped in series are known as a Dolma kyilkhor. Dorie P’Amo; or DoRrJE NALJORMA : PANDEN LuiMo FRESE T’0-NYER CHENMA : TAMDIN : SHINJE ; or DoRJE JIK-JHYE ; TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 199 benevolent goddess at one time incarnated in form of a sow, hence her name “ The Sow with the Dorje.” Often figured in a curious medley of an upright pig backed by one or more females conjoined in one image, Incarnated in lady-abbess of Samd- ing Monastery, Yamdok; but another female incarnation occurs in a community on margin of Namts’o Chhyidmo, a third at Markula in Lahul. The Pig-lady is also specially worshipped at Tsiin-mo-t’ang Gompa in North Sikkim. a ferocious goddess figured in riotous attitude, trampling on the mangled remains of her lovers whom she has decoyed to destruction, and with uplifted bowl from which she is jauntily drinking their blood. Over her arm there dangles a huge rosary of skulls, and she carries both dorje and gada (club). Known also as Pinden Mik- Jorma. another terrifying goddess, “she who is wrinkled with anger,” who was at one time incarnated as Za-khri, Nepalese wife of king Srong-tsan Gampo. a god always painted red and generally in human form, but occasionally appearing with a horse’s head and neck but a man’s body. Classed as a fowo or wrathful deity, because, though well-disposed to men, he terrifies demons by neighing. the Lord of Death, figured with sword and many faces, but has several distinct forms represented. His coercion is one of the chief feats of the Ngik-pa or Tantrik priests who then make use of rosaries formed of discs of human skull or of ele- A ———————— a = NaMm-SE ; or NAM-T’01 SHRE : ZAMBHALA : Me’ -Lus-yI Gya-ro: Pe’-HAR; or CHHOI- KYONG : Goma sHI; or CHHOI- KYONG SHI; or JIK- TEN-KYI GYAL-CHHEN sar; or the “Dik Rajas:” ——, | ll yi TIBETAN GRAMMAR. phant stomach-stone. Shinje is sometimes figured presiding over a cauldron in which he is boiling the heads of the doomed. God of Riches, said to be the same as Kuwera, but title really means ¢ Son of the listening ears.” Usually depicted with retinue of aerial sprites; and he is always painted either yellow or else black. a Ngak li’ or Tantrik deity, often con- founded with Nam-se, and usually figured clasping to his breast with lustful gestures some female deity. king of the fire-spirits, endowed with power to purge from consequences of sin those souls in the Bardo whose form of re- birth is so far undetermined. Figured some- times as seated astride a red ram, sometimes as perched on a huge lotos beneath an um- brella. king of the astrologers, represented in Gompas as a king riding on a yellow or white lion, and robed in tiger-skin. He is the yidam or tutelary deity of the profes- sional astrologers attached to the Ramochhe temple at Lhasa who, as a body, are like- wise known by his name. However, the chief of the class, the incarnation of Pe-har himself, resides at Na-chhung grove near Lhdsd. This personage is styled Ndchhung Chhoikyong, is treated with divine honours, and he it is who forecasts, on a vacancy, the characteristics whereby the new Grand Lama of Lhasa may be identified. synonyms for the four terrific doorkeep- ers or guardians of the doctrine, and in Bud- dhist literature described as four kings dwelling on the edges of the top of Mount Meru to protect the 33 greater gods. They TSONG-KHAPA ; or; JE RIMPOCHHE : PeMA Jung-NAT; or Guru RIMPOCHHE : P’oL JHUNG; or JHO0-0 ATISHA : TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 201 usually seem to be painted on the outside walls of the Gongkhang and the monastery treasure chamber, where they are represent- ed as reeking with gore, wreathed in skulls, and of hideous aspect. Of the four, one carries a hook, another a chain, a third a snare, and the fourth a bell ; each bearing in the right hand a bowl, representative of the world. Flames surround the figures together with a retinue of animal-headed demons. deified hero; the great Buddhist reformer and founder of the Gelukpa school. Died 1440 A.D. Life-sized figures and relics of him abound everywhere; the most costly effigies being set up in the Galden and Kumbum monasteries which he founded. the well-known Padma Sambhawa, de- viser of much eclectic ceremonial and jug- glery, founder of the Urgyenpa sect, and everywhere popular, especially in Derge, Tsang, and Sikkim. Grottoes where the saint lived are shewn in all parts, in some of which refuse of his food in the shape of a reddish dust is still sold. His sayings as contained in his “ Lotos Picture-wiitings” are universally quoted. Other names popu- larly designating the saint are Urgyen Pema and Guru Pema. In Tantrik rites he is held to assume a terrific as well as a mild aspect and is then styled Dorje Dholit. the famous Bengal pandit, Atisha, other- wise Dipankara Buddha, who came from Magadha as a missionary to Tibet for the revivification of Buddhism. Labouring for 17 years, he died 1053 A.D. at Nyet’ang near Lhasa. Deified and greatly revered. ———— I 202 Dom RIMPOCHHE : LuaAcaamM MAN- DARAWA : SAEKYA PANDITA : So’NG-TSEN GAMPO (NEF RN TT) or JE GAMPO: Lompo GAR: T’aANG-TONG GYALPO: SHABDUNG NGAKWANG NAMGYAL : fe Tg Oe Ets | Yoke a do) TIBETAN GRAMMAR. bromston, pupil of Atisha, and founder of Kadampa sect. Built Rading Gompa, to the north of Lhési, and there a huge effigy of the saint is worshipped. His tomb is shewn in Jhang Taklung Gompa, 35 miles N.N.E. of Lhasa. wife of Guru Rimpochhe! Her shrine is at Ribo Tagzang near Mount Everest. the famous teacher who founded the sect whose head-quarters continue still at Sa-kya Monastery (60 miles due north of Mount Everest). Died circa 1245 A.D. the king of Tibet who introduced learn- ing and therewith the beginnings of the Buddhist faith into Tibet, circa 680 A.D. His effigy and those of his two wives, the Chinese and Nipalese princesses, have been set up in almost every monastery in the land. The most highly reverenced images of the trio, into which it is said their es- sences were absorbed, are those preserved in the Jho-khang, Lhasa. prime minister of foregoing king, incar- nate, now-a-days in abbots of Tengyai Ling, Lhasa. a lama of piety and engineering skill who built eight chain bridges over the Yeru Tsangpo, 250 years ago. An amusing anecdote of the saint’s birth is given in the Nineteenth Century, October 1889, a saint of literary and engineering skill. He built, 200 years ago, chain bridges over rivers on the Bhutanese border, and is held to be still incarnate in the successive heads of Tashichhoidzong Monastery, the chief lamasery of Bhutan. TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 203 CuBOI-GYAL TERDAK a deified hero who has appeared on earth LiINGPA : so far 17 times ; incarnate in the successive heads of Mindol Ling. Lava JE P’AkMopup: known also as Situ Gyalpo, a saintly Tibetan king—the first to gain sway over the whole country, built many forts and monasteries; died 1372 A.D. His image and the tombs of the 18 kings of the dynasty he founded exist at Densat’il, a ruinous gompa on the left bank of the Yeru, I5 miles east of Tse-t’ang. Subjoined are the colloquial designations of the different classes of lesser deities, demons, and other supernatural orders :— Rik-zin : the 8 sages expert in Tantrik arts, of whom the chief 1s styled Lo-pon Hum-kara (i. e., Pema Jung-nai.) Lhd : any minor god, including local deities and all Brahmins. Lhéd-min: an order of beings ever at war, through spiritual rivalry, with the lhd. Shrimpo and Shrin-mo : male and female monsters, hostile to man, dwelling under huge boulders in valleys. They devour travellers unprotected by greater deities whose aids against shrimpo should be propitiated before starting on a journey. Correspond to the Rakshésa and Rakshasi of Sanskrit mythology. Yiddk : lost souls in goblin bodies of stupendous size, often several miles in height, but with tiny mouths which prevent eating aught save the smallest crumbs. They groan terribly with hunger and cause earth- quakes. Noi-jin : mountain-gods haunting peaks and passes. Many mountain ranges in Tibet are named after them with varying appendix names; e. g., Noi-jin T’ang-la range S.E., of Tengri Nur, the summits of which are said to be embodiments of the Noi-jin king and 860 of his Arr ——————————————————— tL ER find dito A earl] = a Fer I Hi o } iH H Hin bh : { { i 1 { 1 i ii iF a i | H i} hd th { p i | " Hi RE 11 i | { ¢ Hi H i Ht HH ILE! ] i } ¥ } ij WH | ig i ih { i 1 hs b } i } i bE hk i i bi i HH 4 p i h it J il uw } 4 iit { jh » Hh 3 3H 4 i of 4 BI TEE ¥ 1h § Hi } i i Hi 4 ith ie! 11 i i bit | at i wil i i th i 4 (i i A i PE CR 3 | } | 4 + i i | H ! il ) ul y b i fi | He 1) a it bh | Ha) i oh t hi f ti indie i Hi hb! y ! f m 1! i f rh 1}: Ih ey 1H i ARE fb Fh il ’ ibe i { - TIBETAN GRAMMAR. attendants. Namt’oi-shre, god of riches, is called by many the Noi-jin king, and in this last character is sometimes styled Muk-dzin: ‘holder of the mist.” Lhandé: imps of demoniac character dwelling underground during the day, and at night-time amusing them- selves by riding on the backs of foxes, the yelping of which beasts is caused by the blows of the goblins. They carry as their cudgels the huge flowering stems of the greater mullein, which plant is therefore styled in Tibet Lhande berka. The Jhdindé is a variety endowed with wings. Lu : deities in the form of water-serpents inhabiting lakes, rivers, and wells. Benignant towards man, they construct at the bottom of lakes gorgeous palaces wherein they watch over great treasures as well as thé lives of fish which have been restored to the water as propitiatory sacrifices after being caught. They are of four varieties, a sacred pond to the N. of Potala in Lhasa, for example, being reserved by law for piebald Lu. When provoked the Lu cause damage by hail and floods ; but payment of sur-f’al or ‘hail tax’ to a Tantrik lama insures your property against such injury. Témchho’ : a fabulous horse whose mouth forms the source of the great Yeru river. Dri-a : sprites inhabiting the air, of fairy-like form, who divert themselves by playing on ko-p’ong or guitars. They subsist solely on odours: consuming the sweetest scents of flowers as well as the foulest stenches from privies and slaughter-houses. Butchers burn offal of beasts on pedestals to propitiate these beings, who are often said to be incarnated as bees, wasps, &ec. Khd-doma : witches of vast form under five queens, whose spirits now dwell in costly figures which have been set up to their honour in Ramochhe Temple, Lhasa, where their powerful aid to mortals may be duly invoked. TIBETAN MYTHOLOGY. 205 Mé-mo : other female spirits, but of a mischievous disposition. Shib-ddk : the particular god of the soil in each village with the surrounding country appertaining thereto. The number of Shib-dik is accordingly great; and every traveller arriving within the boundaries of a fresh place will do well to propitiate the local gods of its soil. Incarnated, at times, as monkeys, they ride upon hares, bearing bows and arrows of straw and shields fashioned from huge toadstools. T"db-lhd : god of the domestic hearth, invoked after pollutions caused by the boiling over of milk, &ec. Tsen : solitary demons haunting particular mountain-paths, but possessed of the habit and power of entering the bodily frame of a human being and cansing him to be afflicted with fever and divers other special diseases. Don-chhen : evil spirits which enter the body in bevies of 15 or 18 occasioning either death by apoplexy or violent attacks of epilepsy and lock-jaw. The rainbow is deemed to be caused by these spirits coming down in troops to drink. Dit’ (bdud) : is held to be the nearest equivalent to our Satan. In later days many devils or di’po have, however, been developed; and the female devils or dii'mo haunt lakes for the purpose of feeding on the bodies of monks thrown in as food for fish. Gong-po and Gong-mo: are demons inspiring jealousy, desire for money, cowardice, and licentiousness. G¢k : subtle inhabitants of the valleys who put obstacles in the way of travellers to sacred spots and hinder those engaged in the erection of lhdkhang (temples) and chhorten. The Hindu god Ganesa is regarded by Tibetans as the *“ King of the Gék ” and “ Remover ” of these obstacles. Khyung : a monster bird akin to the roc of the Arabs and the Garuda bird of Hindu literature. He does the bid- ding of Dorje Chhang, the Boddhisattwa. The Bén nm a HT To Ls pa att Te oi] ———— A ————————————————— TE kT WE ig TIBETAN GRAMMAR BUDDHIST SECTS. 207 KApamra (AMARAFRINNL) . A school, the result of the first regard him as their protector, and most of the . : reformation of Tibetan Buddhism under the Indian Bin-pa religious houses are dedicated in name to the Pit Alive fo, the, Mit omonts, fv fogs oy Khyung. eventually shaped by Bromston, strictly upon Ma- hdyana lines. Now closely allied to the Gelukpa school, which has acquired possession of its head centre Rading Gompa. Most of the Kadampa es- tablishments are in P’anyul district, N.-E. of Lbisé ; but they are now nearly all in ruinous condition. BUDDHIST SECTS. Kieyi'ea ( AMAIA): One of the leading Nyingma or 5 ists of Tibet are split up into about 18 different schools or co ot which, however, are not bitterly opposed to one another. There are two great divisions or classes of these sects, namely, the N yingma or ancient schools, and the Sarma or new schools. i Besides the genera divi- sion named Nyingma, one sect of this class is likewise particularly denominat- ed the Nyingma sect. The Nyingma votaries are chiefly distinguished for their practice of magic ceremonial ; consequently members of the chief Sarma sect, the Gelukpa, often resort to Nyingma lamas on special occasions]. priests or sorcerers of Tibet, who are anti-Buddhists, Dhul-bhum-mo : female satyrs with poisonous horns. Pung-shri and md-ki-shri : underground demons of the guome type, who devour children ; taking also possession of the hearth after broth and milk have boiled over, unless ceremonial cleansing is performed. “Red Cap” sects, originally started in opposition to the reforms of Bromston. Its votaries profess acquaintance with the deepest subtleties of Tantrik learning and meditative science. The presiding deity of the sect is Lagna Dorje, otherwise Dorje Chhang. Most of the so-called Dukpa monasteries in Tibet, such as Dorje-tdk on the Yeru Tsangpo, belong to it. In Ladak a most powerful body, the GELUKPA (SARNIA) The most popular of all the sects ; the established church of Tibetan Buddhism; a re- formed development set afloat by Tsong-khapa in principal establishments of that country, such as the 14th century. The Dalai Lama of Lhés4, the Hémis, Karzog, Hanlé, Chhimré, owning alkgiatie Panchhen Rimpochhe of Tashiliimpo, and their es- to its tenets. tablishments, together with all the leading monas- teries in the province of Ui, hold Gelukpa tenets. ay NYINGMAPA (FRNA) : Professedly the most venerable of the Their chief lamaseries are Gilden, Samye, Daipung, Sera, and the Four Lings of Lhasa, in Ui; Tashi- lhiimpo, Gyingtse, Dongtse, &ec., in Tsing; Kum- bum near Koko Nur; together with hosts of other large establishments in Khams ; also many in Ladak, of which the principal are Pi-tuk, Samtan Ling, schools and governed by the precepts of the Yoga- charya system. The head centre is Mindol Ling, a very ancient monastery some 45 miles S.-E. of Lhésd. Its gompas may be known by the red and blue stripes decorating the outer walls. The monks wear red robes with red hat and red pouch. and Likir. The gelongs of this sect wear red cloth- ing, but a cap and sacred pouch of amber-coloured cloth ; hence their designation ‘Yellow-hat ”’ Bud- dhist. The Mongol and Spiti Gelukpa wear yellow robes as well as yellow caps. Luo-Dukra (FRI) : The prevailing sect in Bhutan, with head-quarters at Tashichhoidzong, under the Dhar- ma Raja. Branches of the sect exist in Tibet, e. g., at Réalung, Dechhen Dzong, &c.; whilst, curious to te. ET Eih TER Ta gy Es H § C—O ET Es le Tn BU i Stet pir TIBETAN GRAMMAR. relate, all the monasteries built round Mount Kailasa near Lake Map’ang (Manasarowar) are peopled by its votaries, the establishments being exclusively under lamas who have been trained at Tashichhoi- dzong. KarmAPA (MRE). A sect much followed in Nipal, profess- ing to be deeply versed in the forecasting of karma. Samding monagtery on Lake Yamdok belongs to this communion. The dress is red with black cap and black pouch. ~~ em v . Dzok-caEEMPA ( EFJN'AJA’): The sect most predominent in Sikkim, professing Atiyoga doctrine and regard- ing Padma Jungnai (Padma Sambhava) as their founder. Pemayangtse (Pemiongchi) monastery in Sikkim is head centre of the ‘ Urgyenpa,” as the adherents of the school are often styled. In pro- fessed imitation of their founder, who is allotted a wife named Mandarawa, many lamas marry or have loose ideas concerning female society, and differ from other Buddhists in the important particular of slay- ing animals in sacrifice. The dress is a dark red robe with brown cap and pouch. Extensive colonies of this sect exist in Dergé and Zokchhen in Eastern Tibet, the latter district deriving its name therefrom. SA-KYAPA ( NFA): Formerly a powerful body, the successive chief lamas of the famous Sa-kya monastery having at one period (1270-1340 A.D.) governed the whole kingdom of Tibet. Sa-kya Gompa (Lat. 28° 54" 30 N, Long. 87° 56” E.) is still the seat of this once august Red-cap community ; and other Sa-kyapa lamaseries continue to flourish, e.g., P’enyul Nalendra, Gong- kar Chhoide, Ngor Gompa, Kyisho Rawana, &e., &e. Ey Ser IY pr Jo-nancea (B'S FRA ): A modern or Sarma sect of Yellow Caps which originated in P’unts’o Ling under Kun- BUDDHIST SECTS. 209 khyen Jowo Nang with peculiar dogmas said to be akin to the Gelukpa. Its adherents profess much asceticism, study the Dulwa texts, and are less idolatrous than other Buddhists. DI-EHUNGPA (RARE) or Di-gumpa: An ancient body, formerly of immense influence, being rivals of the Sa-kyapa; with several large establishments still kept up both in Ui and in Ladak. Lama Yuru, Shédchhugul, Yangdi Karpo (near Lhésd) and Di- khung Ts’al Gompa all belong to this sect. At the last-named, which stands 70 miles N. E. of Lhas4, resides the incarnation of Di-khung Chhoije Kyobpa, the founder of the sect. . ryt 7) Three Red Cap sects; the TarLuNGra (FEA ): last-named being the body Amr : predominent in Spiti. Riwo- Ye-gax-ea (3 Sa X ): [ chhe on the Ngul Chhu is an CHHAK-GYA-PA TNL important Téaklungpa monas- A > J ) tery. Sutera (§FNE): A community differentiated as the result of the labours of the Hindu Buddhist mis- sionary, P’akpa P’a Tampa Sang-gye; boasting a small following in Khams, as well as in Dengri dis- trict where P’a Tampa lies buried. - Kux-camor-zsancea (MEAN SINS ): A sect with a few No : monasteries in the districts bordering on Yunnan. Bron or Pon-ro: These are professedly anti-Buddbists and (F5r) represent the ancient religious cult of the land, correspondent with the Shdmans of Mongolia. Their priests are of both sexes, females being preferred, and deal largely in sorcery and animal sacrifices. Their services are in constant requisition especially among the Himalayan tribes and in remote districts of Eastern Tibet. Their mode of . rrm——— iE LL ai yp ii ie a TIBETAN GRAMMAR. circumambulation is with the left side turned to the object concerned—the exact converse of the Bud- dhist method. Several Bhion monasteries exist in the Khyungpo district, W. of Chhamdo. The Pon-po themselves are often designated Khyungpo after their guardian the Khyung bird. In Sikkim the Lepchas and Limbus follow the Bhon cult. ETYMOLOGY OF PLACE NAMES IN TIBET. As in India and elsewhere certain terms are constantly to be found as part of the names of places, &c., in Tibet. The following are the syllables most frequently recurring, with their significations :— -~ Donec (TK) a town ; as in Dong-tse, Tashidong, Kardong. -~ Dona (F/R) a face; as in Sing-dong (really Seng-ge-dong “lion’s face.””) gr . Dzone or JonNG (ER ) a fort; as in Seng-ge-jong, &e. Kuar (NFR) a fort; as in Dangkhar (TRNNRR ) Kharsa. ~ YiL and YULCHE'R (AARR) a village or hamlet ; as in Sdng- yl. Yur a country in general, as in Lho-yul, Za-yul, Mon-yul. ~~ Ts'o (SN) a community, assemblage ; as in T50-kong. ons cet v - . Tom (RAN ) a market; as in T"om-si-gang. Re P’uxa (XR A") a heap; as in Rinchhenp’uny, Marp’ung ; also Pure (FR) v 8 | Lam (AN) a road ; as in Kho-lam. PLACE NAMES. Sam (JAN) thought; as in Samdub Guru; Samye. Doxa (H]RK’) an abode, settlement, as in Dung-nyi (“ the two A abodes ”’) in Garhwal. Knane ([RK") a house; as in Khang dung. Tak (J) a rock; asin Tak-tsa, Tak-mar, Tak-nang. R1, mountain; as in Ri-gin, Pali. Sau (ZENA) a bridge; as in Chdkiam, Pdsamkha, Gang, hill-spur; as in Tashigang, Namo-gang, Norbu-gang. Bye, (8X) hill (in Balti only). KANG (really sounded “ Ghang’’), ice, snow ; as in Kang-gar-ra, Kangchhendzinga (or * Kinchinjunga.”) —~ Nona (5R ) ridge (in Bhutan), as in. ~~ Done (RJR) a yak; as in Dong-khya (La) ; but occurs rarely. LA4, a pass; but in Balti we have Ndshek, a pass. Loa Save (QR) a field; as in Kyo-shing, Si-shing-shi-khd (in Bhutan). GyanG, a wall; as in Gydng-tse, Dd-gydng, Gydngdo, Gydangmo- chhe. CuHU, river, waters; as in Rong Chhu, Nyang Ohhu, Shang Chhu, &c. CEHU-TS'EN, a hot-spring ; as in Lang-pdk-chhuts'en and many others. Loze (FR) large river; as in T4-lung. SHONG, A valley or gorge ; as in Kyi-shong, Shong-go. TSANG-PO (FRET) a river; as in Lhobra Tsangpo, Yeru Tsangpo, Chhiblung Tsangpo. 212 TIBETAN GRAMMAR. Nv SHI (73 ) a site or foundation; as in Shimong, &e. Peni (Padma) a lotos; as in Pemd-yangtse (commonly Pem- tongche), Pemdling, Pemakoichhen (really Pdd-ma- goschhen *“ Great lotos robes.” ) CrHUNG, small; as in Pemakoichhung, &ec. Pura (or T’4) small, slender; as in 7"dmo-ling. SE—a crest, hump, knob, Yana (AJNR) precipice ; as in Yangma. Nak (FFI) a forest ; when used as prefix (Néktsdl, &ec.) ; bub as affix, another word (FA )="* black.” CaHEN, great; common affix in place-names. KAR, white ; as in Gong-kar, She-kar Gompe, Dongkar, Dzd-kar La, Tso yu-karpa (“‘ white turquoise lake.”) Rina, long, distant. GyaL (in Tsang; “ Gye”), royal, chief, victorious; as in Gyal- tang, Gyal-chhentse. Suam the under part; as in Shdm-gyd. SHAR, east; asin Sharp’en-lung, Gydl-ts’o Shar. Tse (¥) summit, peak; as in Sog-tse, Gydngtse, Dongtse, Shi- gdtse, &e. - Do (] ) a stone; as in Do-fsuk, Nangdo; and especially in names of places near Tengri Nur. _— v . x L TASHI (JM IN ) lucky, blessed : as in Tushi-lhumpo, Tashisu- «SS a i v dong | IN aN = ) Tashiding, Pashi-chhoi. Gar (FN) a camp, as in Gart'ok (SFT ), Gye-gar. RK; an enclosure; alse “a horn ;” Rading. as in Ra-lung, Ramochhe, PLACE NAMES. 213 - Lowa (AR ) a mass, as in Dolong Karpo (“white mass of snow’), the name of a rocky sand-bank in the Khanu Lungwa River in Balti. P’ve a cavern; as in Du-p’uk. Gur, a tent, as in Gurld in Ngari Khorsum. Ts&, grass, grassy, as in Tak-tsd, Tsd-sum, Tsd-gang. Lune, a valley; as in Ré-lung, Khu-lung, Tib-lung, Nye-md-lung, Chhiblung (“valley of horses.”) Rong, a defile or gorge ; as in Khyi-rong, due north of Nipal; Rong-chhd-kha. - To, or Top or Ter, (33 ) the upper part: in T5-lung, &e. MAT or ME’ (FN) the lower part: in Central Tibet pronoun- ced Md, or Me’; in Ladak, &c., Mdé¢é. This and the foregoing chiefly attached as affix to names of dis- tricts as in Po-tod, Po-me’, and many others. Oc and Yok: lower ; as in Wur-og, Ambiyok. SN . Line (AR ) isolated spot: as in Darjiling, Mart oling. SHoL or SHO, town appendent to a monastery; as in Tamshol, Chhushol. Dine (BRN) a hollow; as in Ton-dub-ding, Yon-chhoi-ding, Samding. Pang (3K) a bog, or usually, a grassy bog or swamp ; as in Pang-kong Lake, Pang-mik, Pang-pochhe. A syllable generally occurring in the names of lake-side places YAR, upper (used in Balti place-names), as in Yarkhor, Yarmi- chhu. -~ . . TANG, a plain, as in Yang-t'ang, Z&'-tang (RINEK'), &e. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. | > pa — —- » ~~ Coa 4 © Lo ~ TEI) PHBL ean VOCABULARY. ENGLISH—LADAKI—CENTRAL TIBETAN COLLOQUIAL —LITERARY TIBETAN. The verbs appear here in the infinitive form, used ; or else the root with some affix annexed indicative of tense, such as yin, re’, du’, Jhung, yong, &c. The Lédaki words are in large part current in Rudok and Western Tibet. In Balti the dialect is sl letters s and » occurring more frequently Kirong, and Sikkim this affix becomes she, N. B.—Before using this Vocabulary, though they rarely occur thus in practice. The verbal root alone is generally ightly different, the as the first letter in a word, while the infinitive affix is changed to chas. In Tsang, and in parts of Sikkim and Bhutan, nysi. the Notes on Pronunciation on page 131 should be referred to. Excrisn. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Able, to be ~~ t'upche ; ngobche chokpa ; t'up-pa ; and (oc- FAA | SNA casionally) niii-pa Yy é tupin ? t’w’-yong-ngd Above (adv.) yar; gong-la yar ; yen-la 191 Ny SA Able, shall you be ‘HAOAV —HTAV ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Above (prep.) About (concerning) About (adv.) Abuse, to Accept, to Accident (mishap.) Accompany, to Accomplish, to Accord, of its own According to Account of, on Accuse, to Accustomed to Across Add, to Admittance, to grant (audience) Admittance, to refuse Advance (of pay), an Advantage Advantage of, to gain Advice: ltak ; gong-na pila (with accus.) md-bép kdlche ndmche Jhur; jus skyelche chhom yinche rang shuk-la nang-tar : ts'irla pila kal tangche kha-lok tangche gom (with dang added to object) tedla nanche jalkha tangche jalkha kakche dom gyal-kha choche damska ~~ . tang-la ; t'0 5 kor (with genit.) tsam-la lap-she tangwa lempa Jhur ax ND nyampo do-wa; dong-te do-wa dup-pa ; ts'ar-wa rang-Shin vv . nang-shin ton-la ; chhirtu kal gyap-pa ghom (with dhang) t’é-la nonpa Jalkhd nangwa Jalkha mi nangwa ngdachhi dhon khyer-so zin-pa khadam ARR] Foy SR INA SRA" (with A) AE Ui] SR RI v3 GF T8751 Bx REA q MRA Jaa 55 zr NERARABE a yy EX) R535 zy ARFATEr *AUVINIVOOA NVILHILL 3 ENGLISH. LApaxr. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTeErARY TIBETAN. Advise, to Afraid, to be Afraid, he was After (prep.) Afterwards Afternoon Again Age Agreement, to make an Agreement, written Air Alight, to Alive (he is)—living. Alike (are) All (adj.) All (pron.) Alone Also Alter, to (anything) damska tangche Jig ragche Jig song tingla ; yokla tingné ; yokla plit’ok lokté naso chenmo rikche khdchhad zumche gdmgyd ngdré ; lhungspo bapche sonte ts’ok-se kop ; lub ts’angma ; Lib chik-chik yang spoche dim-ma nangwa - §he'-pa GRA Jig-tdg jhung ; §he’-pa-yin Jé-la; shuk-la ; gdp (with genit.) larné ; jé-la gung-lon yang-kydr ; lokné nats'o genpo chhampa chhé-zvm jhyé-pa ghen-gyd ; yig-zin ngdrd ; nam sho’du bap-pa sompo da-te iin t'dmche ; ts'angma shrang-shrang-la yang-kyar gyur-wa TRE RRTHTA RECA HFN ARE ENN] Ng=| AAR SRN 25 SR We) 3 535 TRA REF FIRES 2 FRNA SEE a TREE AAW ul GRASS WEF _— ‘AIVINAVIOA NVLHLILL YILTV — LNARAIIOV ENGLISH. LADAKTI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Altered, 1s Altogether (quite) Altogether (in a body) Always Almost Among And Anger Angry, to be Animal Animal (of prey) Another (one) Anxiety Any, anything Appear to, (become vis- ible) Apple Apply one’self, to Appoint, to (to any post) Approach, to Arm Arms, in (your) qyur song lding-se ; yongsu sag ; kod ndmsang » ON ts’a-bhikma JH] NN ndngndngna dhdrung shro shro chhache duddo dalkméd sem-ts’er su-zhik ; chi-tong Jungche kidshu badche kdlche ; sko-che sar chhdche lakpa pang-la gyur yo’ ; do-wa jhe’ yongsu lhengyé-la ; hlench: dhui-gyiin ; takpa-réshi chhalam nangne dhang t'o t'o-wa lang-wa du-wa ; tindo chen-Sen - dakme’ [RNY khok-t'uk chi-yang ; dd (as an adj.) Jhungwa lv; debu lhur lenpa chuk-pa ta nye-po do-wa ; khe-pa lakpa pang khar RIX Ear B33 91 955 HAN Fa WR AR i q NY q kl SHE M&S NAN SRE age x Ras REAT | RET 3 IRRIRA ATE 7 SEN "AUVINIGVOOA NVIHILL 'SNAV NI—'TVININV ExcGrLisH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Army Arrow Arrive, to Arrive, shall Arrived, has he As (prep.) As far as (up to) As—as Aside Ask, to Ask a favour, to Ass At At once Attack, to Attain, to Attend (at or before), to Attend, will (be present) Attend to, to Avalanche Avoid, to Autumn mdk-ts’ok da lebche leb zin pin-nd ? ts’okse ; zuk ts'ukpa tsam urna diche (with nds) zhuwa p'ulche wong-bu la rubche t’opche ngara choche ; sem zhung- che kharud dzurche ston-chhoks mda-pung da lebpa ; chhinpa lep yong lep jhung-ngd ? de ; nangShin t'ukpa tuk lok-la shu-wa qx ND shuwa uwlwa ; solwa wong-qu la; tsane lamsang rub-rup qyakpa nye’ -pa jar-wa (with la or diin- la) Jar-gyu yin ching rik jhe’pa khdri’ yolwa tonka RIN NNR Ny ar YEH BE IRE RN 35; Gr Aaa gc v g 3H a FRENTE RFT PR mgs = q Bm *AUYVIAIVOOA NVIALIILIL ‘NROALAV—ASY TB ES EO ee —, Ce ENGLISH. LADpAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArRY TIBETAN. Averse to, is Away Axe Baby Back, the Back (adv.) Backside (posteriors) Backwards Bad Bakshish Ball (musket) Bandage Bank (of river) Banker Baptise, to Barber Barley-flour Barley Basin (eating) Basin or bowl Basket Basket (covered) ma t'adkhan duk par stary omt’ ung gydp lokte p'ump’um ; spi pli-lok-la sokpo ndangshyin rindrs rast’ dk tsangs-t’a bundak t'us solche deg-khan sa-tu nds shing-kor ; kore katora tselpo kundidm —yol yin hd-la HA ta-dhu ; tepo pugu gydp lokné tumt’ um ; kup gyap-lok-la ngempo ; akpo so're ; mdng-jyin dé-u ; dikril lept’ dk dam. bunddk ti solwa dek-khen tsampa ne plorpa dhungpen nyuktse ; le-po v 9 se ma 23 AIGA ATH 73 BARRA AFASRS Ixy ‘AYVINGVOOA NVIHILL ‘LHASVE—T11VH DE Tp i ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Bat Bathe, to Bear, a Bear, to (carry) Bear, to (suffer) Beat, to Beautiful Becoming, it is Bedstead Bedding Bedskins Bee Beef Beer Been, has Beer shop Beer drinker Beer, small Beetle Before (adv. previously) Before (adv. in front) Before (prep.) ts’anbt t'uche denmo khurche shranche rdungche démo nyal-1’t mdl-tan zim-t'ul rang-zi bu chhdng song ; yod-pen chhang-sd chhang dddchan uksing burpa shngdma ; goma ngun-la dun-la (with gen.) p’dwang tr uwa dhemong khyer-wa so’pa ; p’am khur-wa chak gydkpa lépo ; mying-che'po chhak-ghi-dw’ mal-1’s mal-chhe ; malting mal t'ulpo dangma lang-sha né-chhang chhyin-pa’-in chhang-khang chhang t'ung-khen burpa ngar dong-la ; ngon-la diin-la roe aE SE ABs SESES) a JIT AH NAH AR’ HARE ARRR FF ‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAILL ‘HIOIHT —SNIN SAUD TR i EE i a i ENGLISH. LADAKTI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Began to, he Beggar Begin to, to Beginning, the Begun, was Behind (adv.) Behind ( prep.) Believe, to Bell Bell, to ring Bellows Belly Belonging to Belongs to, it Below ; beneath (prep.) Beneath, from Bend, to Benefit Bent Best, the Best, one’s (utmost) « 8B Better than go-zuk yot-pen shrangpo tsukche goma tsugspen pina sting-la den chhéche dri-lu trolche bud-khan drodpa chan (affixed to owner) t’es duk (with la) yok-la (with gen.) yok (with accus.) yok-nds kug-kuk choche p’dnpa kug-kuk chhok chi Pup khan B a sang gyalla dzulk jhung tsuk jhung pang-go go-dzukpa goma tsom jhung ; go-dzuk- Jhung Jé-la ; chhys 8hug-la (with gen.) yi’ dhe’pa ; lo chhé-pa dhilbu tolwa ; tsing-tsingpa bi-pa dho’pa chen (ditto) t'i-te-ys (with la of pos- sessor) kha-wék ; wok (with genit.) wok-né kug-kuk jhe’pa p’empa khwmpo ; kuk chhok ; tak-sho ghang shé-pa B a lé.. yik-ka SRE RETA RA FAR PA {a NCE =A] 3 ZW 5 Ay Aare SE) NEA) AN". . {= ‘AYVINEVOOA NVIHGLL ‘NVHL YHLLAd-—-SMOTIAd Bi fo BE Ml rin EM a i m—, EP ExGrisH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerARY TIBETAN. Between Beyond (prep.) Bhutan Bind, to Bird Bird’s nest Birth (also re-birth) Birthplace Bits, in—Bits, to Bit, a little Bit (horse’s) Bite, to Bitter Black Blame, to Blanket Bleed, to (intr. verb) Blind Blocks up Blocked up, is Blood Bloody Blow, to zhung-la parla ; pi-loks Druk-yul chhingche chi-pa ts'dngs skye-sa pd-yul dumbur ts’dbik ; nyung-ngd-rik shrapchak so tabche khante ; gho nélpo skyon takche shapos tak tangche mikzhar kak dul kak song tak t’akchan p’uche seb-la ; bhar-la p’ar-tsam Duk-yul khyikpa Jhyd ; p'yé (in Sikkim) Jhya-ts'ang kye-wa kye-sa chhak tum la ; longlong énts’am chik ; ’embhu chik sapchak mukpa khapo ndkpo chyo-wa chhdaly ; mdsén tak p’owa mik-shar ; Songer chur-kin-duw’ chur jhung tak t’ékchen pu-wa ARE Wy AGT RICA 7 g She y J FR FARA JF Ay ir AT Ha Fi RATA 5 RA 3 RISE ‘AUVINGVOOA NVIHILL ‘MOT —LIg NE a li A hed ENcLisH. LApAxkiI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN, Blow, a Blue Blunt Board, a Boards (for book) Boat Boat (of hide) Boatman Body Boil, to make Boil, to let Boil over, don’t let Boiled-meat Bolt, a door Bolt, to Bone Book Booklet Boot Boot (with woollen tops and leg) Born, to be Borrow, to Bosom Bottle Bottom Boulder damchadk sNGon-po tultul spanglep leks-shing gru-chhung gru-khdn go-po skolche skol chukche lud ma chuk 81-71 sure chulkche ruspa spéchha spé-ka kapsha lam charuk skyeche yarche porg-pa shelbum lting p'd-long dzok NGon-po nome’ danddr ; shinglep lek-shing dh ; nyen ko-dhu ; ko-d ko-khen ; dhu-pa sukpo ; p'ungpo tso tang-wa kol chukpa l#' ma chuk sha tso-pa ya yd gyakpa rut ; dung péchha po-ti lham ke’pa kye-wa kyin-kyiwa ambdk bumpa ; potdl ting tak- pong | mor BE GR FAAS 7 Ey ESE] Na) /ERa AR | 3° SNE SS x BN MRA ya y q JRA aay TH: AR AUVINEVIOA NVILAGLL ~ LVIR~-AA'TIOu ‘qHaTa04d ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Bow, a Bow (salute) Bowl (food) Boy Branch Brandy (barley-spirit) Brass Brave Bravery, Breach of law Bread Breadth Break, to Breakfast Breast-pocket (bosom) Breathe, to Breath Bribe, a Brick Bridge Bridge of tree-boughs zhu chhak ko-re buts-ha ; bu yalga donrak rdagan nyingchan hampa tagur zhang chdgche tsalma ug tonche hu ; uk p’aksup zhu (§hu) chal-chhdg shingkor ; p’urpa chi’pa ; potso yd'ga arak régan ngingchen ; pd-o nyingtop t'im-dhang-gdl pd’lep Sheng-kha chhékpa dho ; §hok-to ambadk Ww jungwa ; ngampa Ww; ug p’ak-sul pak ; sd-lep Sampa chuk-Sam Tq ZA Sry 3a RY WE WRAY 81 RAR Sear QAR a TET I FNARIRA RT KAT ‘AAVINIGVIOA NVIAGIL avuayad ‘aodargd ET RT eT 6 a ENGLISH. LApAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN TF Bring, to Bring, shall IT Brought, has been Brought, has Broad : Broken, is Broom Brother (when used of or to an elder brother) Brother (speaking of or to a younger brother) Brothers (general term) Bruised, is Brush (for painting) Bucket (of wood) with lid Bug Buddhist Build, to khyongche khyong yin-néd ; khyers’in- na ? khyerspen ARN Ea RE zhangchan spunla Ba No p’akzet chary nang-pa sikche sap khwr shok ! khyer shok ! kydlwa ; khur-wa khur yong-gyu-yimpa ; kyal yong-g& ? khur lep yong-nga ? khur yong-wa-yin or khur lep du’ khur lep song Shengchen chhak jhung chhydk-ma d-jho ; jho-jho Auwo ; chungpo (hon.) pun dab jhung yuk-pur chhusom de-shik nang-pa tsik-pa Go) RES S| REIT RFR "AUVTINGVIOA NVIEIIL NHIOUd ‘ating i A er rT ey ie eS Ml ENGLISH. Bundle (hand) Burn, to (anything) Burn, to (intrans.) Burnt, has been Bury, to (anything) Business (affairs) Busy (I am) But Butcher Butterfly Butter Button Buy, to y (beside) Calf Call, to (to a person) Camel Came ; has come Camp Camp, to pitch LApaxkr. lak-kod | duk tangche ; shrakche tsikche tstkspen kungche delwa (ngd-la) delwa duk a-mae shap ts’ongkhen p'e-lebsé mdr tobcha nyoche damdu béto kad gyapche ; botche shngabong yongspen drangsd gur langche CENTRAL TIBETAN. pimpo REY dhuk-pa ts’ikpa ts’ik jhung kung-wa dhén ; le-ka (ngdrang-la) dhelwa re’ yin-kyang; yinna Jang shempa ; or dikchen shem- pa chhye-md-lep mar t'ebji ; tole nYo-wa diin-la bhe-to; bhemo ( fem.) (often pe-u) ke’ gyakpa ngdmong yong-pa-yo’ or p’ep jhung dangsa u-ghur langwa LITERARY TIBETAN. WRB RAETA| FRA AFA[A| RAST) ah iF Borer RF T= Ha "53 AQ BR 2a TSE mn gees "AYVINIGVOOA NVIHILL "INYO — ATATALLNE Ce lh nb be BI UI EERE TER oh a ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Cane-bridge Cap Cap, Chinese Care, take Careful Careless Carry, to Cart, a Cast away, to Cat, Catch hold of, to Caught, to be Cause Cave Cease, to Ceiling Centre Centipede Certain (sure) Certainly sda-zam tibe kadarcho! ts’andachan zon-me’ ; lélochan khyerche shing-sta p’dngte borche pisha zumche khat-che zh ; gyu-tsan pukpa zhiche ya-t’ok te-wa lare ngo-tok nanchhak pa-§ampa or ts’d-am §hambu mok-r1 rikpa dhim ! nyar gos! rikpa jhys ! chag-gha ddkpo hamakho khurwa shing-ta yukle shakpa Shumbu, Shimma par-dzin t’empa kharwa gyu ; §hy tak-p'uk ; bup chhe’pa t’akchho nenten FEN | FANE 35 5 IT A aps 5 CEES For AEs zr ARSE I A Z| FAN I" TT ‘A4VIAIVOOA NVIHILL *XINIVIYED) = LVD LT A ry Ce ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN, Chair, European Chair, sedan Change, to (trans.) Changed, is Character Charcoal Charge, to (accuse) Charge, to (price) Cheap Cheapen, to (in bargaining) Cheat, to Cheek Cheerful Cheese Chest (of the body) Child Chilly Chimney (smoke hole) Chin China Chinaman t'1-shing khyok-pang spo-che p’o song ; rdepspen solndk kal tangche rin nenche khye-mo rn p’abche gop-skorche khurts ok gamschan t'ud ddng tibgu drangmo qyd-r'i; shut’t p’epchang je-wa ; She-wa gyur jhung shi-gyii’ solndk gol-wa ; ts’ang dru-wa rin chd’pa kye-po khéru do-wa go-jhompa dempii t'ulpo wo-t"i’ dhang fugu ; pugu dhang-mo kyamtong oku wy NN Mahdtsin Gyd-ma wo BANA Ex Jaa rs ay FAT GRIF NA OER NT NE qe x ki NY NY NV.LAI IL ‘AUVINAVIOA — LYE HD ‘NVILVNIHD Es pp pL pi CA ENGLISH. LApaAkT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Choke, to ir, v. intrans. Cholera Choose, to Chopsticks Chop up, to Christ Circumstances Circle City Claw Clay Clean, to (trams.) Cleaned, is Clean (adj.) Clear Clearly Clever Climb, to Cloak Clock snangche ske damche bokshz damste khyerche t'u-mdng stupche Mashika nats’ ul gort’ik gydlsé barmo zhdpék ; kdlak lakmo choche sang chospen lakmo ; sang sing-mo ; wd-le sdlpo shang-po dzekche yang-luk chhutshod khyompa kye khyikpa nyalok dam-pa turma tsap-pa Mdshika do-go ; sel-chha kyir-kyir ; kinkhor dhong-khyer parmo ; der-khyw Jimpa le-mo zo-wa ; sdng-wa sang jhung tsangwa sdlpo ; hleng sdlte t'db-chen ; khé-t'a dzek-pa bhi chhii-ts’o’ SRF REZ RAIA] ARATE REFA| HA SENER | BRE MRS REA = §%5 ‘AD0TO —= MV'TO NVLUGIL "AUVINGVIOA EE a ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Close by Clotted milk Cloth Clothing Cloud Coat Cock (gun) Coil, to Cold Cold, a Collect, to Collection Collar Colour Comb Come, to Come here ! Come, has he ? Come, will Come back! Come before, to (to ap- pear before) nYe-mo chhurp’e rds; go-nam gom-chhé shrin gonchhé me-kdm ril-che dhang-mo yama sduche dus-pa gong-gd tson ; ts’os so-mang yongche wru shok ! leb-song-ngd yong yin ; leb-yin, lok shok ! chharche Literary TIBETAN. rai; ré-ga ko-lak ; mabsa (hon.) tin kwa-tse ; tuk-po t’o-chhung dil-wa dhang-ght ; dhang-mo lo-ts’am ; mdchham diii-pa ts’o kong-ge dok ; Ikhd-dok ta-shé yong-wa ; p’ep-pa (hon.) diru shok ! kho p’ep-sam ? yong-gyu-yin lokne shok ! jar-wa 85] aE &a| RE N ” Cg 2 4 A Nn ‘3 A eh 7 NEA Me J SFT HR ARQ] RRA ETH RASA Ean BRIT = 523 5 zr AUVINGVOOA NVLALIL "ANON —LOATION EL Lr iL lai AM 11 Es ia a a ENcLisH. Conr— LADAKI. CENTEAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Coming, he is Come, has Comfortable Comet Common (ordinary) Companion—comrade Compare with, to Complain of, to Complete Condemn, to Confusion, in Conscience Consequence of, in Consumed, is Contented Continual, is Continually Contract, a Convenient Cook, a Cook, to kho-rang yong-gin duk yongpen zhi-wa ghu-tsiks t'un-mong yddo sdur choche (with la) kal tangche tandu tim tangche t'dl-t'ul shés-zhin ts'arte song ts'imba zhiktang duk gyundu dzin dshdn janma ts’oche kho yong-gi-du’ yong-pa yin ; jar jhung nyamgd ring-skdr timmong ; kyui-ma 8ada ; rok durwa jhye’pa (with la) shu-lok gyakpa yé-dzok 8halchhe chd’pa tal-t'ul Jhai-chhot ; jhai-le ten-nar (with la) Sin yo’ ; ts'ar song yi ts'impo nyukchen du’ gyiindhu ; ndmzhdk dumi’d ot-pa ; rungchen t'dp-yok ts’0’pa pa FI SINT RHR rl) JAE TF §F RRA] RTF I 207] ANA ARSE ‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAAIL *1000 —— NOISAINOD | nie Et ei LE .,, ENGLISH. LApAk. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Coolie Copper Cork Corpse Cotton (raw) Cotton-thread Cough, to . Cough, a Country Count, to Courage Courtyard Could, he Cover, to Covering, any Cow Cracked, has been Crane Crawl, to Cream Crevice Crooked, it is khurupa ; bé- garpa zang khadik 70 ; Spur rds-bal ras-kut khogche ldo-khok yul sv korche NYING-1US khyams ; ts'om ngob tumche ; kabche khyeps ba kas song Jha-trung-trung ba gokche 6-shri seng-bar khong chhé duk ; kyok duk bak-khen ; Sang khadak 70 ; pur rar-bhal rai-ki’ lo gyakpa lo-khok yl dangka gyap-pa nying-top ; lo-top ts’om-kor chok yong ; t'up song yok-pa ; kdp-pa khebma bhd-chu zhak jhung Jha t'ung-t'ung p’e-wa wWO-8 ser-ka : N=ay gur-gur duk BE ete refs ge et eh 3 "AYVINGVOOA NVIA4IL ‘AdA00Y) —~—HUHVINO0D ENGLISH. LApakI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Cross over, to Crown of head Cruel Cup Cup-board Cure, to Cured, is—am Currants Current (of river) Curtain Custom (usage) Custom (revenue) Cut, to Cut off, to Daily Dak-transit Dalai Lama Damp Danger Dangerous gal-che; gydpche |. gok-skil nakchdan ; tdma shébo ko-re chhagdm nad pin-che zhi-song ba-shoka ngddchan yola shrol sho-gdn dé-che ; shnga-che 2hok-che zhék dang zhdk uldk gyalwd kusho rim-bochhé sher-chan ; hus Jig-ri nyen-chan gal-wa : AN gok §hiin mi nying-je ; nyemba p’or-pa gamgomang ; u-pdng p’en-chukpa 80 jhung bad-shoka chhu-gyiin yol-la ; rai-yol ghom-khyé sho-t’dl chi’pa ; ddl-pa dum-pa : AANA nyin-re Shin ta-Sam gyda’ wa rimpochhé len-chen nyen nyen-chen ; Mi-tenpo re SGT TI =r NNR NA SESE SE ARN I5 a ar AE ARE 2] gH AZATEr EN SRR g 3) ay 5 TS ‘AUVINGVOOA NVIACLL ‘SNOYADNVA —— WOLSAD ES eg - mn ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Darkness, dark Dark, to become Date Daughter Dawn Day Day, all Dead, is Dead one, the Deaf Dear (costly) Debt Deed Deep Degrees, by Delay, to cause Demon Deny, to Depend upon, to Depth Descend, to mun-dik mun chhd-che ts’es bo-mo skya-od nYM-mo ; nyi-ma nywn kob ; nyi-ma ltang sha-song shi-khan gud-nk rin-t’os bulon le-ka lting-mo ; dongpo rémos rémos lande ; don zim zerche lo kyelche (with la) Iting ; kongto bapche mviin-ndk ; minpa nikpo miin rib-pa ts’e’-tang pumo ; pum ndm lang nym-mo ; §hdk nyin-t'dg-t'ok shi song jhe shi-khen wompa ghii-po ; kyongpo bhulin lai-ka ; Jhé-wa tungchen ; §absdp rim-rim gyang jhe’pa de; gék me tolwa lo-dang khelwa (with la) ting ; Sab-khye t'eng-la gyu-wa; shi-dhu) bab-pa Literary TIBETAN. 7 RAH | AFErEr Fra 9 FRSA 35] 531 6 FRR 3% AN] IT 2] EX RR IAS NRA fH RII . *AYVIAIVOOA NVIHAIL "ANHISHA~=-dVHEA Ee et HIE AA CAA ExcGrisH, LApAxk1. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. & Describe, to Desert, a Deserted, it is Determined, I am Devour, to Dew Diarrheea Die, to Difference, the Different (various) Different, is Difficult Dig, to Dirt Dirty Dirty, to make Disease Dish (flat) Dismiss, to Distance Distribute! (divide them!) shadche brok tong-pa-duk t’ddpa yong-spen midche zelchhu shal shiche khyad 80-80 mr déchan gdgspo duche dima ts'idu ; ts'ichan dima p’okche nad grate tangche p'a-zad ; nyé-lot gos tong ! tonpa ; talwa dok tong ; wen-sd wem-pa re’ t'dkchho’ be’chho’ hib-hdb $d-wa Silpa t'u-ne’ shi-wa ; shi-p’owa khye’par ; zolts’o 80-80 ; ma-chik mi da-wa khakpo ; ké-le ko-wa dhima ; dhékpa tsok ; ts'ichen ts'ichen gyakpa ne qugushda ; soldér gong-p’ok terwa t'dk ring-t'ung sha-sha-su go! 35 zr RFF RRR ES ER RE Iara ag ART SEE] Ny — AMRF RN] RA SET Forge » SRE RAEN AFIT = 3g AUVINAVIOA NVILAIILL INHIHIATET *SSHYLSIA ee ec ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErARY TIBETAN. Distress Do, to Doctor Doing, is Do, that will Dog Done, has been Door Door-post Door-frame Double Downwards Drag, to Dress, to Drink, to Drowned, be Drum Drum, brass Drunk, to get Drunk, is Drunkard dukngal choche am-chhi cho-khen duk da dik! khyi chhoms song go lok-ré ydre-mdare nyil--dab tur-la t’enche ghonche t'ungche chhw khyer song den jang dolti rdrospa yongche sichan song rdros-khan ka-duk VRE jhye’pa ; dze’-pa (hon.) dm-chhi RNS" jhe’ -ghi-re’ (chyin-ki-re’) dhd-ta dikpa | khyi Jhya song go len-nys w . . shodhu YN t'eng-la ~ dii’pa konpa ; ghoi-ldk ghon-pa t'ungwa ts’ upte sha ’ nga rdro-wa raro jhung rdro-wa-pa re 359) REST a IF FHRST ger J asa Har Hy yo i ‘AYVINGVIOA NVLEUIL ‘AYVINAYA —HTd00a Ws EE tu it ut ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTeErRARY TIBETAN. Dry Dry, to Duck Due, 1s During Dust Dung Duty Duty (tax) Dwell, to Eagle Ear Ear-ring Early Earnest, in Earth (ground) Easy (not difficult) Easily Eat, to skdmpo skemche ngurwa nam—zdana talwa lcha khak sho-gam ; tot dukche ts’os gydpche lak-khyi nam-chhok along ; chha-bu nga-mo don-dram sa-zhi la-mo ; démo 2d-che kdampo kam jhe’pa yd-tse Jal goi-gyu ts’e-na (after verb) dul dhiin ts'ul-t'tvm sho-t’al ndi-pa (né-pa) ts’or gydkpa Jha-lik amchho’ e’-kor WARE" ngamo nén--ten sa le-la-po le-ld-po-la ny’ to 8d-wa 5 FJ NRT Nar cx NVLHILL AYVINGVO0A ‘LVH— Ad a THAIN AR i i ESS FL ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Eaten, has been Eatable Edge, at the Egg Eight Emerald Employ, to Empty, to Empty End Engage, to Enlargen, to Enough Euter, to Entrails Entrust, to Escape, to Even (flat) Evening Every Every day zas song zd-chhok zur-la ful ; go-lo gydd mdrgad chodche shrdche stong Jukma dznm-che pelche dik zhuk-che long-kha chhol-tangche shorche nYampo p'i-tok re repeated after the noun twice said zhak dang zhdk to Sax song dw’ §&-nyen Sur-la gong-do ? gye mdrgat chi’pa po-wa ku-tong-pa t’d-ma dzin-8hdkpa plel-wa yong-nge ; khyé yin Shug-pa gyu-ma chhol-wa doipa lep-lep gong-td re-re nyin re; nyima tékpa RT Zxcy sz] SY See 3X SEE = zr FE NE] 3] NZ 3 5 zr Far REX 3 J RANT ATF AUVINEGVIOA NVIHILL HOVONH ‘AUHAY ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN, LiTERARY TIBETAN. Every where Exactly Examine, I will Except (prep.) Exert yourself ! Explain, to Expenses (Hind : kharach.) Extinguish, to Eye Eye-ball Eye-lid Face Facing (anything) Fable Fade, to Faint, I am Faith Faithful Fail, to Fall! don’t kobtu ngotok ; zhibchhd ngd-is ts’od t& yin mankhdn strad-strad tong ! hdd-hdd- tong ! shadche sodche mak mik-pak dong dong-tad shrimgs kyukche ngal song dadpé sem dang-pa-chan ; zhabstokpa bad chukche ; or mi t'eb- che tsangmd-la kho-né ; 8hib ngdrang-ghi ts’s td gong mempa tson-dii jhyi ; hur-hur tong she’-pa ; tdlwa do-go 50° pa mik me do mak-pdg dong ; kyé-go p’drkhd (preceded by geni- tive of object) dum nYi-pa chhong jhung de’pe yi’ ; de’pe sem lo-dengpa mi khéipa ma ri ; ma §ak! 753 i . BARRA Nar ; ARNE RAT RE *AYVIAAVIOA NVIAGIL TIVA = dI'T-TAH ee tacit Ea EE i BAR ExNcLisH. LApaAkI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Fall, to Fall down, to Family (lineage) Famous Fan Far, how Fasten ! Fasten, to Fat (adj.) Fat (of meat), the Father Fault Fear Fearless Fear, to Feeble Feel, to (touch) Feel, to (be sensible of) Female (of an animal) Fence Fern rel tong! relche rompo ; ts’onpo s'il ’ y 2 a-p a shnongs Jig-r1 Jigche (with “la” of the object) hal-med nyuk-che rag-che gyelwa AIT : ri-pa mar 28k-pa TUL dék-chen deng-ydb td-ring-li ; kd-ts’¢’ ! tak chik tak-pa ; dom-pa gyak-she’ ; ts'ampo ts'il a-p'd ; yap (honorific) kyon ; nong-pa Jrg-tak Mmin-ji-pa she’pa GRE kyar-kyor t'uk-pa r1g-pa d-che rau-é ; dibma kyé-ma cg RA TNS FERRIER ST RRFRIEr Fray EC J) Wa I Fw ARTE NRE ABFA] RET Er Fa =a Ak "AYVINAVIOA NVLUULL ‘NUH == YTHLVI tte BT - rar ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Ferry-man Fever Few, a Fifty Fight, to Figure (form) Fill, to Find, to Finger Finger-nail Fine Finish, to Finished, it 1s Fir Fire Fire, to Firm Firmly First (ordinal) Fish Fish, to Fish-hook dhu-shang-pa ts’an-zuk nyung ngarig ngabchu t’abmo choche; nolche yib; zo kang-che t'obche (with dative of finder) dzug-gu sen-mo ts’ar chukche chhom song som-shing mé tu-bak gyapche shrdante ; ts'uk stanpo go-ma nya nyd zumche ny d-kuk dhu-pa ts’e’-pe ne’ re-ga ; la-la Shik ngdabchu t’ab-mo jhe’pa yib; Su kong-wa nye’pa S€r-mo chha’ sen ts'arpo ; le-mo dub-pa ; ts'ar dze’-pa dzok tsar song som-shing mé p'dng-pa sar-ten tempo ang-ki dhang-po nya nya ngon-pa nyd-kuk ar zr ATR FEY AIA RJAar ATR SE NETH NERA SRA AFR Fars MRE EA ag Sa EF §9 RESET Re 5 SER Li] ‘MOOH-HSTd ——HNTZ ‘AYVIAEVIOA NVILHEELL reg a ENGLISH. LApaAkr1. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Fists, to hit with Flag Flame Flat Flea Flee away, to Floor Flower Fly, to (as a bird) Fog Follow, to _ Food Foot For (you, it, &c.) Ford, a Forehead Formerly Fortress Forward, to Forward Forget, to mult’'uk gyapche dar méling leb-mo khyishik shorche shem mantok p’urche mamun ting-la ~~ dangche (with genit.) 2d-che kang-pa pila gal shralwa ngan-la jong kalche shngan-la t'uk yelche mult uk gyakpa dharchok mélche lep-lep khyi-shik dot-pa ghima mé-tok pir-wa mukpa je-la chd’-pa (with genit.) to-chhe ; Sen kang-pa chhairtu ; tonla rab, shenkhd opus TRE ngar ; ngonchhe’ jong ; zum dzang-pa dong-la Je'pa 9 4 4 2) 2) Nn oR) Co a *AUVIAIVOOA NVIHIILL 'LADIOI — MOTTIOH Ee pm a ee lu hh h|-=H- ENgLisH. r— LApAKI. Found, have you Fox Free, is Fresh Friend Frighten, to Frightened, are Frog Frozen, is Frost Fruit Fuel Full Further Game (wild) | Garden Garlic Gate Gather, to Gently CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErARY TIBETAN. khyid ¢ob-ba ? hazé Parkhan dw’ rok ; dzd-o Jag-11 kilche Jig-rak song sbal-wa pid song kyak dbs-bu budshing ; burtse gdng par-la riddks ts’ds-po sqok stago ; qydsqo rukche gu-lé-la khyo-kyt nye’-pa yimpa ? wa-tsé dhol y&’ sarpa tok-pu ; dzé-o Jig-ték tin-pa ngang-tak yo’ bé-ap khyak-rum jhung se’ ; kyak-pa shing-gi de-wa argol tem-tem p’drtsam riddk ts’al | gok-pa gye-geo ts’ok-pa ka-le % TER MN SRI | REARIARIR REAR I= Gd ByRARg RRNA QANT WEA ARR) BNE REET 2 SAAT Er IE RENE Aya "AAVINAVIOA NVIAGIL *ATINTD—LINTd ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Get it! Get, to Gift Ginger Girl Give, me! Give, to Give! Give it up ! Give up, to Given, was Glacier Glad, I am Glass Go, to Goat Go away! God Going, I am Going to, was Goitre a’ t'ob tong t’obche chhak-ten Jjdsga bomo ngd-la tong tangche tong ; sal spang tong spangche tangspen gdng nga t'ad duk shel chhd-che ’ » ra-ma lon song! Gonchhok ngd chhen bd-wa ; wo-d dhe khyer shok ! t’obpa nang-kye cha-ga pu-mo ; menshar ngd-la ter-roch ! ter-pa ; mangwa ; p'ulwa (hon.) 10’ chik ; mang ro nang tong chk! pang-pa ter-pa-yin | ghangchen ngdrang gats’or jhe shel do-wa ; gyu-wa rd-t'ong (masc.) ; ra-ma (fem.) hé-la gyuk! Kinchhoa ngd do-gi-yin tap (added to verb root) ba-wa GT zr - N51 §5% ¥H 9% CE JAY $a PR NRG "(to renounce). AAT CRAR AR WE qx RFR ost SACOM CRF a ‘AUAVINGVOOA NVIAAIL *HYLION ~~ NIAID DE iil ExcLisH. LApaxkr. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Go round, to Gold Good (well) that 1s Good (virtuous) Good (of things) Goose Got, I have Govern, to Government Grandchild Grass Grasp at, to Grave Grease Greasy Great Greedy Green Grieve over, to Grind to, (corn, &ec.) Grill, to kor-kor chhdache ser de jak-bo zang-ba ; gyalla gydlla hang-tse ngd-la t'ob song wdng cho-che gyalshrid memé 8 dwo sa warmo gyapche dur snum numchan chhenmo mugéchan ljang-khw ts’erka gyépche t’ akche shrakche kora gyap-pa ser dhe ya’po re’ Sang-po yd'po ; gdndé ngang-pa nge tsar yo’ gYur-wa gye’~si kuts'a tsa parmo gyakpa dur-khung num numise chhempo hampachen ngo-jang ; jangku duk-ngdl jhye’pa t'd-pa lam-pa MRR Hind : khub. Qac Ey RAE CR’ xz WE ge Fry EFF 3 SAFE = SA INR A SATS =F STR IRT AFT NRA AUVINIVIOA NVIHAIL TTI == SVU Tr i ae.G for ExaurisH, LADpAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Groan, to Groaning, is Groom Ground Grow, to (of plants) Grow bigger, to Grown, has Grumble, to Guard, to Guide, a Had, you Hail Hair Hair-plait Hair-ribbon Half kong-shuk donche khun gyap-duk stadzi sa ldanche chheru chhache sket song nyerche shrungche lamkhan chhukar tubdk gqundé smaén khyorang-la yodspen serwa shré ; spu chuty shram-dut ? pet shuk-nar p'ungwa shuk-nar gyak-ghin-re’ tadz sa; sashe bo-wa ; yd kye-pa chhe kye-wa bo jhung dhang khempa shung-pa ; ta-kor tang-pa lamkhen p'ungpa ; dzdma ménda qumdd medzé khyorang la yi'pa yin-na serwa td changlo pd-lo; tinghu chhye'kd LatErARY TIBETAN. PFINERIF PINE IARI 5E Ay pn AE RA] YET F/T *AYVINAVIOA NVIHILL *ITVH —=HVIROD {Hg {BN EE eal ama a 3 a la pe Iu - ENGLISH. LADAKTI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LitErRARY TIBETAN. Hammer Hand Handful Handle, the Hang up, to Happened, has Hard Haste, make Hasten to, to Hat Hate, to Hay Head Health, good Heap up, to Hear, to Heard Heart Hearthstones _ Heat Heaven t’0bis lakpa warmo kapza skar tangche; chhds la borche Yong song shrante ts’ ts'a tong ! ring-pa tangche . zha ; zhwd ghe-zdangche sa-kdm ; stswaskdm go kham zang-po | pung-che ts’orche ts’ orpen nyingkhd gyed-po tsante namkha to-a lakpa ; chhydk par-ra Yyu-wa kar-wa jhung jhe’ t’dkmo ts’a-tak che shik turte gyuk-pa shdmo shé dé-pa tsa-kampo go kham sangwa sak-pa ; pung shik-pa nyem-pa ; t01-pa nyen jhung nying ; lo-sem gyea-po tsem-mo namkhd qa NAA] ZA) ams AREER 9). SEE SAA | ARR Q 4 FET gH AT RRS IES a BT aq 37 ‘AAVINGVIOA NVIIAIL "NIAVIH-—ULVH TT a uN Aa i i a a ExgLisH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerARY TIBETAN. Heavy Heel Help, to Help him! . Help (assistance) Hen Herb Herd, a Herdsmen Here Heron Hew, to Hide, a Hide, to (anything) Hide oneself, to Hiding-place High Hill Hill-spur Hill-side chinte sting-pa rdm tagche ; yddo choche kho-la kydp tong ! kyap Jhémo ts'odma khyw sok-khan wre . kydr-mo sakche ; zokche ko-wa gonte borche ; wdste borche ipche 1psd t’onpo ri-t'ok ; ri-ga ri-bok gad ; ri-ngos chi-bu ; jichen tingpa ro-ram jhye’pa ; kyong- dhdl jhye'-pa rdm-td nang kyong-dhal jhamo ngo-tsd khyw dokpa der ; dipa 39 Be zy FSR IRA Raa SRA gH Za) § 5 “wi AFFINE ‘XY4VINAVOOA NVIIIIL ‘FAIS-TIIH = TUTH a — iy ina hi a ExcLisH. Hit, to (with a missile) ‘Hold, to Hold fast! Hole, a Hole (in clothes) ‘Hollow (in ground) Home ‘Honest ‘Honey ‘Hope, to Hoof , Horn Horse Horse-shoe Horse-dung Hot House House-rent How? How much ? khyelche, p’okche zumche tanpo znm tong bi-dng shekpa ldups khangpa ddngpo © rdngst lo-dang rakche rago rucho sta mikchak stalbang ts’ante khangpea khdng-la ghazuk chi tsam ? CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErRARY TIBETAN. idea BNE (ith A) dzinpa ; ju-wa tempo par zim ! khung ; bhuga te-khung bubh khyim ; mang ts’eden rangtst lo-deng dzvnpa td ; chhip (hon.) dhdkha ta-yr bang ts'em-mo ; ts'd-po khang-pa ; dim pa; nang ndi-ld ghdndé ARRAN ghdts’v ; ghdtsam REF ABFA] AERA AHF THRAEY R= SAE Br RE FFT x q *AYVINGVOOA NVIHILL "HOON MOH=-—IOOH a ii Eg RR ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LitEraRY TIBETAN. Hunger Hungry, I am Hunt, to Husband Ice 111, to fall IIL I am Illness, an Image (idol) w Immediately Important Impure (religious sense) Impure (of milk, &e.) Incense Including (prep.) Increase, to (intr. v.) Increase, to (fr. v.) tokrs nga tokri rak ngonche hyd ; Gh dar ndd yongche ngd-la ndd yong or ngd-la nadchan yong duk nad skunda mdt'ok-ts'e ; ddksa khakchen ts’i-du sokpo kundurw | t&un-na bur-che ndn-che - tokpa ; téi-pa (hon.) ngdrang-la tév'pa ; tok-gi yin khyira gyakpa gdrok ; khyo-po khy&-rum ; chhaprom ne’kyi gyakpa (lit., tothrow by illness) ngdrang ne’kyi gyap jhung ne’ ; ndts'a kuten, kuts'ab t'el-tel la; tap-te to-gal ; khochen TAA; kyuk-dho hle'chen ; ma dhak 1 poi, dukpot ts’ iin-la | plel-wa non-pa ; non jhe-pa MAE CREAMS Esa FRIFN F BIN SR HARRI CREST r | aR] AES FE | FNS Q=ARA appr Sev | REA | WT; INF *X4V104V00A NVLALIL HSVANONI == SST NTTL Ha ip pu - a a a tn S— Le Be er am oe A en A REET == ExNcGrisH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErARY TIBETAN. India Indian (Hindu) Inform, to Information Injury Injure, to Ink Ink-pot Inn Inquire, to Insects Inside Instead of Intend, to Intention Interference Interpreter Intestines Intoxicated Mon-yul mon hun tangche hun nod-khen duk-ngdl tangche che-sndk siril or ndk-kong ts'ug-khdng di-che bu-tsik khog-ma ts’ab-la chhd-dukche (to be going to) kobta kha t'al-khen Gya-ghar monpa lon Serwa lon a no’ -pa dukpo terwa nak-ts'a nak-pum ndts'dng §hip-chhd jhye’-pa (Hind. darydft karna) shik bug-na ; khongla ts’dp-la do’-pa sam=jor kha jukpa ke’-pa gyu-ma ; nang-rol rd-ro-chen JA aR zr RYT ar al ART Tre £5 x5 J FRA] RAJA QE; SHRAE RARE SYA) AER AR Xa ‘AYVINAVIOA NVIELIIL 'AALVIIXOLNI == ATIADNI a Gi ET Lt ES A LTR NRE NR SS a i a i a i Siu] Excriss. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Invite, to Iron (adj.) Irritate, to Itch Ivory Jackal Jackdaw Jar (clay soraz) JESUS Jewel Join, to (fr. v.) Joke Journey Joyful Juice Jump, to Juniper-tree Keep, to (retain) Kettle chdn rang-che chék gopnon tangche za-bun bdso khyi-chdng norbu zarche khd-shdk lam gé-mo si chhong-che spdma strung-ohe plandil chenden-pa chdk (precedes noun) nydm lempa ; nydm dru- wa 8a-kong bhaso wa-chang chung-kd dzdma Ye-shu | Rorbhu dik-pa khé-sha chhong-wa Shuk-pa kyong-wa 84ng- bu ; khok-tu FRAT FN FHNAT HE | xr | a FT Ea wg 3g 34) Fr FIN] gar oy FREE] FRA E NECN §=3) }ET CNT ‘AYVINIVOOA NVIAGIL WILLA = THMEL ES ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Key Khatmandu (in Nipal) Kick, to Kick, a Kill, to Killed, are Kind (sort) Kindle, to King Kiss, a Kitchen Knife Knot, a Know, to Know, will Kunawar Ladder Lady Lady, young Lake ku-lk (In Balti: le-mik) dog-chong gyap-che dog-chong sdd tangche sdd song nd-so duk-che gydl-po u t'dab-ts’ang di; dr dudpa she-che she’ in Khuanu sher-ka shéma shem-chhung chho de-mik ; demak on Kho-bhom R AX’ tokt’o p'ulwa ; dung-gyak Shu-wa t a-shak s6’-pa ; sok ché’pa se’ jhung rik ; dhdi TA bar-wa gydl-po (often gye’po) kha-zor sol-khang ; yo'-khdng ti; ki-chhung dii’-pa shei-pa she-yong Khunu kenza ; te-ka lhacham cham-chhung ts’o FET MRE Sw RY ARRIW ES RIFT NR 85) XFrRss s¥s $= q Ff a ARERR] AMSA ay NRA po NERS Ed NT 55] EN INE NE ‘AYVINEVI0A NVIFGLL "AQVT—— NTHOLIX ui HET ———— ee SB a i a ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTeErRARY TIBETAN. Lake, salt Lama, Grand Lama, head (of larger monasteries) Lamb : Lame Lamed (he is) Lamp, lantern Lamp-wick Land Landlord Landslip Language, a Large Lark Last (adj.)—latest Last, the Last, at Last, to Last-night Last year Late, (you) are chhaka Gyalwa Rimbochhe khan-po zha-wo cho duk zum-ting blang-pon sa-rud spé-ra chhe-wa ché-chir t’dma p'imo 37 t'a na ts’o-che ; dukche kha-ts’ an nd-ning gorte duk ts’aka Gye-wa Rimpochhe khempo lugu §ha-wo khong-ril jhung or kang- dum jhung ong-ku, gongshu dong-kang ; ong-re sa-ehha nai-bo sa-ri’ ke’ ; kha chhempo chokma ting-juk angky jema ; angki-juksho’ tar; juk-la shu-pa ddng-ts’en khd-ning gor song ; gyang jhe’ yo’ NRE xT gr ET IN Ka-gyur. § Mdo ; XXI1X. SS! TR ARE ras 2h) AFH FA EESEAT Ng | NEAR NREA" *A4VINAVIOA NVIHEIL "HLV T= qYOTANV'I SE ————————— EE Ee ExcGLisH. Late (it is) Laugh, to Law, a Lawsuit Lazy Lead (metal) Lead, to Leaf Lean (on), to Leap, to Learn, to Learned Leather Leather-strap Leave, to (a thing) Leech, Left it, he Left, to the Left, has been Leg LApAKI. pmo song god-che t’ims shag ; t'vm-dzing le-shol rdnye hrid-che loma nye-che (with la) chhong-che khaspa ko-wa rok-bu lus chuk-che tak-t'ung-bu lus chuk song yon nd luspen skang-pa skyin tsalche ; skyin cho-che CENTRAL TIBETAN. p’imo yong ke’mo ghe’pa; 9o’-pa ka-t'im t'im-shak le-lo Shdanye t'i-pa loma nye-wa (with la) chhong-wa l6b-pa khe-pa ko-wa ko-t'dk ; ko-rok yuk-shak-pa pii-po ; shrimpa yuk-8hak song ; luv jhya song yon-ngo ld yuk-8hdk dw’ ; lui-pa-re’ kang-pa kyin nang-wa ; kyin jhepa LirerArY TIBBTAN. a RNA RNAS AH §y BRE aay ¥T NECA Saar NRA ma Far eri Fay RTE REY INF wr Free NVIAILL ‘AYVINGVOOA "ANH T= NIVI'Y mm i i i ————————————— a ExGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Let, to (permit) Let down, to Letter (epistle) Lid Lie, a Lie down, to Lift up, to Light (subst.) Light (not dark), it is Light, to (kindle) Light (in weight) Lightning Like (prep.) Line, a Lips Listen! Little Little, a Live, to (dwell) Living, is he Lizard tang-che p’dbche yige kha-kyep shab-shob nyal-che tag-che od ; otchan nam t'ang duk me dukche yang mo skam~hlok zuk ; ts'okse t'ik khalpak nyan tang ! nyung-ngu ; zd-zhik nyung-nga rig ; ts'abik dadche sonte yin-nam ? gakchik ; tang malala-tse chuk-pa t’eng-la nang-wa chhak-dh: khda-khep dziin nye-wa seng-wa wo’ -to tang karpo re’ par chukpa yang-mo, gangke log-ka dre; dandd-la tik chhu-t’o nyen chk ! chhung-wa tiktse chik ; éncham né-pa, de’-pa sonte yo'dhd ? dhi-jhyi RA] ZEA RAR ES 3A AT | FRAETE WEE 3RT FJ] AW RAE 353 oa IRENA Tava) BRE REE SFR *AUVINIVIOA NVIHAIL ‘AYVZIT=-—LHOIT i S.A TTI | | a ENGLISH, LApaxr. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErRARY TIBETAN. Load, a khal ; khur-ru khurbu ; khal AN [RA] al Load, to (a gun) kongche dze gyang-pa Loan skyin-po kar-kyin 35 a Locket (charm-box) shrung-bu sung-bu ; gd "py" 3 ga-wo i Lodgings ddng-sd nd-ts’ ang QRH Loiter, to gorche gor-wa RAR . ~~ Long rNg-mo ring-po [RT Look, to stdche | mk td-wa FI proved v v Loose lod-po the’ -Iho’ ; yang-hlup 3 a Loosen, to | tol-che dol-wa RFA mye er Lose, to stor chuk-che lak-pa a9 g NN J Loss, to suffer Loss, a Lost, is Love, to Lower down Low ground Lucky Lynx gun p’ok-che gun, got-ma stor yin ydshd cho-che man-chhad smad sd ; mamo sodéchan yi ori ghd’la do-wa ; pdm do-wa ghii’ ; ghd’-ka lak song ; me’-pa la song dzd-o jhye’pa men la ; mar la men sd tashi-chen yi nyompa jhung ARIA ARE FX FANE HR ¢08 ‘AUVINAGVOO0A NVIEAIL ‘AVI == HT S80'T Hi RT et Ep NSU OR SE ES — oS LT Te Co << ENGLisH. Maidservant Maitreya (the coming Buddha) Make, to Man Many Map Market-place Marry, to Master Meaning, the Means Measure, to (length) Measure it! (grain, &c.) Meat Meddle with, to Meditate, to (religiously) Meditation Meet to Mend, to Merchandize LADAKI. yok-mo Byampa choche MaAngpo zing-kod zok-krom bhakston cho-che ; * dns khur-che | déakpo don t’ abs ts’od zumche shor tong sha drésche (with dang pre- ceding) sam-lo tangche sgom ; semgom t'ukche lon-pa gydbche ts’ong chhalak CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArRY TIBETAN. shetdma Jham-pa Jhye’-pa (pr. chyipa); so- wa mi; men: mindd mang-po ; dima sa-t’a tom khyo-shuk jhung-wa ; * chhungrok lenpa pan-po dhon t'dab ts'e’ jalwa sher gyop shi dei-pa (with dhang) tuk gom-pa sam-ten ; teng-ngendzin Jal-v'e’ ghye’pa lhempa gyakpa ts’ong-z0k qs REZ 3x zr 3 NE St Br * spoken only of a man taking a wife. RFE 5 JIN] HIS RENT TARE a ajar NN AH AFT a NVILIIIL AYVIAGVIOA "HZIANVHIY IN — DNINVIER vii Tm a ma i ES re. ae ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Merciful Message Messenger Middle, the Middle of, in the Midnight Midst, in the Milk Milk-vessel or bowl Millet Miry—boggy Mischief Miserable, to be Mist Mistake Mistaken, (you) are Monastery Money Mongol Monkey Month nying-je-chen prin; hun hun khyer-khan us; gung qung-la ts’an-p’ét zhung-la oma 0-20; o-skyan tse-tse | damts’ ok | kagma | duk-ngal rakche \ khug-nd ; rlangspa nor-t’rul tul-pen gomba hmui ; nak Sokpo shri; spryu-mo lda-wa nying-je-chen pin-kur mi-nd kyil-tu nam-ghung Eong-su ; bug-la woma ~ 7 JY Wo-no t'e-tse dam-dzap ; dam-pak kyon duk-ngdl §irwa mu’ -pa ; humpo nor-t’ul sem t'ul jhung ; t'ul-pa-re’ gompa nd-kyang Sokpo te-ii ; shtrégo ddwa SE 5 5 25 iy Sg SR 3 AFIS RRsry| gamer CI - 2 RINE wT saga mara RENE RENER ST zr hl - . v ‘AIVINAVOOA NVIHEGILL AUIN ‘HINORK HH N i a set Ee 1 i A A SL TAA Rg CC SER fi ENGLISH. Moon More (some) More than Morning, in the Morning, this Morrow, to- Most Mostly Moth Mother Mount, to Mountain Mountain-spur Mountain-side Moustache Mouth Move, to (a thing) Move away, to (intrans.) Moved, it has Much Mud LADAKI. lza mang-ngd mang-ngd t'okne (tognas) ; sang t'os ngd-mo dd-nang t’ore mang-chhé mang-ngd mung-ma d-mda ; yum zhonche r1-ga gang-khul ri-ngok kha ; kha-po strulche gulche ; nurche gul-song mang-nga ka-ldk ; mer-mer CENTRAL, TIBETAN. dd-wa yang-kydr ; dhdrung lhak (with ablat :) ndng-mo ; §ho-ge dhd-rang §ho-ge sang-nyin mang-sho p'dlchher muk-dang md ; yum (hon.) §hinpa ; chhip-pa (hon.) 7 7’ gang ghdd ; gdang-kha yartsom ; Shalgyen (hon.) Khi ; khd-tsul [AREA yo-wa qul-wa kya’ jhung ; gul jhung mang-po nyokma LiTERARY TIBETAN. ral) 3x JE 35 xT THREE NES Fg | WS Rl Gx AM bid NEE REXEL ‘AYVINAVIOA NVIAILL INNO ‘dnl a Ll i i a a i a —— EE ——— CE pr ENcrLisH. LiApAxkI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN, Mule Mushroom Mustard Nail Naked Name Named, to be Narrow | Near (prep.) Near (adv.) Necessary, it is Neck Neck-kerchief Needle Neglect, don’t Net Never New News dyw ; driu moksha nyungskar zer cher-nydal ; chergok ming mang tagche zheng-chhungse ldén-la nYE-1mo qo-she yin skye ; Jingpa khdshre khabrul shol ma tob! dol namsang ma soma hun tre-p’o ; tolok shdamo pe-king seru MAT-TUNG-PA mang mang-la tag-pa tokpo ; p’dlmé tsar tsdndv; ta nyé-po goi-gyu yi’ ; kho-che’ re’ kyé koktt ts’em-khab qying ma nang dhol See pages : 69, 95 sarpa lim 25 = = 5 = = Z Z < Qo SS b> oI od = > = 4 ‘4IadNyg —RNooy a Ee ” a ER R AA EE ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LITERARY TIBETAN. Rule tims tim RAT Rumour loplo Ser-ri; Ser-ke’ T/A Run, to gyukche qyuk-pa ; gyuk-shd 15’pa J iad Run away, to Runner, a Run out, to (of water) Rupee Saddle, a Saddle, to Safe Salt Salty Same, the very Sand Satisfied Save, to Saviour Savoury Saw, a Saw, to shorche ; shorte chhache gyuk-khan dzak-che gurmo stdsga stdsga takche ts'dchan de-rang bé-ma dhang-chen kyapche kyap-gon zhimpo gya-sok gyd-sok shrulche “tr == . dot-pa QIN d kyu-po dol-wa chhi-gor ; gyd-tam td-ga gd §hdkpa sdrten ts’d ts'dchen dhe-rang Jhé-ma ts’im-ts’im kyong-wa kyap-gon dante sok-le sok-1é dek-pa RET BEE Fy 4 & 3 3 Fy IRE SINHA ANd] ARRY’ CE *AMVINGVOOA NVIAGLL ‘MVS HAVE ON VR ee et a EE we SESE LS ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Say, to Said, he Says, he Say, will Scales, pair of Scatter, to School Scissors Scorched Scrape, to Sea Seal, to Search for it! Sedan-chair See, go and See, to See, will Seed Seen, have Seize, to tah zerche ; molche zer song zer duk zer'in ; lab-bin shrang tamche lob-khang chhan-pa rddche gyats’o dém-khd gydpche ts’al tong ! gyok-chyang song-la tos t’ongche ; stache t'ongin brudok t’ong-pen ; staspen zumche ; 'amche Serwa ; sungwa a | MYR — sung-wa yin 8 _ Ser; sung-gi-duw’ ~ od - . . Ser-qyu yo 2X a WN No tula tor-wa ; torné gyap-pa THR lob-dd ; lap-td NEE) 4 chemise ; dimise AFA pe ene se-8hop-pé NGS de’pa a5 27.9 v ~s gydts'o ND ddmkha gyakpa ; tétse gydkpa ts’al ghyi sik! tsa-cho’ FRTR FAT jhyt shik p'ep-chyang ERAT REE toi-shok FGA t’ ongwa A t'ong-gyu-yin ; mik td yong ~~ v sabon N [4 t'ong-jhung su t'op gyap-pa; nampa | AEF 8E¢ *XYVIAGVI0A NVLHALILL ‘HZIZS—— VAS RGR 4 4 EJ BRR SE SS (SH TE 3 he aT HE ENGLISH, LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArRY TIBETAN. Sell, to Send, to Send for, to Send, word ! Sent, was Sent, will be Separate, to Servant Set out, to Sew, to Shake, to Share Sharp Shave, to Sheep Sheep, flock of Sheep-skin Shelter (any) Shoot, to Short Short cut, a ts’ongche kélche boche in tong ! khél-song ; kalpen kallin gdrte borche kholpo ; kholmo chhdche ; Tyotche ts’emche shrukche ; gulche go-kal nonpo brekche luk luk-khyu luk-lok skyip p’angche t'ungse ; Yungan t'ung-lam ts’ong-wa dzang-wa ; kur-wa ; tangpa guk-pa t'in ting! tang-pa re’ ; dzang dw tang-qyu yin ghye’-pa ; kha telwa §hdl-tapa, ; She-tama dul-wa is’empa zob-20p jhe-pa go-kal ; goké nompo §har-wa luk luk-khyu Tuk-pdk yap-sd ; gyam p'empa ; menda gyap-pa Pung-ngu gyok-lam REET ah RERET SES SS Azar HR AERA RANE oye *AUVIAGYDOA NVIFILL ‘LAO LIOHS-—AAVHS Yap VAR ae 1 Ve RD A ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArRY TIBETAN. Shoulder Shout out, to Shovel Shut, to Sick, I am—he is— Side, the Side of, on the Sight, in Sikkim Silent Silver Sin Sin, to be cleansed from Sinful Sink, to Sinner Sir Sister Sister, elder Sit, to bisra tangche khyem kagche ndd-kyi zir duk ldo deb-la tong khor-la Das-jong chhem-chhem mul dikpa dikpa salche dikchan horche dikpa-po Sab; d-jo shringmo a-she dadche (impera. dod.) or dukche t'rakpa boi-da gyakpa ; ke’tangpa khyem kak-pa ; ts'umpa (nga-la, kho-la) nd-ts’d gyak-ght yi’ ne '. lo; $ho FN" (hon.) der-la t'ong khor-la Dénjong chhem-mer ngul dikpa dikpa salwa—jang-pa dik chen nerwa dikpo ; me dikchen kusho ; tha stngmo a-chhe khar-wa ; de’-pa er YI al RAFAT ZasyAgE ) mpg 2 2 RGNERSr RA a Bers Rage Te 1S 3A] RIS EF WE x ) NH) I n $Y ot a ere } i i Sl EN I ET, *A9VINGVOOA NVLHEILL LNATIS “LIS eve ENGLISH. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Size Sleep, to Slip down, to Slipping, I am Slope, a Slowly Smell, a Smell, to Smoke Snake Snow Snow-storm So, (i. e., “like that”) Soap Soft Softly Some (adj. § pron.) Somebody Something Son Song ts’éd nyid-la chdche ded-de gyelche ded-de shor duk ngok gul-gul dry ar snumche dudpa rul ; sbrul khé khad-ts’up a’zuk sabon bolmo guléla ; s@dmsum re-sqd chigchik cha-tong bu-tsd ; shras lu chhe-chhung khye nyt-lokpa shorné gyel-wa de’-ték shor-ghi yin ghad ; khad-pa ngang-ghy ; gor-po t tr nom-pa tu-d ; dhii’pa dul khau-d ghang-ts'ub dhende shukpa ; lang-le’ bolpo ghale ; samsum khd-she la-la Shik ; su-Shik chi Shik bhu ; se-bhu lu; lu-yang BY pp = 3) RIA q ARF TGR AFR ERA qu x Sa sw = RN] FR R&S CINCY RENE RNRTR | AFR’ SE J] AW ql ~~ *AYVINGVOOA NVILHEIIL ‘ONOS — MONS ) lu — so" eh i ONAL Td Le TS ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArRY TIBETAN. Sorry for, to be Sort, what Soul Sound Speak, to Speak of, to (mention) Spoilt, is Sportsman Squeeze it ! Stand up, to Stag (Cervus Thoroldr) Steep Step (of ladder) Stick, a Stick, to (of a cart, &c.) Stone Stomach Stop, to Straight (adj.) Straight (adv.) Strayed, has dukngdal yodche che nats’ ok nam-shes ra zerche zhodche khakpo song khyi-ra-khan cher cher tong! lang-te dadche sha-wa-ru-lep zdng-zong shral-dang berka jarche do-wa ; do-it dodpa kagche dang-po kyang-kyang yan song sem dukpa ghang rik sem-nyi ; nam-sher da-ke’ lap-pa jo’ pa sang 9 hung khyi-ra-pa lem-né cher [wa. lang-né do-pa ; kyére sheng- shau-a-ru-chu sarpo te-ka ; t’emso yukpa kharwa do to-ko; dhi’pa kik-pa dong-po ; shrangpo t'é-kang-la ; kha-du yar song NFAT 3wg PRN] MN 5 =2T 5 zy SAI ATE ATZAE NRE NRy 3X ARYA 3 35 <4 RIS RT AUAVINIVIOA NVIHILL PVILS "THAVULS i a aI ET faba ExcGrisH. LADAEKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LaTErRARY TIBETAN. Strong Stupid Stupid-fellow Such as this Suddenly Suffer, to Substitute, a (Hind. badl?) Sugar Sun Support, to Sure Surface, on the Swallow, to Sweep, to Sweet Sweets Swim, to Sword Syllable Syphilis rempa ; remrem len-nak bong-gqutsok 1-2ug-g¢ (before noun) hurpo sir-che ; ts’aps guram nYi-ma ; nYoma kyarche tanpo kha-la smidche chhakdar gyapche ngarmo zhamazak kydl gyapche ral-gye ts’ekwar parang nad shegchen ; $he’-mo lempa hliimpo dinddwe (before object) har-ghyi ; tap-tap-la Sir-wa ; narwa ts’dp-po chéma-kara nyi-ma kyong-wa t’dkchho khd-t ok-la khyur m?’-pa chhakdar gyakpa nYarpo Shim-8him kyal gyak-pa ra-gyt ts’eqbhar rekduk ; khulu A535 | 5 ar FA Hay RANA ET _—- Sar Ea ga ES FRI NE AEN I XA Aaya ‘AUVINAVDOA NVIFIIL ‘STTIHd AS ~~ LI0dd As A RE HS Teste 4 ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTerArY TIBETAN. Table Tail Tailor Take away, to Take away Take, to Take off (clothes, &c.), to Take out! Take out from, to Talk (subst.) Tall Taste (flavour) Tax Tea Tea-pot Teach, to Teacher Tear up, to Tell, to Temple Tent choktsé ; sol-stak shngama ts'empa ; ts’emkhan khyerche khur khyer ! kyelche p’udche! p’ings tong tonche spéra go-ring dob-lak pya-t'ang ja tibril lab-tangche lab khan shralche shadche Lha-khang qur sol-chok ; t oktse ngdma ; Shu-gi ts’empa khur do-wa khur song ! kyalwa pipe AYNE yung song ! | | | jo'pa ; lap-chha ringpo ; jong-jong dho-wa pya-t’al ghd ; so’-jha ghambing ¢ khok-t': lob-pa lo-pon hralpa she’pa ; tam Serwa lha-khang da-ghur FE Ear INA aE SN qa 23 Far THN] SA olay Sar 5s agar HA TRE r *AMVINAVOOA NVLULLL i Re... = i } ATM We Hg (PANTY Lf ORB TIL 11 EVAR A po RE ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. Tent-pole Terrific deity Than Thank-you much Thank, to Then Thick Thick (of fluids, &c.) Thickness, the Thief Thigh Thin i | © Thin (of fluids, mist, &e.) Thing | Think, to (imagine) Think about, to Thirsty, I am Throat Throw, to Throw away, to Thumb gur-ber dak shed simg (following word gov- erned) kd-din chhe! tang-rak p’ulche de-la ; de-ts’e-la TOMPO skante shrapt'uk skunma lisha | shrdp-mo sing-sing ; linte | chha-lak | sdmche | sam-lo tangche | ngd-la skom-ri rik par | gyapche ; tibche | p’angche ; drimche |" t’é-bong ghur-shing jik-jhe thi; Th t o-wo le (ditto) £u’-je-chhe ! kd-din-chhe ! lésol p’ulwa dhe-tsa-na bompo gdrpo ; mongpo (of mist) sap-t'uk kiimpo ; kium-ma vlad t’d-mo ; simbhu STM-SVM ; SENGPO chhi-la; chha-kha nyampa ; mik-la tangpa sam-lo tangpa ngdrang-la kom yo wokma yuk-pa ; gyak-pa bhor-wa ; yung-wa t'ebbo ; t'ebchhen aka BE AN] J MARRY RR] Rar RA ge SRG M AN SE NR (= x RRR Chl Aas 53] ARNE AREA] RARE NA *ANVTIAIVIOA NVLHILL HHIHL *HWAHL TE _ = " | I ay. I TRA vay YUP TTT O hh. Tg TE By ENGLISH. LIADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. Literary TIBETAN. Thunder Thus (like this) Tibet Tibetan, a Tibetan tongue Tie, to Tight Time (period) Time, the (for anything) Tinder Tired, are you Tobacco-pipe To-day Toes, the Tongue Too; too much Tooth Torn, has been Touch, to Touch, don’t Towards bruk ; bluk v-2uk Bodyul Bod-ma Bodkad ; Bot chhingche £ angmo dus ; yun skabs tsa khyod-la ngdl song ? gang zk di-ring ; alta kangsor leche mang-drak shral-song nywkche ; t'wkche ma tuk! gan-du dug-ke’ finda RNRIA Bhi’ -yil (Po’-yil) Bhi’pa (Pipa) ; Pi’ky: ma Bhi’-ke’ khyik-pa t'ang-t’ang dhii ; dhue ren 2; kap shrd-wa khyorang tang chhe’po re’ ghang-§ak dhe-ring kangsor che ; ja (hon). hachang ; drakne so; ts'em (hon). ral jhung ; zhik jhung nyukpa ; chhang-pa ma chhang ; ma wyuk ! te’-la AZTHY RYE Fryar Ra FHS RARE RN ST 5 BR ENgRES *XUVINAVOOA NVIZELL *SAYVMOI — dIILL a A 50 A A HRs MA RMA ge ES ENGLISH. LADAKT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTErARY TIBETAN. Town Trade, to Trafficker Translate, to Translation Transmigration Trap Tree Trial of, to make Trousers True Truth Try, to (endeavour) Turn, to (to right, left, &e.) Turn over, to (wood, &c.) Turn round, to (wheel, &c.) Turn-by-turn Umbrella Unable, is Under gyal-sa zong qyapche khe-pa kad p’abche qYUrwe khor-lam dem ; nyvng-ngu shing ts’od stache dorma ; kangsndm rdenpa denpa badche chhyokche bubche korche ’ rémos chos la chhar-rib mi nyan duk yok-la dhong-khyer ts'ong gyakpa khe-ts’ong-pa da p’abpa qyurwa khor-wa nyt ; gal dong) shing (tree-trunk: shing- ts’’ lenpa dhorma dempa ; 1go-0 dempa ; nge-pa dhondhu nyerpa ; tson-dus jhe’pa kyokpa pub-pa ; lok-pa kor jhe-'pa ; kor gyappa ts'irla ; ts'vr ts'ir wu-d chok ma re’ ; chokpa me’ wok-la ; kha-wak TES Ear QRF Ar CR Ras 1 ay jar RFR x5 “ART SRR *AUVIAIVOOA NVIEIIL I i Oe BB b ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. oP -. hd-go-che ¢-la zin-pa ; hd-gho-wa | J] q EY Understand, to Unfinished t'é-rel ma ts’ang-ma va Unroll, to tolche lok til-wa Unripe jenpa ma ts’oschen tukpa ; pen Sl Until ts’ ukpa a t'ukpa ; kam-la *XYVIQIVO0A NVIHIIL Up to ts'ukpa Upon kha-tod-la ; teng-na tang-la Upper, the gyenchhad yagi; t0’-ky Upward, Up (adv.) gyen-la ; yar-la gyen-la ; yar Urge on, to nanche be’ -pa Useful Useless, it 1s Use, to Usual Usually Vacant (untenanted) Valley Valuable Very Vexod, to be p’andoks chhon-la duk lob-khyad choche p’alpe (before noun) mangché stong lungpa konmo zhe-sun rakche | plen-t’o dhon-me’ re’ chyd’-pa ; kyel-wa tal; tinmong chyi-la ; tin-chywr yempa lungpa kompa hdchang (preceding adj.) or t'dk-chho (after it) gongpa ts'wmpa JF SCEAC, Sh) Zr A gr QRZ SUEY Zr Hy SHRM ENA Tadasn ‘TAXHTA cp 1 ov ENGLISH. LADAKI. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiterARY TIBETAN. Victorious, to be Village Virgin Vomit, to Wages Walk, to Walk, to take a Wall Want, I Wanted, not Want to (would like to) War Warm one’self, to Warm Wash, to Watch, a Watch, to keep Water Water-tub gyalche yults’o ; yul zhon-numa kyukche p'oks ; la-cha dulche gom tangche sik-pa ngd-la gos kho-che met t'ad (following other verb) rmak-hruk lde-che don-mo tuche qukte dadche chhu chhu-zem gye-wa dhong-qu pumo sarpa ; ménshdr kyuk-pa | plok dulwa ghom dowa tsikpa ; bharkya ngdrang-la kho-jhe yo’ mingo ga-ki-dw’ (ditto) mdk-t’ ap de-wa dhion-mo t'ui-pa chhuts’o’ khorlo shrung-wa ; sorang jhe’'pa chhu ; chhap (hon.) chhu-shong Sg TR TRF Tr RIE A EAR Xr RRRFAr x SA Jw 5 SFR IFAT SRETRST 7 X% ag FERRER wa ~ No 098 *AYVINIVOOA NVIHGLL AAL~dILVM = LNVM 19€ cc 2 arr aE IIIT. y — ExGrisH. Way, the Way of doing Way, to open a Weak (of soup, wine) Weak Wear, to Wear out, to Weary, to feel Wearied of, am Weary, to Weigh, to Weight, the Well, a Well (properly) Well! very West, the Wet What Wheat Wheel lam shul skabs borche sing ; lante shedchhung gonche gokpo choche sunna rakche sunna rak song ngal chukche chalche shrang ts’ad khronpa lak-mo ; nmantdn dik dik! nup rlanchan cha ? dro khorlo CENTRAL TIBETAN. lam t'ab ; tsil t’ab jhye’-pa FT la-po N A she-chhung ; kyar-ra-kyor- re ghon-pa — sen-pa siim-po §irwa sem sin jhung AR FREE QZIER aya REY zr TE Jz siin-jhe’pa shrang-la jalwa ; tulad tek- pe shrang-ts'o ; dek-kha chhu-mik le-mo yd’po ! nup sherpo ; sher ghang ? dho khorlo RQ Sa LITERARY TIBETAN. ‘AAVINIVOOA NVILALILL THHHM — X4VEM AC —————————————— i pr ExGLisH. LADAEKT, CENTRAL TIBETAN. LiTERARY TIBETAN. While Whip Whistle, a Whistle, give a White White wash, to Whose Whole, the Whole (undivided) Whole day, the Why Wide Width Wife Wild Willing, are you Wind, the Window Wing Winter Wish, to zdna (after verb of sen- tence) chdk shug-ra hu hu tong ! karpo markarlaga tangche SU-1 ts’ angpo son-te nyin t'ak-t’ok chi-la ? or chi-p’i-a? zhang-zhang ; hel-hel zhangts’ad ane ; chhungma rgod khyod t'ddkhan yin-na ? lungpo kdrkhung shokma gunkha t’adche la-la (after verb of sen- tence ta-chak shuk-da shuk-da gyak! karpo kartsi gyakpa so-kyi tsangma ; lip lingpo ; ghdngmo Ryin ghang ghang-gu ton-la ? yang-po ; sheng-chen sheng-kha kyemen ; nangma ; chhung- di ngarma ; go’ gong-pa nang-ngd lung ; hlakpa gyd-kar ; gi-khung shokma gtinka do’-pa ; ts’alwa 3 PFI T= TRINH EF HY ARAr WEATH | G35 EF EH RY TN RARER EA FARR TFET TT RRFEr NVIAIILL *AYVINGVIOOA ‘HSIM— AHM ENGLISH. LApAkT. CENTRAL TIBETAN. LaTERARY TIBETAN. . -~ Witch khddoma khddhoma NRA NN Witness (in law-court) mar-pang mi-pdng NAAR Wolf shangku chyang-ku FT ~ Woman bomo bhii-me’ ; kye-men NN] NARS TR) ~ . ne Wonderful yats’amchan yats’empo Ww NES 9] . oN Wood shing shing I= Wool bal bhal JA SN Woollen balchan bhdalchen Ar qr . TS . Word ts'ik ts'ik a9) Work (labour) le-kd le-kd ; So AN Work, to le-kd choche leka jhe’pa ; So-wa AN INA Work, the (manufacture) | zo So qx World Jik-ten Jikten REA Worth, what is it ri-che chi yinnd khoské ghd ts'o ? Rgds Wound, a Wrap up, to Write, to Writing materials Written, have Written, anything Wrong sma-kha rilche driche drispen yi-ge osmed ’ ma shub-su dilwa yige di-wa di-we yo-che’ di jhung yi=ge ~ . ~ . WOL-MmAn ; ML-01-Pa I wT FREAK AAR SRA 99¢ *X4VINgvO0A NVIAFLL *OPNOYM =—HAJOM L986 3 i a ———— d . A rr Ce tg 2 de E—— _n aS LF sigur te a TE _— 4 | 368 TIBETAN VOCABULARY. 3 Be : APPENDIX. BE MONGOL- TARTAR WORDS AND PHRASES. = . . ic kr [Mongol traders and pilgrims are constantly encountered in N -E. Tibet he WU Vv“ Wr 3 Lc pom and at Lhésd. These mostly speak Tibetan, but give to many letters a i \er & AL Ac i i) peculiar pronunciation. Thus gy is usually sounded j, and khy and ky as chh | and ch; while d and t, ts and ch are often interchanged. It was probably this distorted pronunciation which influenced the American traveller, Mr. 2 Rockhill, to adopt his extraordinary system of transliteration for Tibetan = place-names in his, otherwise, most reliable narrative of exploration. The & IY Jama who taught Mr. Rockhill at Peking was evidently a Mongol ; and the Ee S curious syllabary in his Appendix, wherein he sets forth the phonies of | = 3 Lhdsd, was plainly founded on ‘Mongol information. As a possible aid to : 2 . travellers, T have thought it well to annex a few useful words and phrases in 5 i. 3 8, Mongolized Tibetan as well as in the genuine Mongol language, the latter iy S & 3 S the colloquial idiom of the South. N.B.—In Monzol words, the vowels mark- co & % T= "= ed long, thus a, #, &c., have a greatly prolonged and somewhat guttural intonation, being sounded deep in the throat. TkLe h is likewise guttural, being identic with the Persian C in such words as khabar, Khuda, &c. The Mongol adjective, unlike the Tibetan, precedes its noun. ] 3 ENGLISH. MoNGOL-TIBETAN. MoNGOL~TARTAR. a « Good Jdg-po sain = ? 3 Bad wdg-po mdgo (often md) = “3 3 Not good ma le-mo sain bishe > = S < 3 Great chhembo iké 3S, 2 S $ z S = Small chhung bhdga Much mangbo olon Little alich titsiin All; the whole kun ; gangmo kdmuk ; bu-hid Thin t’dmo narin . Strong she’mo hiitsin | = Good enongh saishik | | 3 New sarba shind = ro g North chang buguk EB » g 4 8 South he | Bree I be bm bei be I bn White y karbo tsdghan 4 E———— 370 APPENDIX. ENGLISH. MoNGOL-TIBETAN. Black ndgpo Red mdrbo Blue ombo Yellow serbo Man mi-bo Woman, wife pwme’ Boy potso House nang ; khim Tree shing Road ; path lam Land sdchhd Ground, the sd Stone do Town dron-chher River sangpo Mountain 71 Lake chho Plain tang Mountain Pass la Wood shing Fire mé Water chhu Sand Jéma Salt ts'a Butter mdr Milk homa Bird syd Marmot chhipt Sheep fuk Ox hldng Camel ngamon(y Horse tapo Horses, herd of td-chho (or td-khyo) Dog chha Bear demo Old man ganbo One—two—three chig=—nyi—sum Four—five—six zhi=——g dm druk Seven—eight—nine Ten—hundred dun-—gydt—gu chu-tamba—gyd Which ?—What >~Who ? kang /—kang su 2 Cl il i Co da MoNGOL-TARTAR. hdra wldng ko-ko shdra kumiin ; ere eme hubiin ger modo jdm; mur gadzar shéré chulin hoton gul ula nur tala hutul modo gal 08SU elesun tabsun tosun sdga shubin tarbdga huni imé temén Morin adan nohoy itigo obgon nige—khojdr—gurban dorbon—tdbun—zhorgon tolon—naimdn—yissiin arbdn—dzin aly ?—jun ?=ken ? ENcrisH. Eternal life Come here Go further off Begin this Clean that Get up Run away Take it to them Go inside the tent He took it Come in five days Write a letter Lift the pack on the horse = ———— Go after the goats The man has come Your camels have gone This was given me Give me water Speak to them Dig the ground here Cut up the sheep I will taste the butter Are you at peace? Reverence be (to you) Are your herds well ? Eemain in peace Is there tranquility in your a country : Is the grass plentiful there : Have you seen our horses : Who is this man: He is my elder brother : APPENDIX, MoNGOL-TIBETAN. MoNGOL-TARTAR. ts'e t'd-ye mong-ho dmin dirw shok ! p’drchham song ! dika go-dzuk ! dhega tsangwa chi! entur irten ! kholo ydbu ! ene 6goskho tere arche ! langne dod ! bostan ! hd-la gyuk niss ydabu de-ts’o-la di khur song! ene teden-tur bdri ! gur nangdw song kabidka-in dotoro ydbu kho len-pa-re’ tere ene dbd shak ngd shuk-la shok tdbun édiir khoino irten bichik bichi morin dero acha da yige dri chik ydman-w arda ddga mibo lep-pa-re’ Kiimun vrdzu tanu temén ydbulds - ene ndadwr ugkiiksen but nga-la chhu nang chik ossu nadur ik de-ts’o-la ke lap teden-tur tgule gadzar-dur ende eri luk tub chik hunin dnzhdla ’ ” ” ’ . ’, - nga mdr dho-wa td yong bd tosun-i amkurkuw bo amwr bhaino ? sollo ! mand ! khyod-kyi khyo le-sam ? tdnw sirik sain bhaino kdle zhu! amurli! tanw gddza-dwr dmuguldng bhaino ? tende ebusun olon bii-it ? tdn-anu manw morid-i odzon ? ene kiimiin ken bui ? ene minw akhd bua. BE ————— ERRATA AND ADDENDA. ERRATA AND ADDENDA. - Page 22, line 24: lak should be omitted from list of sub- stantives invariably monosyllabic. Page 27, lines 7 & 25: fsdna is correct, but tsine is the usual form. Page 37, line 8: for t'o-wa read t’o-a. line 20 : for Dhiid-do read Tiin-do. 9 Page 41, line 30: for Chupgu read Chu-gu. Page 44, line 18: for “to arrive” read “to depart.” Page 58, line 9: Tibetan idiom requires that this sentence should be turned “I observed the body of the ox dying,” 1. e., Nge lang-qghi ro shi-wa t’ong jhung. Page 66, lines 3 & 4: dhin-dhdk-la is ordinarily sounded tin- da-la. Page 97, line 23: for foi shik read to shok. Page 103, line 13, &c: for bhdmo read bhdchu. Page 119, line 4: for §hdak read gung-shdk. Page 131, line 12: for “often as” read ‘‘as often as.” ws sy 15: for tang read tang. Page 132, line 9: for “is!” read “is?” yw ss ss 24: for “broad” read “bread.” Page 136, lines 2, 5, 7, 10 & 34: for ke and ké read ke’. ., 5 lines 35 & 36: for jé read je'. Page 164: Tdkpa is the name for any white-flowered rhododen- dron, and Tdkma for red-flowered varieties: the Tibetan idea being that all the former are male trees and the latter female. Page 168: To list of deer, add the Cervus Thoroldi ; in Tibetan shau-é-ru-chu (not shoa-u-chu, as in Captain Bower's narrative) meaning ““ The ten-antlered stag.” Page 171: line 1: for Ghong-sek read Ghong-shig ; and in line 3, omit ‘“ Sekpa: partridge.” Page 192: another name for a Mendang is Mdni-ringpo. Page 198: The chief emanations of the goddess Dolma are Dol-jang and Dol-kar, the Green and the White Dolma, respectively. Page 213, line 3: for “snow” read ‘stone.’ ’ PIRI PHE MASTER NEGATIVE 'S STORED UNDER Type SERVICE, Room 20. BERKELEY | CALIF , FROM WHICH THIS REPRODUCT 10N WAS MADE SUPERV IS TON OF THE LIBRARY PHOTOGRAPH | MA IN LIBRARY UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA ORNIA 9 4 7 9 0 FOR ADDITIONAL, RIZP RODUCT TON REQUEST MAS TER NEGATIVE NUMBER